Home

E5AR-T E5ER-T Programmable Digital Controller User`s Manual

Contents

1. ES e BIC 24 VACIDC 00to 240 VAC OL xi N 27 2 100 to 240 VAC TA o 170 SUB1 B suBe c DH ne 1 L L BH _ SUB2 B SUB7 C 4 GA B Input power supply 3 d M m depends on model SUB3 B SUBB C lt 4 5 3 ni T enero 20 Sub SUBSIC HOHE 4 E ity 5 5 SUB5 B SUB10 C L 5 e 40 6 Aa d TE 6 LMA RS 485 73r e Event inputs D E D m 17 OUT2 1 pot RS 485 1 i t AC 1 t HV Event inputs E Voltage output 12 V Barc 2 D E 2 an 40 mA _ in EV3 E EV7 D gt 2 OUT2 lt 3 pog OUT1 4 bn Voltage output 12 V 40 mA m Voltage output 12 V 5 rie EVE EVER x BUT 1 i 4 4 1 EV3 m o 2 a r Ii I rt 1 e 7 ri EVS E EV9 D acm Voltage output 12 V 6 E EVA a x 3 h 1 40 mA or E 6 1 uu b m 5 7 2 max E F Mi EV6 E EV10 D TE Current output 6 T EVS II 4 0751575 max COM ux 4 to 20 mA DC 500 O max PET C Switched by output type setting G C 0 to 20 mA 500 Q max EV6 Fa 9 6 7 Event inputs N a Switched by output type setting J e
2. Input Initial Setting less than 1 second Control Initial less than 1 second Control Initial Setting Level Setting Level 2 Level TF H T Input 1 T Qu uu x7 p101 T Output 1 Type S EJ OPEV l Bo e Pulse voltage output 0 Direct Reverse Operation utput 1 Assignmen Transfer Output 4 Upper Limit Linear current output 1 ar 7 Reverse OR R Direct OR D DA Con roll c 4 11DU Input 1 Temperature Units O3 T Output 3 Type CLFL Closed Floating Transfer Output 4 H TRL 4 on C F amp 3 L Pulse voltage output 0 EYE Floating FLOAT Assignment Tena Cutis Eu Limit jeg Linear current output 1 UH Closed CLOSE inputi LAG 1 First Order Lag STER Independent Operation Operation 1 Enabled 12 T Input 2 Type Pairk n Fac Coordinated Operation 2 OFF ON m t1 T i 0 to 81 0 to 19 i E m m to 20 mA 1 Aut t Independent Operation MULT EV 10 Event Input LAG 4 First Order Lag ye CO2 T Li C Ye Coordinated Operation SNGL 10 Assignment Operation 4 Enabled FI3 T Linear Curren 0 to 81 OFF ON I2DU Input 2 Temperature Unit fact Output 2 Type we omens i 2511601 Lage 0 to 20 mA 0 4 to 20 mA 1 15 SBO 1 Auxiliary Output MAV 1 Movement d lt r CO3 T Linear
3. 1 2 4 The registered input calibration value state is displayed as shown at left Connect a precision digital meter DMM below to the output terminal of the linear current output as shown below Press the ce Key The display at left will appear and 20 mA calibration will begin While viewing the output on the DMM use the and Keys to set the output to 20 mA In the example at left 20 mA is displayed at a value 2 digits smaller than before calibration Press the cel Key The display at left will appear and 4 mA calibration will begin While viewing the output on the DMM use the Al and 221 Keys to set the output to 4 mA In the example at left 4 mA is displayed at a value 2 digits smaller than before calibration Press the Key The display at the left will appear This display will not appear if all of the required data has not been tentatively registered or if the data has not been changed Press the Key Display No 2 will show 4E5 Two seconds after the Key is released or when the is pressed the tentatively registered calibration data will be stored in EEPROM If you do not wish to save the data in EEPROM press the el Key instead of the A Key 9 6 Output Calibration e f there is
4. 9 10 The procedure for calibrating a resistance thermometer is provided in this section Use wiring of the same thickness for the connections 1 Connect the power supply 2 Connect a precision resistance box a 6 dial model in this procedure to the input terminal of the resistance thermometer as shown at left 3 Turn ON the power 4 Move to Calibration Level A 30 minute aging timer will begin Perform aging using this timer as a guideline When 30 minutes has elapsed Display No 2 will show O You can proceed to the next stop before the display shows 0 5 Press the Key cel to display the count value for each input type At this time the count value that was input will be displayed on Display No 2 in hexadecimal Set the 6 dial resistance box as follows e Input type 0 390 Q e Input type 1 1600 6 Wait until the count on Display No 2 is sufficiently stable and then press the Key This tentatively registers the calibration data at this point 9 5 Resistance Thermometer Calibration I Input type 0 7 Press the Key The display at the left will appear D Set the 6 dial resistance box as follows e Input type 0 20 Q Input type 1 40 Q
5. Adjustment Adjustment 2 k os Level 227 Level 79 I ey ey a a An key p ce less than 1 s less than 1 s less than 1 s key less ind 1s than1s 7277 7 PID Setting 77 Level L LEZL key Level Ld key Level Pd key Wievel EALA Control in progress Parameter Changes within Time Signal Setting Level Time Signal Setting Level l PRG N Program Editing Program 1 Program 32 TSG1 6 Time Signal 6 Setting Segment 1 0 to Number of Segments 4 TON1 6 Time Signal 6 ON Time 1 rir 0 00 to 99 59 or 0 00 0 to 99 59 9 A TOF1 6 Time Signal 6 OFF Time 1 nn 0 00 to 99 59 or 0 00 0 to 99 59 9 TOF3 6 Time Signal OFF Time 3 r 0 00 to 99 59 or 0 00 0 to 99 59 9 8 43 I Section 8 Parameters CH Program Editing CH n Setting Time Signal Set Segment 1 Time Signal Set Segment 2 Time Signal Set Segment 3 1 to 6 8 44 E Setting w w m CH1 or CH2 during independent operation with time signal enabled This parameter is used to set the program number of the program to be set Setting range LI Default value Note The current program number Related Pa
6. Auxiliary outputs E Auxiliary outputs Relay outputs 5 Transistor outputs B C B 24 VAC DC 1100 to 240 VAC Tan o COM tp A R s COM lt u BGAE G sus i No T yer SUB1 B SUB6 C lt m m 507 li 1 SUB2 B SUB7 C 14 14 1 Eel J 1 1 1 B C lt 3 l G T SUB2 Input power supply 1 E depends on model 3 SUB3 B SUB8 C X 4 l COM Tu E m brio oss d 2 il ili SUB4 B suea amp rs ii il X B C VAC DC no polarity 1 j x L m 1 Gor suBs i 5 SUB10 C A i zy m e 5 B SUB10 C 6 J H i 6 oo SUB4 B 2 1 aa 2 df 1 1 nea B lt oim RS 485 240 B tt Event inputs 012 OUT2 a Event inputs E B 4 9 puts E Voltage output 12 V 3 ar rt o Current output D 40 mA EE 4 to 20 mA 500 Q max TO PX OUT 4 d ut i EV3 E EV7 D r x 2 I I 0 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max EV3 2 2 Voltage output 12V HG Zu EV4 E EVB D Hac 3 Switched by output EV4 La ex 3 40 mA or m type setting 46 7 ilim amimi EV5 E EVs D F OUT1 EV5 Ha o e 4 4 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max F EV6 E EV10 D Fa 5 Current output 6 0 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max COM 4 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max B EV6 N Switched by output type
7. Adjustment Adjustment 2 Alarm Set Time Signal l 1 Setting Setting 1 Level r Level Level ein Level i I key less L key less key less key less key less key less L key less i I than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s i key less than 1 5 I K aa b key key 7 EUN Control stops SS z x ox m Input Initial Control Initial Control Initial inn Display Communications Setting Setting Setting Setting Adjustment Setting I i Level key Nevel key levelt 2 J s Okey Level key i less than1s less than 1 s less than 1 s less than 1 s less than 1 s f key less than 1 s L Lu 0 m damn t L es LZ Tasa d in ay Sy 5 ED CO Control in progress CD Control stopped Parameter Changes within Initial Control Setting Level Control Initial Setting Level O1 T Output 1 Type Pulse Voltage Output O Linear Current Output 1 O3 T Output 3 Type Pulse Voltage Output O Linear Current Output 1 CO1 T Linear Current Output 1 Type 0 20mA 0 4 20mA 1 CO2 T Linear Current Output 2 Type 0 20mA 0 4 20mA 1 CO3 T Linear Current Output 3 Type 0 20mA 0 4 20mA 1
8. AT begins when the AT Execute Cancel parameter is changed from OFF to O While AT is being executed flashes on Display No 1 Display No 2 shows the PID set number currently being used for control When AT ends the AT Execute Cancel parameter goes OFF and the display stops flashing AT begins and the displays show the following Display No 1 Flashing display indicating AT is running Display No 2 Shows selected PID set number To stop AT select 622 AT Cancel If you attempt to move to the Operation Level and display the PV or SP while AT is being executed Display No 2 will flash to indicate that AT is being executed e Only the Communications Writing Run Reset AT Execute Cancel and Auto Manual parameters can be changed while AT is running No other settings can be changed e f the Run Reset parameter is set to Reset while AT is being executed AT will stop and operation will stop If Run is then selected AT will not resume e f an input error occurs while AT is being executed AT will stop AT will run again after recovery from the error 4 34 B Limit Cycle 4 10 Determining the PID Constant
9. 2 Press the cel Key to select 5 a Number of Segments Used Press the e Key to select 6 segments Number of Segments Used P El Lat 1 gt ON re El 3 2 2 g X Yw X 3 Press the el Key to select 526 Segment Editing Change from End Segment Editing 4 to Y d K MANU 4 Press the el Key to select 52 Segment Set Point Press the A Key to set Segment the set point to 200 0 Set Point 5 Press the e Key to select Segment Time Press the lA Key to set Segment Time the time to ZG MANU ce 6 Press the el Key to select A Wait Make sure the setting is a 3 5 I Section 3 Typical Control Examples 7 Press the el Key to return to 5 L 4 Segment Editing The segment Segment Editing number will automatically change to 2 des L sss g V 8 Press the kel Key to select 5 Segment Set Po
10. LL LL LL LL O O o D g o DIN Se prc OFF OFF d n aaa aa aa aaa o OFF ME 10 Setting Lists I Operation state Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 De om Due oem Due l l Dem l l l l v l l v l l me e l l 9 Not used Note 1 Status is as follows when reading from setting area 1 e Segment Outputs 1 to 10 and Time Signals 1 to 6 Cleared e Hold and Wait Clear e Program End Output Previous value held e Standby Clear 2 Segment Outputs 1 to 10 and Time Signals 1 to 6 status depend on the setting of the Program Output Selection parameter 3 The Program End Output status will be ON when the display shows 2 2 4 Appendix P o z 91 0 20000000 01 00000000 a o SY t 91 0 F0000000 H 01 00000000 H Dumes enu zoso 1000 uonoejoJg 1ueuusn py uonejedo 00S0 0000 1 NO 10000000 H 440 0 440 00000000 H uonoejoJd eM Jd 9090 000 1 NO 10000000 H 440 0 440 00000000 uonoejo4gd Dumes voso 2000 Bul uonisod uMes keid 6 6 en eA 18S un urod peuoeg ynejaq e dsiq eGues 10juouj Bunmes suoneoiunuuuioo BIA Buliolluoui pue Sum s JO ae H Ag pexijeud sen eA Joyuouj Dumegs t 91 L V0000000 H 01 L0000000 H
11. Standard Control with Remote SP Heating Cooling Control with Remote SP Proportional Corto eu u u uy Cascade Standard Control Cascade Heating Cooling Control Position proportional Control 4 7 Setting Output Parameters COMMOMPCHOG za Sua oi s o GALA Direct Operation Cooling Reverse Operation Heating QU eU MPO np uy amu ee a Quiput ASSIODEFDODIS cst ocio uuu uu e Tb 49 Program Selli 0S ve ASA A a aa 36 Outline of Program Functions Program T aramelefS Program Setting Example 4 9 Performing ON OFF Control ON OFF COMM Ol e UNS Er 4 10 Determining the PID Constants AT or Manual Settings PAULO UAC A T9 kuu heated olubdi Limit ce a uladasqas Manual etinss m mmu a oris 4 1f Using Auxiliary OUIDHIS Auxiliary Output Assignments
12. 8 Wait until the count on Display No 2 is sufficiently stable and then press the iszl Key This tentatively registers the calibration data at this point 9 Press the Key The display at the left will appear This display will not appear if all of the required data has not been tentatively registered Press the Key Display No 2 will show 4 amp 5 Two seconds after the Key is released or when the ce is pressed the tentatively registered calibration data will be stored in EEPROM If you do not wish to save the data in EEPROM press the Key instead of the A Key For a Controller with more than one input connect as explained in step 2 and repeat steps 5 to 9 e f linear current output is selected continue with the procedure in 9 6 Output Calibration P 9 12 10 Turn OFF the power to leave Calibration Mode I Section 9 User Calibration 9 6 Output Calibration The procedure for calibration when linear current output is selected is provided in this section e Output calibration is displayed after input calibration has been finished i e after the input calibration values are registered Perform aging for at least 30 minutes
13. Channel indication is not updated when display scan stops in above example display remains at channel 2 I Section 5 Functions and Operations B PF Settings Function Keys PF1 Setting e The and Keys serve as function keys and the functions of these keys can be selected ss sem m NNNM aire nene enter ett T AT Execute Cancel Starts and cancels AT execution AT is executed for the currently selected PID set A M Key Starts auto manual operation for the currently displayed chan nel PRG Select Program PRG Key Changes the program number the program number is incre mented by 1 Monitor Setting Item Displays monitor setting items Set the Monitor Setting Item 1 to Monitor Setting Item 5 parameters Advanced Function Setting Level Key Switches channels Hold down the or Key for at least 1 second to execute the function set in the PF1 Setting or PF2 Setting parameter except for the following exceptions The key will operate as soon as it is pressed if any of the following is set Program Monitor Setting Item or Key When run or reset operations are set the key must be pressed for at least 1 second for run but for at least 2 seconds for reset 5 20 5 4 Display and Key Adjustment Functions I The default settings for the fun
14. 10 9 10 6 Inferring Causes from Conditions Communications Problems 10 10 Cannot Communicate or No Response 10 10 10 7 Inferring Causes from Conditions Reset Operation 10 11 Outputs Are Made While Resetting Operation Will Not Stop 10 11 BECi C ORS CLE A 2 Uni Pato m ua LUR D LA DM d uy A 2 Controller Performance Specifications A 3 Sensor Input Setting Ranges and Display Control Ranges A 4 ASUIETaDIG od s xy M MN A 5 SOWING Li E ooo 100 A 6 E5L H T Status Communications A 8 E5 JR T Program Status Communications A 10 Initialization Due to Changing Parameter Settings A 44 Kalameler EI zba aa IL II A 48 Section 1 Overview gt a gt gt O 1 1 Main Features of the E5AR T and E5ER T 1 2 1 2 Part Names and Functions 1 4 1 3 and Main Functions 1 8 l Section 1 Overview 1 1 Main Features of the EBAR T and The E5AR T ER T is an advanced Programmable Digital Controller that features high precision control The E
15. NOKON 9 9 9 e 6 4 e e C C D D C C D D m f terminals 5 and 6 are used for a pulse voltage output approxi mately 2 V are output when the power is turned ON load resistance 10 kO max for 10 ms e If a linear current output is used approximately 2 mA are output for 1 second when the power is turned ON e Control outputs that are not used for control can be used for transfer outputs by setting the Control Transfer Output Assignment param eters e Specifications for each output type are as follows Pulse Voltage Output Output voltage 12 VDC 15 20 PNP Max load current 40 mA with short circuit pro tection circuit O to 20 mA DC resolution approx 54 000 xa 4 to 20 mA DC resolution approx 43 000 Output Load 500 O max The value for the EBAR TQQ 1 J VVVV L TL is 21 mA max I Section 2 Preparations A Position proportional Control Model has relay outputs 250 VAC 1 A Control output 1 OUT1 is an open output and control output 2 OUT2 is a closed output E5AR T E5ER T o 0 3 oure o o 3 OUT2 4 Closing output 4 Closing output 0 o 5 OUT1 o 0 1 5 OUT ENTE Opening output 6 Opening output F C j e Relay output specifications are as follows 250 VAC 1 A including inrush current Auxiliary Outputs e On the E5AR TLIALIL auxiliary outpu
16. 2 Press the Key to switch to 5 Reset The RST indicator will light and the program will stop To restart the program use the same procedure to switch to run Run The RST indicator will turn OFF and the program will start Switching between run and reset is also possible using an event input or communications For event inputs refer to 5 8 Using Event Inputs P 5 39 For communications refer to 5 10 Using Communications P 5 49 4 46 4 13 Manual Operation l 4 13 Manual Operation B Manual Mode In standard control the MV is manipulated and in position propor tional control the amount of valve opening is manipulated To perform manual operation or to manually set the MV or valve opening set the Manual Auto parameter to 4 Manual or set the PF Setting parameter to A Auto Manual and then hold down the PF Key for at least 1 second Standard Control The MANU operation indicator lights in Manual Mode The PV is Models displayed on Display No 1 the MV is displayed on Display No 2 and n is displayed on Display No 3 To change the MV press the and Keys The MV is updated every 50 ms e When switching between Manual Mode and Auto Mode the action of the MV is balance less and bumpless Other setting levels can be moved to in Manual Mode However the AT Execute Cancel parameter cannot be selected and does not
17. CO4 T Linear Current Output 4 Type 0 20mA 0 4 20mA 1 Note 1 Temperature SP lower limit 1 to upper limit of sensor setting range SP lower limit 1 to lesser of 99999 or display value equivalent of input upper limit 2 Temperature Lower limit of sensor setting range to SP upper limit 1 Larger of 19999 and display value equivalent of input lower value to SP upper limit 1 Analog Analog SL H SP Upper Limit See note 1 SL H SP Lower Limit See note 2 MODE Control Mode See note 3 OREV Direct Reverse Operation Reverse OR R Direct OR D CLFL Closed Floating Floating FLOAT Closed CLOSE PMO Independent Operation Coordinated Operation Independent operation MULT or Coordinated operation SNGL 3 1 4 inputs Standard 0 or heating cooling 1 2 inputs Standard 0 heating cooling 1 Standard with remote SP 2 Heating cooling with remote SP 3 Proportional 4 Cascade standard 5 or Cascade heating cooling 6 SNUM Number of Segments 8 12 16 20 or 32 T U Program Time Unit Hour Minute HHMM Minute Second MMSSD Minute Second MMSS T PR Step Time Rate of Rise Programming Step time TIME or Rate of rise programming PR PRU Time Unit of Rise Programming 10
18. S NO Number of Segments Used Select 1 or a higher number of segments rr a L y PID PID Set No 0108 SP Segment Set Point SP Lower Limit to 44 SP Upper Limit co ALM Alarm Set No x _ PR Segment Rate of Rise anl 0 to 99 999 SER 1 to 4 See note VVTBH Wait Band Upper Limit 0 to 99 999 TIME Segment Time 0 00 to 99 59 or 0 00 0 to 99 59 9 VVTBL Wait Band Lower Limit 0 to 99 999 VVA T VVait OFF ON RPT Program Repetitions 0 to 9 999 LINK Program Link Destination SGO 10 Segment Output 10 Note For coordinated operation CH2 to 4 or cascade control secondary side 0 to 4 8 16 CH Program Editing CH 1 Setting Number of Segments Used n Setting 8 4 Program Setting Level q CH1 or CH2 for independent operation The Program Editing parameter is used to make program settings e This parameter is used to set the program number of the program Setting range Unit Default value Note The default program is the selected program number 5 n CH1 or CH2 for independent operation This parameter is used to specify the number of program segments Setting range Settingrange
19. 8 Change the wiring as shown below I r 2 p gt Open not connected Short circuit x ZERO CON OUTPUT INPUT leads of selected thermocouple However compensating leads for a K thermocouple can be used for E R S B and W thermocouples Disconnect the STV and enable the thermocouple in the cold junction compensator Make sure that the STV is disconnected at this time 9 Wait until the count on Display No 2 is sufficiently stable and then press the 521 Key This tentatively registers the calibration data at this point 10 Press the cel Key The display at the left will appear This display will not appear if all of the required data has not been tentatively registered Press the A Key Display No 2 will show 4 amp 5 Two seconds after the Key is released or when the ce Key is pressed the tentatively registered calibration data will be stored in EEPROM If you do not wish to save the data in EEPROM press the kel Key instead of the A Key t IL For a Controller with more than one input connect as explained in step 2 and repeat steps 5 to 10 e f a linear current output is selected continue with the procedure in 9 6 Output Calibration P 9 12 11 Turn OFF the power to leave Calibration Mode 9 7 I Section 9 User Calibration 9 4 Analog Input Calibrat
20. uonisog s d 18 AN B5uilooo 6Bune H piepue s Jesey 1e AN 1 1 0102 01 170 82000000 H 01 L0000000 H 1 EZ E 29 3 gt 2 m 2 lt Pa LZ LZ 0 0L 91 170 9000000 01 L0000000 H pueg peeq jeuon1odojg uonisog 1 LZ x nu hg me LZ a 23 LA LU m z 2 2 0 66 01 210 30 00000 H O 20000000 0 66 01 210 34600000 O 20000000 66 66 01 1010 0 20000 O L0000000 H 66166 01 L0 O 0 20000 O L0000000 H 07001 01 070 83600000 01 00000000 H 66166 01 6616 1 40 20000 01 LE844444 H poued 10402 Sune H ponad jo3u02 Fouo Bulloo2 sisejeis H 3070 2000 siseJeis H 2020 9000 9n eA S Y renueiy VOZO S000 R aul L Agpueis B 9198 eso o uedo HO HO HO HO d 1ndui o Buipio55v 66 66 0 1070 40 20000 91 L0000000 H r 4edd 1 dS 01 iur 4901 dS UN a LL HO 5une H hur eyey ebueyo AW leuonuodolci uonisog HO 10413 Ad 1 AW Buijooo 6uneep piepueis HO 10413 Ad 1 AW HO HO HO HO HO HO HO HO HO HO HO HO pueg peeq JUB 91JJ90D Sulloo2 dS 8020 v000 0020 0000 494 dSH dSd DON 45 NO 440 X 124 UR al c BunuAA suoneoiunujulo2 Hun uonisod 1104 euuroe
21. Input power supply depends on model 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC DC no polarity ueEccdccomueezme G Event inputs D EVI r em D 2 EV o 2 OUT2 Ed 3 5 Voltage output 12V COM 6 40 mA A dE 1 I 4 OUT1 c m e Voltage output 12 V 6 40 mA or 6 iL 1 Current output I 1 41 6 4 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max F V PT TC K 0 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max Current Voltage Thermocouple Switched by output type setting Platinum resistance thermometer E5AR TQ43B FLK Auxiliary outputs E Relay outputs 100 to 240 VAC COM SUB1 SUB2 COM 2 5 1 b v SUB3 gt ot SUB4 OUT2 Voltage output 12 V 40 mA OUT1 Voltage output 12 V 40 mA or Current output 4 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max 0 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max 716 65 1 I 1 I I I H I 1 I I I 1 1 I H 1 1 Switched by output type setting J PE H TO I lt Event inputs EV1 m 1 Ev2 e 3 aa i I 6202 8 IL i 416 2 V PT TC K Current Voltage
22. B Alarm SP Selection 5 26 e When the Auxiliary Output Open in Alarm parameter is set to Close in Alarm the alarm output state is output as is When it is set to Open in Alarm the alarm output state is inverted before being output e Close in Alarm or Open in Alarm can be set separately for each auxiliary output in the Auxiliary Output 1 to 10 Close in Alarm parameters e The default setting is a Close in Alarm Parameter Auxiliary Auxiliary Operation setting output function output indicator Close in Alarm n OFF OFF The auxiliary outputs are OFF open while the power is turned OFF Also the auxiliary outputs require approximately 2 seconds after the power is turned ON before they are activated The set point that triggers a deviation alarm during ramp operation can be set to either the present SP or the target SP 5 6 Alarm Adjustment Functions I Alarm Operation e The following example summarizes alarm operation In this Summary example a Lower Limit Alarm with Standby Sequence and Close in Alarm are selected Alarm Type Lower Limit Alarm with Standby Sequence H mn Al lue gt Alarm hysteresis arm value b l Q Jt 1 Time BEN ON closed Alarm output 2 Display Parameter ir characters Display No 3 Alarm 1 to 4
23. 24 VAC DC 100 to 240 VAC A B Relay outputs izi asa pere AN HS 7 COM T I TT E 2 LJ oo SUB1 I T 1 3 tos SUB2 Input power supply depends on model 4 I COM 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC DC no polarity 5 Hos SUB3 Nes An ILo SUB4 S roy Event input 1 m EVI 1 I Our k j lt o Eve Current output F al 1 4 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max oo 7 4 CON 0 to 20 mA 500 Q max 4 j Switched by output 1 I i 1 30 amp type setting HE lt i OUT it 0 7 Current output m M TEN I I 4 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max D TC PT V 0 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max Thermocouple Voltage Current X Switched by output type setting Platinum resistance thermometer E5ER TQT3DW FLK 2 loop Controller 24 VAC DC I 100 to 240 VAC A ki N 1 r Event inputs o Dil s 1 i e B tk Input power supply 3 EV4 depends on model mm 100 to 240 VAC or 24 4 EV5 VAC DC no polarity B EV6 6 T T Bate 1 pu e X OUT2 RS 485 B m J Voltage output 12 V o 2 4 m m pi I Input 2 40 mA 1 om gt T d 77 3 id I V TC Voltage output 12 V 4 40 mA or
24. IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 ES 4 20 B E 6 6 6 Gr Tr mn K K J J 10 le Resistance Voltage mn m i thermometer i z Z 4 5 ko i e REN 62 32 ky H LE 6 rm istan t rrent ermocouple Resistance oltage urre thermometer To prevent the appearance of error displays due to unused inputs set the Number of Enabled Channels parameter 2 2 Using the Terminals I 6 Control Transfer On the E5AR T control output 1 OUT1 outputs to terminals F5 and Outputs F6 and control output 2 OUT2 outputs to terminals F3 and F4 Terminals On the E5ER T control output 1 OUT 1 outputs to terminals C5 and ESAR T C6 and control output 2 OUT2 outputs to terminals C3 and C4 e On a Controller with more than one input output takes place from control output 3 OUT3 and control output 4 OUTA E5AR T Pulse voltage output Linear current output V V Voss q OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 gt OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 Tel ol E Aa verge grs 5 2 6 4 8 Q GND F F G G GND F F G G i E5ER T Pulse voltage output Linear current output V V z OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 CoO OO vog pima
25. CP Control Period Heating C CP Control Period Cooling 0 2 99 0 DB Position Proportional Dead Band STB Standby Time 0 00 99 59 MV R MV at Reset 5 0 105 0 standard model See note ORL MV Change Rate Limit Heating 0 0 100 0 CORL MV Change Rate Limit Cooling 0 0 100 0 ISI 1 Input Value 1 for in Input Correction 19999799999 ISS 1 Input Correction 1 199 99 999 99 ISI 2 Input Value 2 for Input Correction 19999 99999 ISS 2 Input Correction 2 199 99 999 99 DOGN Disturbance Gain 1 00 1 00 DOTC Disturbance Time Constant 0 01 99 99 DO B Disturbance Rectification Band 0 000 9 999 DOJW Disturbance Judgement Width 99 99 99 99 SPOF Set Point Offset ul 19999 99999 CH AT Execute Cancel Operation Communications Writing 9I Operation 8 5 Adjustment Level L Ad x ya Auto Mode running This parameter is used to execute auto tuning AT e When auto tuning is executed the MV is increased and decreased around the SP to obtain the characteristics of the object of control The PID constants are calculated from the results and the Propor tional Band Integral Time and Derivative Time parameters are automatically set Normally this par
26. 5 11 Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment 5 13 5 9 Output Adjustment FUNCIONS sao prev uuu d ad doge 5 15 NIV Bill u cm 5 15 MV Change Rate Limit 5 16 NIV al RESET renees eee R RE unuqa RERE 5 17 NIV GI PE ee D EN 5 17 5 4 Display and Key Adjustment Functions 5 18 Display Scan s Pe 5 18 PF Settings Function Keys 5 20 Other Display and Key Adjustment Functions 5 22 5 5 Protecting uuu u m u Rosa terea al 5 23 P IOISCUHQOR MR um a 5 23 5 6 Alarm Adjustment Functions 5 25 m F yS TOSS muu Doo 5 25 Standby SEQUENCE ve uuu aa 5 25 qalmal LS 5 26 Close in Alarm Open in Alarm 5 26 Alarm SP Selectioh uuu ee ee 5 26 5 7 Program Operation Functions 5 28 Rate of Rise Programming 5 28 Program ODOFalloiS sss sanan mamapas assaka 5 30 SP MODES umayman unu T 5 31 VIX RC 000 000 5 32 Tie o Hara D iS A Di 5 33 Segment QUIDULS PRSE EDU DH e suu
27. 4 Vd UL d C s for orlonger for longer Protect Level 1 second or longer 1 second or longer 3 seconds or longer Control Initial Control Initial x Setting Level Setting 2 Level TOS less than less than 1 second t initi 1 second 1 second ut niti I i Alarm Setting Level setting aa less than less than arm Seting Level 1 second 1 second x less than Communications Display 1 second Setting Level Adiustment Level Passvvord input Set value 169 1 second or longer less than 1 second Advanced Function 222 Expansion Control Setting Level Setting Level less than 1 second Password input Set value 1201 Control in progress q s Control is stopped for all Calibration Level Control stopped channels of models vvith Reset from Calibration Level when more than one input power is turned OFF 4 2 Alarm Set Setting Level Approximation Time Signal Monitor Item Level Setting Level Setting Level Flashes for less than less than less than less than sel 1 second 1 second 1 second 1 second 5 Operation Level Second B r less than less than less than less than DR LOT x 1 second 1 second 1 second 1 second PID Settin
28. i i Input temperature setting range 7 Input type Y Y SP changed F T C setting is possible A Set value Y SP Upper Limit and SP Lower Limit v Upper Limit to Lower Limit of Sensor Range gt 5 9 I Section 5 Functions and Operations IM PID Sets 5 10 Procedure Display PID Selection Lt t Automatic Selection of the PID Set The E5AR T ER T allows parameters to be grouped for use in PID control A group of parameters is called a PID set A PID set consists of the following parameters Mu P Proportional Band 2050 1 35 70 foo D Derivative Time 400 a00 fo Automatic Selection Range 200 0 400 0 Upper Limit e Select the PID set number in the Display PID Selection parameter of the PID Setting Level and set the value for each PID constant Set the P Proportional Band parameter of PID set 3 to 50 00 FS 1 Press the Key repeatedly to move to the PID Setting Level Display No 3 will show L a 2 Use the and Keys to set the Display PID Selection parameter to 3 3 Press the tel Key to select the PID 3 Proportional Band parameter To check the PID set number use the leading digit of the parameter 4 Use the lAl and Keys to set the value to 50 00 One
29. 1400 sindul 157 Duiooo Ouneeu apeosey indui s ndul sjndul z O1JUOD paepuejs epeose _ ouo oney s ndul s ndul Z dS UNIA indui lonuo Burooo DuneeH s ndul s ndul z dS 910UuJ81 UM dur oJuoo paepuelg s ndul jueuuuisse 1ndino J JSUBJ J0J1u02 jueuuuBisse indino 4 ISUE4 0 1402 jueuuuisse z indino eJsueJ 101002 s ndul 2 Sullooo une H JoJjuoo p1epuels EE CERNI dup Ul juawubisse 1ndino 49JSU J 0 102 opouu O11uOO MOl Q UBAIH oJ1uoo YOO 10J SHUINS 1nejep u SION A 30 Setting Lists O N wee ur uedo L0000000 H L 0 ule y u uedo O N uue e u uedo 10000000 H O N UUe UI 9S0 2 00000000 H wieje 1 O N uueje u uedo L0000000 H ul so O 0 O N wee u s010 00000000 1 g UOHIPUOD L0000000 H v uonipuo2 00000000 H 66 66 01 1070 40270000 H 01 10000000 H wieje ul BSOID UOW uow ule y u uedo c 1ndino Averixny ule vy u uedo L indino Avelixny y s H eouenbeg qpueis SISQIOISAH p ULE V O N UUe UI SOlO 00000000 H ndino Aderi xny 2240 LLOO 1 O N Uuueje u uedo 10000000 H uue y u uedo 0 O N uue e ui SO O 00000000 r indino Aveyixny 020 0100 1 O N wueye u u dO L0000000 H uue y u uedo 0 O N uueje ui
30. 4 14 4 6 Selecting the Control Mode 4 15 4 7 Setting Output Parameters 4 20 48 Program Settings 4 23 49 Performing ON OFF Control 4 31 EG 4 10 Determining the PID Constants AT or Manual Settings 4 33 4 4 11 Using Auxillary OUIDUIS nun ap asta 4 37 4 12 Starting and Stopping Operation 4 41 4 13 4 47 4 14 Changing 15 4 50 4 15 Adjusting 4 51 4 16 Operating Precautions 4 52 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 4 1 Setting Levels and Key Operations The parameters are grouped into levels and the values that are set for the parameters are called set values On the E5AR T ER T the parameters are grouped into 19 levels as shown below When the power is turned ON all indicators will light for 1 second The initial level after turning ON the power is the Operation Level i Program Settin Adjustment 2 g 5 g Adiustment Level jue Ev zZ m
31. 6 30 Move to Protect Level 6 31 PURO Mantal ess ccc 6 31 Parameter Initialization 8 8 6 32 Alarm Lateh Cane cese u Sa bati a dd 6 33 SD MOSS Zuna Susa dhe at mier ae ichs icu E ar a 6 33 alo 6 34 POV ANIC Sissies O DIM e REM OI MAT EUN NEM 6 35 BACK cc qe i n D 6 36 Controller Attribute Read uuu n u u u A iu 6 36 Controller Status REA uuu uu u creen Rr argo dd odi ss 6 38 ECNODACK Fest ase ete muy sb u DNE 6 39 0 10 TP ROGFAMINEXAIMPIC zx usun teria Da SEM pu sec unass 6 40 NEGBASIC xose sco Aa 6 40 Section 7 Modbus Communications XIV 7 1 1 2 7 3 7 4 CGOmrt nuniioalions MIeIDOG uyu aun uy ded a Mace usai 7 2 Modbus Communications 32 aa a R aa a ayaqa a 7 2 Communications Specifications 7 2 Transier PrOtOCOI suc ua a z UTE 7 3 BART TELE 7 4 Command Eratfies uuu uuu yuyun uz assum mettre cui enean 7 4 Response Frames PEE D DO 7 5 LISTOR FUMCU ONS m TE L aa L dada 7 7 V HAD mi Kc IRE T clade Medea tua wit a Esas aera danas teageund 7 8 7 5 7 6 Tf 7 8 7 9 FROCKESSOS TTE 7 8 Number or Elements nol nomi 7 9 SO Z M Y R 7 10 Read Iron Valiable Area a Ae ee a Sua ha 7 11 Write TO Variable AIC uuu uyu u aa a aa a cundo eese ete 7 13 Operation Comma
32. 4 m 6 Switched by output type setting Auxiliary outputs Relay outputs COM SUB1 SUB2 COM SUB3 SUB4 L j LlI L Jj lid T C D EBER TQC43B FLK 24 VAC DC i 100 to 240 VAC 1 ee I 1 Input power supply depends on model 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC DC no polarity EUN B OUT RS 485 Voltage output 12 V 40 mA OUT1 Voltage output 12 V 40 mA or Current output 4 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max 0 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max Switched by output type seing mi 7 Evi Ev Event inputs N TC PT Thermocouple lt y Voltage Current Platinum resistance thermometer o lala e le e eo lalale OUT4 Current output 4 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max 0 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max Switched by output type setting OUT3 Current output 4 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max 0 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max Switched by output type setting m 5 1 Auxiliary outputs Relay outputs bn Event input a EVI EV2 x 5232 5 TC PT V Thermocouple Voltage Current Platinum resistance thermometer E5ER TC4B Auxiliary outputs
33. Remote SP Monitor 5 Program SP or Fixed SP Mode with remote SP or Coordinated operation with fixed SP e This parameter is used to monitor the remote SP while in Program SP or Fixed SP Mode In Remote SP Mode the remote SP can be monitored on Display No 2 of the Present Value PV Present Set Point display unit Remote SP lower limit to remote SP upper limit The SP limits are in effect Monitor Related Parameters Present Value PV Preset Set Point Operation Level P 8 9 SP Mode Adjustment Level P 8 24 Remote SP Upper Limit and Remote SP Lower Limit Input Initial Setting Level P 8 52 Control Mode Control Initial Setting Level P 8 58 CH qi Standard control or heating cooling control MV Monitor Heating This parameter monitors the heating MV during operation e This parameter monitors the MV of standard control and the heating MV of heating cooling control T Cono Monitor range Standard 5 0 to 105 0 Monitor Heating 9 to 105 0 cooling I Section 8 Parameters CH MV Monitor Cooling CH f n Monitor Valve Opening Monitor f Monitor Heating cooling control P Qe V3 t This parameter monitors the cooling MV during operation e This parameter monitors the cooling MV during heating cooling control Control Monitor range
34. ar DO ra m Aat Vali 0 ub Alarm OCIS aa a DAD EE EDI UU SENOS a m 4 12 Starting and Stopping Operation Starting Operation Run and Stopping Operation Reset Oler n T eer eee ee ere ier 077 007000 SENOS qM RN HE 4 12 Manual ODpGallODic sima u O aad dE B Rcs eet adea Man a l4066 LETS 4 14 Changing Channels Changing Channels 2 s Bsli 2 15 ZAgIusHnd Proglas sezar aya a Changing Blei a aaa a Cnand ing the TIME uuu aa a d 4 16 Operating Precautions uuu rea aoro d Ra eut eae XII Section 5 Functions and Operations 5 1 Input Adjustment Functions 5 2 COM CCUON mE Rc EP Da 5 2 First Order Lag Operation 5 5 MOVING AVCTAGC uum au tais Ludi idee 5 5 Broken line Approximation 5 6 Extraction ot Square ROOT a A o 5 7 Other Input Adjustments 5 7 5 Cohlo PURO OBS toc 5 8 Alarm elc CM RE ET 5 8 SP EMIS dosi so EI D I MM 5 9 5 10 Operating Programs Using Multiple Channels
35. Event Inputs Terminals 4E p e To use a Position proportional Control Model to monitor the amount of valve opening or perform closed control connect a potentiometer PMTR as shown in the following diagram ESAR T EDEH T et d o Ge e For information on the potentiometer refer to the manual for the valve you are connecting Terminal numbers are as follows O Open W Wipe C Close The input range is 100 Q to 2 5 kQ between C and O To use event inputs on the E5AR T connect event inputs 1 and 2 EV1 and EV2 to terminals K1 to K3 event inputs 3 to 6 EV3 to EV6 to terminals numbers E2 to E6 event inputs 7 to 10 EV7 to EV10 to terminals numbers D2 to D6 The number of event inputs depends on the model To use event inputs on the E5ER T connect event inputs 1 and 2 EV1 and EV2 to terminals E1 to E3 and event inputs 3 to 6 EV3 to EV6 to terminals numbers B2 to B6 The number of event input points depends on the model 2 2 Using the Terminals I The number of input points for each model is as follows E5AR TLILILIB EBER T L 1 IB 2 points EV1 and EV2 E5AR TLILIDI EBSER TLIL ID 4 points EV3 to EV6 E5AR TLILIML I 8 points EV3 to EV10 E5AR TLILIMB 10 points EV1 to EV10 E5AR T EV3 Using contact input Using non contact input EV4 EV5 EV6 Using contact Using non contact
36. H Press for at least 1 second to return to Operation Level 4 8 4 3 Initial Setting Example Control begins Operation Level Present Value PV SP Program No Segment No IT Less than 1 second Program Setting Level Make sure that Program Editing program 1 is being i Program 1 edited Set the number of segments used with the A and keys umber of Segments Used 4 4 Set segment editing Segment Editing with the A and End t Segment 1 keys Set segments 12 3 and 4 Set the segment P Segment in the same set point vvith Set Point Way the A and keys Set the segment time vvith the A and keys Segment Time x Dotted arrovvs indicate that the key is pressed several times to svvitch to desired Adjustment Level 6 Change control parameter period Set the control period with the ee and s keys L 2 0 5 s 156 Less than 1 second Alarm Set Setting Level Make sure alarm Display Alarm Set Selection set 1 is displayed Alarm set 1 7 Set alarm 1 Set the alarm value 1 with the Alarm Set 1 Alarm Value 1 A and l keys 2081 200 0 C PFI 8 Trial operation RUN RST At least 1 second to start operation 28 Less than 1 second 6 I I Y uto Tuning Adjustment Leve
37. eui AHO jeufis owl wes6old Hun eun o Buipio55v L 6 68 66 01 070070 69660000 01 00000000 10 6866 01 0070 69660000 01 00000000 H Sul NO Jeubis owl wesbold g Juawbas 18S jeuBis owl wesbog p lqes q 0 siueuuBeg jo 1equunN 01 00000000 H Hun eun o Buipio55v Hun eun o Buipio55v L 6 68 66 01 070070 65660000 H 01 00000000 10 6866 01 0070 69660000 01 00000000 H c OWI AHO 124615 eur wes6old Hun eun weiBod o Sulp4oooy Hun eun weiBod o Buipio55v 1 6 69 66 01 070070 68660000 H 91 00000000 c Sul 10 6S 66 01 0010 68660000 H 01 00000000 H HO NO 1 TEuUbIS wesbold p lqes q c 1ueuiBeg 0 siueuifes jo 1equunwN 0 00000000 H HO 195 2619 urej6ojd 6 6S 66 01 070070 68660000 H 01 00000000 SWI 10 69 166 01 0070 65660000 01 00000000 m AAO 184615 euin wes6old 6 6S 66 01 070070 68660000 H 01 00000000 OWI 10 69 66 01 0010 68660000 H 01 00000000 H HO NO 1 jeufis euirj wesbold p lqes q 1ueuBes 0 slu9uu6 S 1equunw o 00000000 H 195 TEUD S u 1 uoneunseq ON 0 2 01 0 02000000 H 01 00000000 HO yur wesbold weibold 66666 01 0 40420000 H 01 00000000 H HO suonnedeg wepold weibold edA indui 44O 0 66666 01 0 46981000 H 01 00000000 H HO 3tur 49407 p
38. 2 Closed 4 Open 6 lt b lt r lt La p l l 1 TC PT V Thermocouple Voltage Current B Platinum resistance thermometer I O ajala o lo amp o o I I Lad Input 1 OUT1 I JOG Thermocouple Voltage Current Platinum resistance thermometer J Auxiliary outputs Transistor outputs Auxiliary outputs Transistor outputs SUB1 4 18 SUB 82 UN Auxiliary outputs 100 to 240 VAC A B Relay outputs 24 VAC DC gt gt e 4a 4 I Input power supply depends on model 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC DC no polarity N B 1 A lt gt 2 Relay output 250 VAC 1A Closed OUT1 Open TU tod E TC b Thermocouple Voltage Current Platinum resistance thermometer E OUT4 Voltage output 12 V 40 mA OUT3 Voltage output 12 V 40 mA or Current output 4 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max 0 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max El Switched by output type setting Note With the E5AR T the power supply voltage must be 100 to 120 V for UL compliance With
39. c uonejedo 1 piO SUI 1 NO 0 440 L0000000 H 00000000 H uonejedo JepJQ 15 1 4 29 Toke z 4 ed ejqeue enp jes yun Dues fe dsiq oBuei Joyuou Bumes Keijdsg 9 JeyoureJed Sseippy sseuppy 90 alqeuen juiod 1118 quny J fewoduioo Appendix peBueuo s juswUBbisse indino 19jsugJ o41u09 DuipuodsaJJoo eui U UM pezi eriui Bue sjejeujejed yw dS pue anjen ejdsiq Buijeog yun dAL 1ndu eu L 0 0 0 001 0 OLL 01 0 OL 7 01 26444444 Duiuedo eae 0 0 0 00L 2 8uioo2 0190 01 070 VL700000 H 01 00000000 indino 01400 N3 edA 1ndui o Bulpsoooy N3 edA 1ndui o 0 0 0 001 VZ enjeA Aejdsiq Buipeos oDuei Sum s 10sues Jo jiu 01901 uedo 10 BulyeoH o 0 9 V 00000 H 01 304 4444 H Prepuels 66666 01 66661 46981000 H 01 L31834434 H Dojeuy e6ues Dunes 10sues Jo lluui Jeddn o Dunes 10sues Jo ywli 1 MO7 eJnjejeduue Ad nleA 1uesaJg n13 edA 1ndui o amp uipioooy yun uonisod juiod jeuuroeq 0 002 0 002 I H U H MO 110 1 nd no 19JsueJ en eA ynejeq s ddn 49 ol 4w 4940 dS julod 19g 1ueseJd en eA Jojuou Bunies lt SION indui 01 U09 euonuodoid uonisoq s ndul
40. oin sseJppy sseuppy ed ejqeueA 9 9 19010Jgd lt 49A 10 22100000 l 1o0yuo N JequunN JOS WEI OLVO 8000 uonoes 5 o snes urejBoJd 30r0 1000 9000 9000 indul p l ds o Buipio55v 33333 01 00000000 6000 Ad enjeA1ueseJd 2000 V 444444 44 H 01 00000000 uonisod E ue 1ojyuouj BDunmes 1104 6012 0 ynejaq SUOIEOIUNWUWOD BIA Buuojuoui pue Dunes JO 318 H Aq pexyeasd sen eA 4o uoul um s 2 uonoes 5 o _ 8 01 L 80000000 01 L0000000 H yr Jeddf 49 01 Hw 4907 49 9 1815 OOVO 40HUOIN JequinN 195 did VOYO luloq 195 1uesSJd 9070 ed p lHpOlN zoro 1000 UOISJ9A 0070 0000 yo mu en mum SSOIPPY sseJppy ed ejgeueA quuv pO 1011u0JA suoneoiunuuulo2 A 12 Setting Lists 19948 ul 5101 ds 9 en eA ejdsip eui se ewes y si d eyep aul S SjejeueJed slu uuB s Jo JequunN pue uonejedo p leulp4oo y uonyes do 1uepuedepu Spon 041002 eu jo s um s eui pue sindui jo 1equunu y uo spuedeq p JUIOd 195 1uesaJd y JOWUOW 0 AJUO pesn eq ueo suomneoiunuluo INH Wo jUO ejgissod si eBueuo jo3uoo jeuon1odoJud uonisod Bursn ueuM Z sBun s 1ejeurejed Aeldsiq luloq euroeg Ad pue ed 1nduj Aq peuruuejeg 1 A 13 NNYIN OLOV 1S4 N
41. 10000000 90000000 60000000 170000000 260000000 60000000 H 10000000 00000000 H SuoneoiunuJuJoo BIA Buuojuouu pue S m s JO ae H AQ senjeA Joyuou Bunies d ein ES sseuppy sseuppy ed ejgqeueA quy sngpoW H eModuoo ed z 1ndu 2000 sun enpejeduge ndul 2020 1000 ed 1 Indul 0020 0000 99 l A 7 Humes jenu ndul A 23 Appendix D LLI uon eJ1edo juepued L TONS uone2edo payeulps00y pul ANN uolesedo juepuedepu 10000000 00000000 uoneJedo p leulpioo2 uonejedo 1uepuedepu 1 9012 8so O uneo 0 1vO 14 BuneojJ 1 q uO uonejedo 311A 0 H HO uoneJedo esje eu VOOO0000 H 00000000 H 10000000 00000000 80 ed A yndul o Buipio55v 9 Buiooo 10 Buneeu peoseo S prepueis peoseo g jeuonuodoug g Bulooo Gune q qS e1oueu c pyepueis qS 30W34 1 Builooo 6une H 0 pyepueis sjauueUy indulj gz 1 Builooo 6une H pyepueis s j uueuo Indy p JO 90000000 H G0000000 H 170000000 20000000 00000000 10000000 00000000 UMA S PO 10000000 00000000 UNA SEPON wut 1eddn dS 01 WI 13M0 1101 v o amp uipuodsauuoo en eA ej dsip wewixew pue 6666L oleuy oDueij Dunes 10sues Jo pwj s ddn o eGueJ H 1e se eureg Dunes 10sues JO JILUI JOMO7 e1nje1eduue
42. 7 35 l Section 7 Modbus Communications o 9 o z E E E e o 7 36 Section 8 Parameters USING TE TD 8 2 Protect Level L rE 8 3 Operation Level a a o d n das 8 6 Program Setting Level 8 16 Adjustment Level L i 2 8 22 Adjustment 2 Level L 8 33 Alarm Set Setting Level L NL A 8 36 PID Setting Leveli dan 8 39 Time Signal Setting Level 8 43 Approximation Setting Level L EEE 8 46 Input Initial Setting Level L 8 49 Control Initial Setting Level L 8 55 Control Initial Setting 2 Level 2 2 8 63 Alarm Setting Level L F 8 74 Display Adjustment Level L q 8 80 Communications Setting Level L 5 8 84 Advanced Function Setting Level L Ad 8 88 Expansion Control Setting Level L Emt 8 94 I Section 8 Parameters 8 1 Using this Section e Marks Used in this Section f n Setting Monitor Operation Indicates the description of the mean
43. 1050 H 00000414 Read write data will be the same as display values when reading or writing data using the program time unit For example if the display value is 99 59 the read write data will be H 00009959 7 5 Read from Variable Area I 7 5 Read from Variable Area Read from a variable area by setting the required data in the following command frame Command Frame Slave Function Read start Number of address code address elements CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 Slave address Specify the unit number of the EBAR T ER T Set in hexadecimal from H 01 to H 63 1 to 99 The function code for Read from Variable Area com Function code Mot mand is H 0O3 Specify the address of the set value to read For more information on addresses refer to Appendix Setting Lists P A 6 Head start address Specify the number of set values to read times 2 for the number of elements The setting range is H 0002 to H O06A 2 to 106 Example If the number of set values sets is 2 specify H 0004 Number of elements The check code calculated based on the values from the slave address through the end of the data For the calcu lation method refer to Example of CRC 16 Calculation in 7 2 Frames P 7 4 Response Frame Slave Function Byte Read data address code count Data 1 ata 1 D se usns 1 1 1 Number of elements x 2 bytes Data n Data n CRC 16 Most significant Least significant 7 2 Slave a
44. 3 rr en SEG R Remaining Segment Time Monitor 1 4 rr RPTM Program Repetition g Time Monitor RSP Remote SP Monitor Alls Sa O MV Monitor Heating Cre C O nl MV Monitor Cooling ca ta it V M Valve Opening Monitor 4 R R Run Reset A M Auto Manual ura AUTO MANU 1 In Manual Mode E H L r 4 4 E x Z mit DT 4 An ql SP Segment Set Point SP Lower Limit to 1 SP Upper Limit PR Segment Rate of Rise 0 to 99999 ee d TIME Segment Time 0 00 to 99 59 or 0 00 0 to 99 59 9 WAIT Wait OFF ON 32 3rm E E s 4j SGG 1 Segment Output 1 OFF ON F in SGG 10 IH Segment Output 10 SEE OFF ON NO Number of Segments Used o Number of Segments PID PID Set Number 0108 ALM Alarm Set Number 1 to 4 1 WTBH Wait Band Upper Limit 0 to 99999 WTBL Wait Band Lower Limit 0 to 99999 RPT Program Repetitions 0 to 99999 LINK Program Link Destination 0 to 32 1 O to 4 for channels 2 to 4 for coordinated operation or secondary side for cascade control B 5 2 GEF e Ave BFE c l E k rA c
45. 4510 uelis 8 2X3 1 16 e1 Bumes Ionuoo uorsuedx3 80000000 H 2 aqv 1 I8A81 uns uonouny peoueApy 0000000 9 amp 1 19 e1 Dunes suoneoiunuiuo 90000000 H S v 1 4 A 7 1ueunsn py ejdsiq v 1 19 e1 Bumes uuelv 1 19A 7 gZ Humes jenu 1onuoo z L1 19 e1 Bumes jeru jonuo2 1 071 4 A 7 um s Ieniul 1ndu 0 440 p lqesiq mal 4 al Lu Nx ac E Pa nn Y ad zl al 3 4 R gu y ad a lt d Z DR Y 80000000 H 170000000 60000000 00000000 10000000 00000000 Dunes 3407 We Jo1uOo A spuooeg r Sv 6 92 1 1 S amp 0 0 440 L p0000000 H 0000000 H G0000000 H 10000000 00000000 poueg useJjed ejdsiq spuooeg pejgesip s s one Ke dsiq 0 66 01 0 9000000 H 01 00000000 H aul uunjaJ oiny 4510 Buiuedo A BA AN 8 O O Sulloo2 AN 2 O Buiuedo AW 9 1ueuBeg n3 001 uoneieg 9 1ueuBeg n3 oz uoneieg p 1ueuBeg n3 01 uoneieg 1ueuiBeg n3 uoneieq uu 1ueulDes pesde 3 uu WesHolg pesde 4 0 440 80000000 H 20000000 H 90000000 H 80000000 H p0000000 H 60000000 c L O3S G0000000 H L L Oud 10000000 00000000 H w ejdsiq udeuc jeg DuneoH 1 Sulo02 AN
46. Example of CRC 16 Calculation In RTU Mode each frame begins and ends with a silent time interval that is at least 3 5 characters long Slave Function address code Data CRC 16 CRC 16 calculation range 5 Silent interval at least 3 5 characters long Specify the unit number of the EBAR T ER T between Slave address H 00 and H 63 0 to 99 When broadcasting to all nodes specify H 00 Responses are not returned for broadcasts The function code specifies the command from the host Fun ion code computer The code is set in hexadecimal and is 1 byte long For more information refer to Z 3 List of Functions P 7 7 The text of command based on the function code Speci Data fies variable addresses and the values for set values in hexadecimal Cyclical Redundancy Check CRC 16 These two bytes store check code calculated from the slave address to the end of the data in hexadecimal HB Silent interval at least 3 5 characters long A message is processed 1 byte at a time in a 16 bit processing register called the CRC register CRC 16 Calculation Method As described below the value from the slave address through the end of the data is calculated and the result set as the CRC 16 1 An initial value of H FFFF is set in the CRC register 2 An XOR is taken of the contents of the CRC register and the ist byte of the message and the result is returned to the CRC register 3 The contents of the CRC register is sh
47. MV Change Rate Limit 0 0 to 100 0 s 0 0 Disabled Cooling Related Parameters PID Proportional Band PID Setting Level P 8 40 MV Change Rate Limit Mode Expansion Control Setting Level 8 102 8 30 8 5 Adjustment Level L Ag CH na Input Value 1 for Input Correction ae Input Correction 1 Input Value 2 for Input Correction L Lo Lov k 3 Lew Pe how g g Va Mog Input Correction 2 The input can be corrected at any two points These parameters are used to set correction values Input Correction 1 and Input Correction 2 parameters for any two points Input Value 1 for Input Correction and Input Value 2 for Input Correction parameters for two point correction PV Input Correction 2 1 300 After correction Before correction Input Correction 1 200 Input 200 0 1 000 1 300 Input Value 1 Input Value 2 for Correction for Correction Input Value 1 for Input 575 to 99999 EU 200 0 Correction 1 Settin 9 Input Correction 1 199 99 to 999 99 0 00 Input Value 2 for Input 19999 to 99999 y a Correction 1 I Input Correction 2 199 99 to 999 99 0 00 1 The decimal point position depends on the input type 2 If the input type is changed the default values of the input value for input calibration will change to the upper and lower limits of the input range of the sensor type being used
48. Operation Level Program Setting Alarm Set Setting m Level Level PID Setting Set PV Fixed Adiustment Setting SP or Level and Approximation Program Adjustment 2 Level and Monitor Number Level Item Level The Program No parameter is prohibited Enabled No restrictions Parameters can be displayed or changed and the level can be entered Restrictions Some restrictions apply Parameters can be displayed but not changed Prohibited The parameters are completely protected Parameters cannot be displayed and the level can be entered Initial Setting Protection Restricts movement to the Input Initial Setting Level Control Initial Setting Level Control Initial Setting 2 Level Alarm Setting Level Display Adjustment Level and Communications Setting Level Move to Control initial Setting Move to Input Initial Control Initial Setting 2 Alarm Setting Level Setting Display Adjustment and Setting Communications Setting Level Enabled displays Advanced Function Set Enabled ting Level Enabled Does not display Advanced Enabled Function Setting Level Prohibited Prohibited 8 4 8 2 Protect Level L Prt e When the Initial Setting Protection parameter is set to 2 nothing happens when the Level Key is held down for 1 second or more to move to Input Initial Setting Level from Operation Level Program Setting Level Adjustment Level Adjustment 2 Level Alarm Set Setting Level PID
49. Parameter Changes within Expansion Control Setting Level Expansion Control Setting Level CJC 1 Input 1 ON i Cold Junction CONT R T MANU RUN n Compensation Limit Cycle MV Amplitude or RMPB OFF or ON 5 0 5010 ESET End Condition 275 TATE Tentative AT Execute Cold Junction ae RST CONT or FSP Compensation Judgment Deviation 0 0 100 0 WT M Wait Mode 0 00 1 00 RBMP Bumpless at Run SEND or ALL Disable OFF or Enable ON ALSP Alarm SP Selection PVTR PV Tracking PMEC Operation at Potentiometer PSP or TSP OFF ON Input Error MANT Manual Output Stop OFF or Continue ON PEND Program End ON Time Method DOST Disturbance Overshoot ON or 0 0 10 0 HOLD or INIT Adjustment Function MANI Manual MV Initial Value Vire els SPTR SP Tracking Standard control 5 0 105 0 OFF or ON Heating Cooling 105 0 105 0 PIDI ORLM MV Change Rate PID Set Automatic Selection Limit Mode Data PV or DV Mode 0 0 or Mode 1 1 I I AT G AT Calculated Gain PID Set Automatic Selection rl 0 1 10 0 Hysteresis 0 10 99 99 P DB PV Dead Band AT H AT Hysteresis 0 99999 el 01 99 8 94 CH Operation at Power ON CH End C
50. U The U ALM Output setting is an OR output of alarms 1 to 4 of all channels overall alarm The default settings are as follovvs Channel 1 Alarm 1 Channel 1 Alarm 2 Channel 1 Alarm 3 Channel 1 Alarm 4 The EBER TLITLILI has only two auxiliary outputs i e they do not have SUBS and SUBA 4 37 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control E Alarm Types 4 38 SP Set point TS output function Set value Alarm type p Alarm value X is positive Alarm value X is negative ES Alarm function OFF Output OFF gt x Hi KE Upper and lower limit alarm Opr EH EN ap gt X ET Upper limit alarm OFF Lower limit al zz un ower limit alarm 7 P z Upper and lovver limit gt L He range alarm OFF Upper and lower limit alarm gt Hee with standby sequence OFF Upper limit alarm x vvith standby sequence OFF Sp Lower limit alarm ON i with standby sequence OFF ON Absolute value upper limit alarm NN Absolute value lower limit alarm ON M Absolute value upper limit alarm ON with standby sequence OFF Orr sss Absolute value lower limit alarm with standby sequence 1 Set values 1 4 and 5 Allow upper and lower limits of alarm to be separately set The upper and lower limits are indicated by L and H 2 Set value 1 Upper and lower limit alarm Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 always ON nu n L H SP SPL H H SPL H lt 0 L gt 0 H gt 0 L lt
51. 150 0 100 0 FSP 230 0 Time h min 5 29 I Section 5 Functions and Operations E Program Operations 5 30 Changing Set Values Advance Hold e With rate of rise programming the settings are made in blocks of two segments so the final soak time cannot be set if the Number of Segments Used parameter is set to an odd number Therefore the final segment will be a soak segment if the Number of Segments Used parameter is set to an even number and will be a ramp segment if set to an odd number If the rate of rise setting is changed in the middle of a segment the segment time for the ramp period changes as well as the rate of rise for the present SP SP After change Point of change Before change e In the above diagram the increased rate of rise results in a shorter time for that segment e Similarly if the SP is changed the segment time for the ramp period is also changed e If the soak time is changed only the segment time for the soak period is changed This section describes the parameters used during program operation e An advance operation moves to the start of the next segment e An advance operation moves forward to the end of the present segment each time the Advance parameter is set to ON The Advance parameter turns OFF once the next segment has been reached e An advance operation cannot be executed during reset e A hold operatio
52. Allowable voltage fluctuation 85 to 110 of rated voltage range Bcc E5AR T 22 VA max E5AR T 15 VA 10 W max p E5ER T 17 VA max E5ER T 11 VA 7 W max Thermocouples K J T E L U N R S B W Platinum resistance thermometers Pt100 Sensor inputs See note 2 Current input 4 to 20 mA DC or 0 to 20 mA DC including remote SP input Voltage input 1 to 5 VDC 0 to 5 VDC or 0 to 10 VDC including remote SP input Input impedance 150 Q using current input approx 1 MQ using voltage input Voltage pulse outputs Control Curent oumu 0 to 20 mA DC or 4 to 20 mA DC load 500 max including transfer output P Resolution Approx 54 000 at 0 to 20 mA DC approx 43 000 at 4 to 20 mA DC outputs Position proportional Control Model open close Relay outputs SPST NO 250 VAC 1 A including inrush current inductive load electrical life approx 100 000 operations ium Relay outputs SPST NO 250 VAC 1 A resistive load electrical life approx 100 000 operations uxiliary outputs Transistor Maximum load voltage 30 VDC maximum load current 50 mA outputs Residual voltage 1 5 V max leakage current 0 4 mA max Contact inputs Input ON 1 kO max OFF 100 kQ max Input ON Residual voltage of 1 5 V max input OFF Leakage current of 0 1 mA max inputs Digital setting using front panel keys or setting via serial communications 7 segment digital display and LED indicators Indication method E5AR T character
53. Communications Stop Bit ce Communications Parity ce EZ Transmission Wait Time Configure communication setting data in accordance with the other computers 2 Press the Key to move from the Input Initial Setting Level to the Communications Setting Level 3 Press the cel Key to scroll through the setting items as shown at left 4 Press the A and gt Keys to change a setting E Communications Writing To allow a host computer to write parameters to a Controller set the Communications Writing parameter Adjustment Level to an Enabled Procedure 1 Press the Key for less than 1 second to move from the Operation Level to the Adjustment Level 2 Press the ce Key to set the Communications Writing parameter to an Communications Writing Parameters can be written 100 000 times If you will be writing parameters frequently set the RAM Write Mode parameter Advanced Function Setting Level 5 50 Section 6 CompoWay F 6 9 6 10 Communications Communications Methodq 6 2 ESI m l b b sli 6 4 FINSmil Text cn och 6 6 NANA DIE r sssi 6 7 Read from Variable Area 6 10 Write to Vari
54. Related Parameters Input Type Input Initial Setting Level P 8 50 8 31 I Section 8 Parameters CH aw ye x ku 9 t w r Disturbance Gain w 3 5 t nr x Disturbance Time Constant ya x 9 t x Disturbance Rectification Band Disturbance Judgment Width Disturbance overshoot adjustment is enabled d um n 9t L P These parameters are used to adjust overshooting caused by distur bance e Disturbance gain is used to adjust the amount of overshooting caused by disturbance 1 Disturbance Gain 1 00 to 1 00 065 Setting Disturbance Time Constant 0 01 to 99 99 110 Rectification 0 000 to 9 999 0 000 Disturbance Judgment Width 99 99 to 99 99 FS 000 Related Parameters Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment Function Expansion Control Setting Level P 8 104 CH Set Point Offset PaF Coordinated operation This parameter is during coordinated operation to offset the channel 1 set point for program operation Setting Related Information n Operating Programs Using Multiple Channels in 5 2 Control Functions P 5 11 Related Parameters Set Point Selection Control Initial Setting Level P 8 62 8 32 8 6 Adjustment 2 Level L Ade 8 6 Adjustment 2 Level L Ade Adjustment 2 Level contains supplemental parameters for adjusting control such as time consta
55. SEND CHR 3 FOR l 1 TO LEN SENDS BCC BCC XOR ASC MID SENDS 1 NEXT BCC CHR BCC SDATA CHR 2 SEND BCC PRINT 1 SDATAS Receive routine gt RDATA TIMEOUT 0 RCVLOOP No response detection TIMEOUT 1 IF TIMEOUT gt 2000 THEN RESP No Response GOTO RCVEND IF LOC 1 0 THEN RCVLOOP Check for end character if no end character continue reading RDATA RDATA INPUT LOC 1 1 IF LEN RDATA lt 2 THEN RCVLOOP IF MID RDATA LEN RDATA 1 1 lt gt CHR 3 THEN RCVLOOP RESP MID RDATA 2 LEN RDATA 2 RCVEND Display received data PRINT RESPONSE RESP GOTO SENDDATA EXITSEND CLOSE 1 END 6 10 Program Example I Operation Example Reading the Present Value of Unit Number 01 RUNI J SEND DATA 010000101C00000000001 RESPONSE 010000010100000000014F SEND DATA STX 01 00 0 0101 CO 0000 00 0001 ETX BCC Number of elements Bit position Read start address Variable type MRC SRC SID Sub address Node No RESPONSE STX 01 00 00 0101 0000 0000014F ETX BCC Read data Response code MRC SRC End code Sub address Node No 6 41 l Section 6 CompoWay F Communications CompoWay F 0 c Fu 5 o 6 42 Section 7 Modbus Communications
56. The degree of protection is as shown below Front panel NEMA 4x indoor use IP20 Terminals IR o VII About this Manual How to use the manual General explanation Section 1 Overview Explains the features part names of the E5AR T ER T and main functions of the EBAR T ER T Section 2 Preparations Explains how to set up the Section 3 Typical Control Examples ER T for operation including mount ing wiring and initial settings Basic operation of Section 4 Settings Required for Explains the basic functions of the the EBAR T ER T Basic Control E5AR T ER T Section 8 Parameters Advanced functions Section 5 Functions and Opera Explains the operating methods of the E5AR T ER T tions required to get the most out of the Section 8 Parameters E5AR T ER T such as functions related to programmed operation Communication Section 6 CompoWay F Communi Explains how to use communication functions cations based functions Section 7 Modbus Communica tions User calibration Section 9 User Calibration Explains calibration procedures that can be performed by the user Troubleshooting Section 10 Troubleshooting Explains what to do when you encounter a problem Appendix Provides product specifications and lists of parameters Can be used to make a copy of your parameter settings VIII Special Notation 1 Important Important appears where incorrect settings or operation w
57. dS juawbes uje1Boid lt F Q iL enjeA wey Q SS ININ SS ININ WIN HH HUN eur weiboid uoneunsegq yur urej604d suonnedeg urej604d ON ureJ80Jgd eurewN urejBoJ4g 1811 uej604g pue eui A 47 Appendix Parameter Charts Protect Level Protect Level OAPT Operation Adjustment Protection O to 4 ICPT Initial Setting Protection 0 to 2 WTPT Setting Change Protection OFF ON PF Key Protection OFF ON Power ON at least 3 seconds _ cel at least 1 second less than v less than 1 second Program Setting less than 1 second Adiustment 1 second Operation Level pe Level JX K c o o lt A 48 L 250 PV Manual MV nn Position proportional Control Model PV Valve opening 1 B Tu Lr B A B x B Lr BAL Lr z E 3 lE3 PV Present Set Point Program No Segment No t PRG Program No 1 to 32 m an s 3 HOLD Hold 1 OFF ON Oe ADV Advance z OFF ON c E BACK Back rl OFF ON m i3 i3 RI STBM Remaining Standby Time Monitor gsl PRGT Elapsed Program Time g Monitor E 4 Ex rr c3 am SEG T Elapsed Segment Time Monitor
58. e Set the number of the PID set that you wish to display Up to 8 PID sets PID Sets 1 to 8 can be used PID constants MV upper and lower limits and automatic selection range upper limits are stored in each PID set Setting range Default value Selected PID set Related Parameters PID Set Number Program Setting Level P 8 19 w 4 2 PID control These parameters are used to store PID constants in each PID set If AT is executed the values are set automatically P action Control action using an MV proportional to the deviation action Control action using an output that is proportional to the time integral of the deviation The P action causes an offset and thus it is used in combination with the action As time elapses the offset disappears and the controlled temper ature and SP equalize D action Control action using an output that is proportional to the time derivative of the input The P action and action serve to correct the control result and thus respond slowly to sudden temperature changes The D action corrects control by adding an MV that is proportional to the slope of the temper ature change Proportional Band P 0 00 to 999 99 10 00 Integral Time I 0 0 to 3999 9 233 0 Derivative Time D 0 0 to 3999 9 e For ON OFF control set the proportional band to 0 0 The propor tional band cannot be set to 0 0 on a Position proportional Control Model e For P control or PD contr
59. w A i I lt a iw m tu rs Bar Graph c x 1 x Operation Indicators Function Key 1 Run Reset Key l IN DET WII UO Function Key 2 Level Key E5ER T Operation Indicators Mode Key Level Key Function Key 1 Run Reset Key Display No 1 Display No 2 Display No 3 Up Key Down Key Mode Key Display No 1 Display No 2 Display No 3 Function Key 2 1 2 Part Names and Functions I E Interpreting the Display Display No 1 Shows the present value the parameter name or error name red Display No 2 Shows the set point or the set value of the parameter green Display No 3 Shows the program number segment number or the level name orange Channel Indicator Shows the set channel number orange The channel indicator functions only on models with more than one input It is always OFF on models with only one input The E5ER T indicates the channel using the CH2 operation indicator Bar Graph Shows a bar graph of the set item such as the program time remaining or output level Program Sta
60. 011000000 2 1000000 jJu uuuBissv 1ndino 4ieilixny Kejdsi n SseJppy sseJppy ed e qeueA smpow fewoduoo A 28 Setting Lists Z3 00000 H 9 0000000 OWI G eJ NO 440 uoneJqie 1010 1 NO 0 440 1 NO 0 440 L0000000 H 00000000 H 10000000 00000000 H p lqeud uoneuuoJddy ul u yolq p lqeuzq c uoneuuxoJjddy ul lubiens 1 NO 0 440 L0000000 H 00000000 p lqeuzq uoneuuixoJddy ulubiens 1 NO 0 440 L0000000 H 00000000 H p lqeuzq r 1004 jo uonoeJx3 1 NO 0 440 L0000000 H 00000000 H p lqeuzq 100H aenbs jo uonoeJx3 1 NO 0 440 L0000000 H 00000000 H p lqeud 100H auenbs jo uonoeJx3 1 NO 0 440 L0000000 H 00000000 H p lqeuzq 10oH asenbs Jo uonoegx3 1 NO 0 440 L0000000 H 00000000 pejqeu4 eBeJeAy 1ueuJe o N L NO 0 440 L NO 0 440 L0000000 H 00000000 H L0000000 H 00000000 H p lqeuz e eBeJeAy 1ueuJe o N p lqeuz z eBeJeAy 1ueuJeA o N 1 NO 0 440 L0000000 H 00000000 H p lqeuz eBeJeAy 1ueuJe o N L NO 0 4 0 L0000000 H 00000000 H p lqeud y uonei do 1 DIO 15 1 1 NO 0 440 L0000000 H 00000000 H uonejedo 1 piO 15 1 1 NO 0 440 L0000000 H 00000000
61. 20000000 60000000 00000000 10000000 00000000 00000000 L0000000 H UOUJ Wop uow 00000000 H 440 c siueuiBeg equnn 200 5100 42 sseJppy sseJppy ed ejqeueA Appendix LZ 4oeg LHO 91000000 oz eoue py LHO i71000000 H ZL dS 30W34 LHI LL000000H 91 dS ureiBo4d LHO 0L000000 H SL NO dS p amp xt4 440 49 uebold 1HO H0000000 H 71 NO dS p xt 440 4S 8 0WSY LH2 30000000 H EL NO dS 80WAY 440 ds WesBold LHD Q0000000 H 21 NO renuejw 44O any LHO 00000000 H LL NO 165eu 44O UNY LHO 40000000 01 440 19Seu NO unu LHO V0000000 H 6 Og 1UBI AA 18 ON WesBOld LHO 60000000 ze Bien S 419 ON Wes6O1d 0000000 6 8 OL 1u619M 0 18 ON WesBOld LHO 80000000 H Z 9 91 10619M r 1g ON 4 2 90000000 H 9 8 1u5l M 14 ON weiboid 20000000 v y 1u616M ug ON WesBold p0000000 H z 1u616M 19 ON 20000000 z 1 3u818M 0 18 ON uue460Jd 20000000 1 NO 440 Bun suoneoriunuiuo 0000000 H 0 peigesia 00000000 H juawubissy 1ndu jue 3 AOQE SE AOQE SE WOD hueuuufissy indino 011002 AOQE SE AOQE SE WOD juawubissy e indino 1ejsue1 01002 AOQE SE AOQE SE WO0 hu uuu issy z Indino jejsuej Jo3
62. 40 mA D D 3 OUT3 4 LG O N 0 O 9 O Voltage output 12 V 44 40 mA or Current output lt 4 to 20 mA DC pee 500 max COM 0 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max ib Svvitched by output type setting N Potentiometer m B A 0 RS 485 W A 2 Relay output 2 OUT2 250 VAC 1A C 8 OUT2 3 Closed s m s q I 1 OUT1 4 m m Om NW ag OUT1 277 7 Current Voltage Thermocouple E V PT TC K Platinum resistance thermometer E Current Voltage Thermocouple Platinum resistance thermometer J Note With the E5AR T the power supply voltage must be 100 to 120 V for UL compliance With the E5AR T the power supply voltage must be 100 to 240 V for CE marking compliance 2 7 Section 2 Preparations E5ER T E5ER TQ4B 24 VAC DC 100 to 240 VAC mederi s o LES oA ese 3 Input power supply E depends on model 4 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC DC no polarity 5 V 6 1 2 ww OUT2 Voltage output 12 V 40 mA OUT1 Voltage output 12 V 40 mA or Current output 4 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max 0 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max S
63. 5501 5501 adh ajqeue en eA 19S yu nu SUES e6ues Joyuouj bumes Jeyoure Jed Sseppv ss rppy PUA jurod jewioeq ynejoq snqpoN 4 hemodwoy A 20 Setting Lists 044u09 epeoseo JO uone1edo JO sjeubis euin Dunes ueuw jeuueuo Ji99dS s en eA ejdsip eui se ewes eui si d ejep ul p Jequunu uue1Boid pejoejes A gueuno ul S19jeujeJed sjueuuDeg jo pue uogeiado p leulp4oooy uoned do 1uepuedepu Spo 041002 eui Jo s um s eui pue sindul jo jequinu y uo spuedeq Z Bumes wesGosd ur Bunip3 urej604g 94 se eues hy 7E4174 HO euit 440 9 seubis 2961 9 00 HO aT 153 juawbas 1es 9 jeubis eui 2661 4200 nn juawibas 195 S euis Wet 4200 man juawBas 18S v euDis n EF B JuawBes 1es e jeubIS un 9g61 8100 p F S yeuBis uu l se owes y eje BulMO O eu 1ueuuBeg Jes z jeubis lil L ae I O Hun eun uje4Boud o Buipio55v v 6 68 66 01 070070 66966000 01 00000000 10 69 166 01 0070 69660000 01 00000000 H Owl 44 24615 owl 2161 6000 Hun oul o Buipio55v 6 6S 66 01 070070 66966000 01 00000000 10 65 66 01 0070 69660000 01 00000000 H eui NO TEUD S owl O 0161 8000 L L I T TITI T T T T T p lqesiq 0 sjuewBbeas Jo JequunN 01 0
64. Area Numbers 7 8 E5AR ER T Operation commands and Microprocessor responses Variable area Read write Personal computer A variable area is accessed by specifying the position of a variable within the variable area using the channel identifier area number and address in the area Addresses are allocated within each variable type Addresses are two bytes long and written in hexadecimal Addresses are allocated according to access size Each address consists of a channel identifier area number and the address in the area Address 2 bytes r s 9 9 xl in ae a a so Channel Area number 00 to 3F Address in area 00 to FE 0 to 3 Area numbers in the variable area are listed in the following table EN Description type Communications Monitor Protect Level 06 Operation Level Adjustment Level 08 Adjustment 2 Level Setting area 0 Operation in PID Setting Level O Approximation Setting Level Program Setting Level Time Signal Setting Level 7 4 Variable Areas l Channel Identifier Address in Area B Number of Elements Variable 2 Description type Input Initial Setting Level oO Control Initial Setting Level Control Initial Setting 2 Level To specify channels 2 to 4 for Controllers with more than one input channel specify a channel identifier between 1 and 3 to identify the channel Only 0
65. Dx Dx Dx Dx x x x x qiqi gt x gt x e e e e m 8 en Lu R Om ri A 7 Appendix B E5 R T Status Communications Not used Error Output Display range exceeded OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Potentiometer error Control output heating Control output cooling Not used p rrr PETI A 8 Setting Lists I kizi Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 15 Duas n ass lo hama S o Auto Manual Auto Manual ass T o e Heating Type output output Control 7 Pulse voltage Linear current D r Note 1 Status is as follows when reading from setting area 1 e RSP input error Cleared e Potentiometer error Cleared e Display range exceeded Cleared Input error Cleared e Control output heating control output cooling Cleared e Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3 Alarm 4 Cleared AT Cleared Run Reset ON Reset e Auto Manual Previous value held SP mode MV tracking Updated e Control output heating type control output cooling type Updated 2 f the FSP Mode is set to ON the SP Mode parameter setting RSP RSP is ignored If the FSP Mode is set to OFF the SP Mode parameter setting RSP RSP is valid and the Program SP Mode and Remo
66. EV6 E EV10 D 6j amp BH COM 6 S COM 5 486 M A Event inputs TN B D 7 OUT2 tA EV1 S 0 RS 485 _ Event inputs 3 pus ya Ev pe 70 Voltage output 12 V 40 mA EV2 2 Current output 4 2 UA 4 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max Ev2 me 2 OUT1 COM 8 0 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max COM 3 Voltage output 12 V Switched by output 4 n e mA or I I type setting 16 17 NN 4 urrent output Li L OUT1 _ 4 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max F UNE m Current output lt 6 I Fi 5 0 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max z 4 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max m l Switched by output type setting v PT TC K 0 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max LE I Current Voltage Thermocouple Re Switched by output type setting J V PT TC K Platinum resistance thermometer Current Voltage Thermocouple NL Platinum resistance thermometer J E5AR TQCE3MB FLK E5AR TQ43DW FLK 2 loop Controller Auxiliary outputs
67. ISI 1 Input Value 1 for Input Correction dir E Va Lr c l tr Cie 19999 to 99999 ISS 1 Input Correction 1 199 99 to 999 99 a Va grie ISI 2 Input Value 2 for Input Correction 19999 to 99999 zE Va YA a Pult PPT 23 lt d B m DUM ine 4 inet o X n Ode zarg t E B m c qe E3 En Cre ISS 2 Input Correction 2 199 99 to 999 99 DOGN Disturbance Gain 1 00 to 1 00 DOTC Disturbance Time Constant 0 01 to 99 99 DO B Disturbance Rectification Band 0 000 to 9 999 DOJW Disturbance Judgement Width 99 99 to 99 99 SPOR Set Point Offset 19999 to 99999 1 Position proportional Control Model Closed Hold Open 1 0 1 Key 3 seconds or more Control stops For the Input Initial Setting Level refer to page A 50 Parameter Charts Power ON Protect Level Operation 1 Program Level Setting Level gt Adjustment 9 Adjustment2 Alarm Set Setting Level PID Setting gt Time Signal Setting Level Approximation Setting Level Input Initial Setting Level Control Initial 6 Control Initial s Alarm Setting 1 Display Adjustment 1 Communications Setting Level Setting 2 Level less than less than Adjustment 2 1 second Alarm Set Setting Time Signal 1 s
68. Pa E ON pr RENS P L s i Be Ge Ge Oe Se oe Du Du x E W m XJ 4 UN EY _ m Dx UN 1 J bal nf 14 34 81 pejgeue s WIV p untur 1edd wely 21000000 2 1 s Dunes v Hw q dd wely 1 1000000 H 91 p lqeu s Dunes y TV wely 0L000000 H SL pejgeue s Dunes 1677 4u 1edd wely 40000000 H pl pejgeue s Dunes HETV 417 q dd wely 30000000 H 1 p lqeu s fumes g 1v wely 00000000 ZL pejgeue s Dunes 12V iz iur s dd wely 00000000 LL pejgeue s Dunes HETV 2 1417 q dd wely 80000000 01 peigeue s Dunes z 1v z wey v0000000 H 6 pejgeue s 717V L Pu 1edd wely 60000000 8 pejgeue s Dunes HLTV I dur q dd wely 80000000 4 p lqeu s 6umes qy wely 0000000 9 p lqeu s q q w fenu l Hiq 90000000 H S p lqeu s Bues 1 1 uu 1 e16 1ul 20000000 iz p lqeu s q 4 pueg p0000000 H g Ajuo JOWUOW H D4S Joyuo N uu L Agqpueijs 0000000 H c Ajuo JOWUOW dSAd uoneiveq Ad 20000000 H Jes eq ueo qS pexi e Ajuo dSAd AWAUIOd 19S 1 s ld Ad L0000000 H 0 4 0 p lqesid 00000000 H way dd 021 c000 AOQE SE AO
69. eu S sjueuuBes enpiAipur JO s191euuejed Hues lol q 1e1eujejed Hupa 1u uu6 s y ui jequunu 149 4 5 v 18S p Jequunu wesboid p l s A pueuno eu sjueuuDeg jo JequinN pue uoneJedo pejeuipjooo uonejedo 1uepuedepu Spon 041002 v jo s um s eui pue sindul jo jequunu y uo spu d q Z suje1604d enpiaipul JO s1ejeujeged 5 lol q Jejeuuejed Sunip4 uej60Jg eui u jequinu eu 18S 1 Olur 0 7 01 0 v0000000 H 01 00000000 HO Z 19qunwN 195 uJe V 7181 VOOO o 4UIT 0 8 01 0 80000000 01 00000000 LASGUNN 195 did 4181 6000 R uonisod ain sseJppy sseJppy ed ejqeueA saene mme esta ursa eldsiq n edsa amy d fewoduioo 15 Appendix peigesip 147 070 0001 0 070 83600000 01 00000000 pe gesip 18417 070 07001 01070 83600000 01 00000000 H HO 2 yun eyey AW uedo 0000000 PIOU 00000000 H pesojo L 44444444 H q a 0 S0L 01 0 S01 V 00000 01 938444434 H Burooo DuneeH 07901 01 0 S VLEOO000 H 01 39444444 H puepuels uedo 0000000 H PIO 0 00000000 H pesojo L 44444444 H 0 S0L 01 0 S01 V Lp00000 H 01 938444434 H Burooo DuneeH 0 S01 01 0 S VLEOOO000H 01 39444443 H P4EpUE1S Z 6866 01 0070 68660000 H 01 00000000 H
70. i i the 4 4 4 7 7 7 7 ed indui o Bulpioooy ed indul o Buipyoooy ed indul o Buipyoooy ed indui o ulpioooy 66666 01 6666 I 46981000 H 01 13184444 HO ur s dd wely 195 wey ed 1ndut o ulpioooy 66666 01 66661 46981000 H 01 131 8 HO en A ULE V 19S Wey ed indui o Buipyoooy ywq Jeddf3 dS o 117 4901 dS H ulog 19S U S ld 0 g01 01 070 VLEOOO00 H 01 00000000 H HO JoWUOW AN 0 S0L 01 070 VLEOOO00 H 01 00000000 H Duiooo DuneeH 0 901 01 0 S VLEOOO000 H 01 39444444 H pJepuels HO UNE H JolluoNW AN n r 4 ddn dS 0 iur 4aM07 dS H WopesBumojgorju Ho mmas 2000 1000 Bue1 indui peuroeds o Buipio55v o HO Ad uesesg 0000 0000 ed ejqeue Hope eBuei 10jyuouj Dumes uu 00 jewioeq snqpo 4 femodwoo suoneoiunuJuJo9 Buliolluoui pue fures 10J H AQ pexijeud sen eA 103uouj Bunjes Lo 0109 sBunm s JO IUO A SuoneoiunuJulo 2 Dx Dx Dx Dx 66666 01 66661 16981000H 01 L3 g4444 H H er Jomo ULHE V 195 UHE 2110 6000 66666 01 66661 46981000 H 01 1318444 HP z wm 4eddr wiely 19s uel 66666 01 66661 46981000 H 01 L3 g4444 H i HO c 9n EA WIE 195 Wey 66666 01 66661 46981000 H 01 L3 g4444 H HO l WWI 13M0 Wely 195 wey LO 09 7 7 7 7 m e e PL n q 7 q q
71. 1 um x sn Lt ce Alarm Type 1 to 4 parameters set to Deviation Alarm e This parameter is used to select whether the alarm value deviation will be based on the present SP or the target SP Setting range Unit Default value RE Present SP ncn Target SP ma Present SP r 4 co Fg oA w e L rm Related Information Alarm SP Selection in 5 6 Alarm Adjustment Functions P 5 26 Related Parameters Alarm Set Alarm Value Alarm Set Setting Level P 8 37 Alarm Set Alarm Upper Limit Alarm Set Setting Level P 8 38 Auxiliary Output Assignment Control Initial Setting 2 Level P 8 67 Alarm Type Alarm Setting Level P 8 75 Alarm Latch Alarm Setting Level P 8 76 Alarm Hysteresis Alarm Setting Level P 8 77 Standby Sequence Reset Alarm Setting Level P 8 78 x L 1 9 e This function is used to set the pulse width for program end output The setting range is ON 0 0 to 10 0 s The default is 0 0 e When this parameter is set to ON the ON status continues during a reset until operation starts Setting range Default value an Continue ON output 0 0 No output S 0 1 to 10 0 Related Information Program Status Outputs in 5 7 Program Operation Functions P 5 36 Related Parameters Auxiliary Output Assignment Control Initial Setting 2 Level P 8 67 8 97 I Secti
72. 3 will show Z Press the kel Key repeatedly less than 1 second each time to select the Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment parameter 4 39 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control Alarm 1 Type Alarm 1 type Alarm Value Alarm Set 1 Alarm Value 1 4 40 4 Press the to set the Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment parameter to 1 CH 1 Alarm 1 Set Alarm 1 Type parameter to a Lower limit Alarm in the Alarm Setting Level 5 Press the Level Key for less than 1 second to move to the Alarm Setting The display will show the Alarm 1 Type parameter 6 Press the Key to select 3 Lower limit Alarm Set the Alarm Set Alarm Value 1 parameter to 10 0 C in the Alarm Set Setting Level 7 Hold down the Key for at least 1 second to move to the Operation Level 8 Press the Alarm Set 9 Press the _ Key three times less than 1 second each time to move to the Sett
73. 7 1 Communications Method 7 2 Y LOS asa au d as 7 4 To EISUOT FLURCUORS esacan L ula 7 7 TA HA 1 7 8 7 5 Read from Variable Area 7 11 7 6 Write to Variable Area 7 13 7 7 Operation Commands siniseen soba 7 15 0 SENGAT me 7 18 7 9 Commands and Responses 7 20 o c 9 or 36 Q OIS f 7 1 I Section 7 Modbus Communications 7 1 Communications Method B Modbus Communications Modbus communications are based on the RTU Mode of the Modbus Protocol of Modicon Inc specifications PI MBUS 300 Revision J Detailed specifications for the Modbus protocol are provided below Communications are implemented by creating a program on the host computer The descriptions in this section are therefore from the perspective of the host computer For example reading and writing refer to the host computer reading from and writing to the T E Communications Specifications Transfer connection Multi point Communications method 1 RS 485 2 wire half duplex Synchronization method Start stop Baud rate 9 6 19 2 or 38 4 Kbit s Send code RTU Remote Terminal Unit Stop bit length Automatically determined by vertical parity setting Error detection Vertical parity
74. AOQE SE o oqe se ewes R jueuuufiissy 6 1ndu 1u9 3 AOQE SE se ewes Ef jueuuufiissy 8 1ndu 149 5 AOQE SE se owes L jueuuufiissy 1ndu 1u9 3 DECEM NINE A 27 H 1e Yo H ye se seowes 8 se owes 9 1 Se OWES v H l 1e Yo H ye se seowes e se ewes ewes yo 18 Se QUES H l 1e H l 9 ye se se owes je se ewes oues H l 1e Yo H l 18 se se owes e SE awes oues H l 1e Yo H ye se se owes je se ewes oues H l 1e Yo H ye se se owes ye se ewes oues oJ 1e H l H ye se se owes je se ewes oues H l 1e Yo H ye se se owes je se WWI 49M07 v 1ndino jejsueJ 9640 4100 yuq 4edd p indino 1ejsuej 640 vioo H l YE SE OWES jur 49407 1ndino Jejsuel 2230 6100 yo ye se eureg jur q dd indino Jejsuej 0640 8100 M l ye se owes WWI z 1ndinO JaysueL 3230 2100 H l ye SE jur Jedd z 3ndino Jejsuej OZAO 9100 M l ye se owes WWI indino JeysueL vz3o SLOO H l ye SE eujeg yu 4 ddn indjno 4ejsuej 8230 7100 uonoejes indino 8 4 9240 8000 juawubissy OL 1ndino v730 600 jueujuBissy 6 indino 4ieilixny jueujuBissy 8 1ndino 4Aieilixny jueujuBissy 1ndino Meixny jueujuBissy 9 indino 4ieilixny jueujuBissy indino Aieilixny juowubissy y 1ndino Ayeyixny 9230 6100
75. Causes from Conditions Abnormal Measured Values P 10 4 A regular slow thermal response temperature Change to a sheathed temperature sensor sensor is connected to a fast thermal response control system Connections The proportional band is too narrow i e the P e Increase the P constant to within the point where constant is too small the response speed becomes too slow e Execute AT The integral time is too short i e the constant is e Increase the constant to within the point where too small the response speed becomes too slow e Execute AT The derivative time is too short i e the D constant Increase the D constant to within the point where is too small stability during rectification deteriorates e Execute AT ON OFF control is being performed Use P control or PID control The control period is too long in a fast thermal Shorten the control period response control system The overlap band is mistakenly set as adead band Set an overlap band in heating cooling control Settings E Hunting Occurs Check connections and settings as explained above in Overshooting or Undershooting Occurs Sen The heat capacity of the heater is too large for the Use a heater with a heat capacity suitable for the heat capacity of the controlled object controlled object Periodic disturbances occur that cause the heat Establish an environment will minimal capacity of the controlled object t
76. Floating control enables position proportional control without a feedback potentiometer Parameters can be used to assign the type of data that is output from each output For the models with more than one input assignments can be made for channels 2 and higher as needed depending on the number of channels Outputs Control Transfer Output Assignments Channel 1 control output heating or open for control output Channel 1 control output cooling or close for control output Channel 1 present set point Channel 1 PV Channel 1 control output heating or open for transfer output Channel 1 control output cooling or close for transfer output Channel 1 valve opening When control outputs are used assignments are made automatically based on the control mode that is set as explained on the previous page No changes are necessary When an output is used as a transfer output assign the data to be transferred to an unused output For outputs with multi output functionality specify a pulse voltage output or a linear current output using the multi output output type setting I Section 1 Overview For linear current outputs O to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA can be selected Pulse voltage outputs are 12 VDC 40 mA Outputs Multi output output type Pulse Voltage Output Linear current output output type Linear Current Output O to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 9 Auxiliary Output The type of data that is output from each auxiliary output can be As
77. HO uonejedo esje eu i elld yedo 2100 UOW W09 9po N O4 U0D 2200 L LOO edA 1ndui Buipio55v uonisod 199 julod jeuuroeq Hun jui g ddn indui v o 5 en eA ejdsip WNWIUILU pue 66666 01 11 dS Bojeuy e6ues Dunes 10sues Jo 119 ye se oues ywi g ddn yw J9M07 dS euinjejeduus L YW Oz 0 v 10000000 H 00000000 0000000 00000000 L0000000 H 00000000 L0000000 H Dunes Aeyds ynejeq 0 vui 02 010 3ndino uano meau 1ndino asjnd L 3ndino uano meau 1ndino asjnd q 10jyuou 6umes 00000000 10000000 00000000 L0000000 H 00000000 suoneoiunuJuuoo BIA Buuojuoui pue Dunes JO de H Aq pexijasd sen eA 4o uoul um s Iur dS h q ddn dS 4130 3000 ed t 1ndino uang 6 mu 9000 ed e 1ndino uang 1e8ur m 9000 ed z 1ndino uang 1e8ur menm ed 1ndino lu uino 1e8ur FE uow uow W09 ed indino 0040 bi qo sseJppy sseJppy ed ejqeueA 4 Aemodwog Dumes enu Iolluoo JojeueJeg A 24 Setting Lists xew sulelBoid g sjuewbes 22 xew sweibold z sjueuuDes OZ xew 50 8 9 51494 5 9 xew Ssweibold oz s uswbes z sweibold ze s uewbes g Jejeurejed sjueuufeg 1equinN eui jo G m s eui uo spuedep s eq ueo yey SWeHoJd jo
78. Ha Aq pexijeud sen eA o uoul um s so uoul um s SISOJ9 S H ed uue v d sngpo J fewoduio5 9040 000 7040 0000 uoje1 wey 2040 000 0040 0000 JO I A 7 Dum S wey A 31 Appendix Ul 1 O N uueje l uedo 10000000 H uow wey ul uedo i E s d 3 9 D u O N uueje u asol 00000000H I 46 4 0 OL 1ndino reixny 2240 9100 wee ul 1 O N wueye u uedo L0000000 H UOUJ uue y u uedo 9901 1 v ol O N Uueje ur asolo 00000000 H 545 440 61ndino v2z4O 5100 1 O N uueje u uedo 10000000 H wee l ule y u uedo solo O N wee ui SO O 00000000 H g ndino deilixny 8240 100 wee ui 1 O N uueje l uedo 10000000 H uue y u uedo solo O N Ueje ui SO O 00000000 H Lindino Adeixny 9240 6100 Ul so O 0 O N Uuere u so O 00000000 H adh ejqeue Bue sonuoul Sum s a un jojourereg sseuppy sseuppy sdi agla q y snqpow 1 O N uueje u uedo 10000000 H uue y u uedo 9 1ndinO Aseyixny pzJO 2100 JO on eA iu uonisod Aelds E 19S hun 100 jewi0eq ynejoq i A 32 Setting Lists spuooeg peigesip ueos e dsiq 0 66 01 0 9000000 H 01 00000000 H poueg ueog 4910 1 NO 1 0000000 0 440 00000000 NO Jamo ye ueos
79. Hold down the _ Key for less than 1 second to move from the Operation and Segment Time Level to the Program Setting Level 2 The Program Editing parameter will be displayed in the Program Setting Level Select the number of the program to be edited For example to change the Segment Set Point and Segment Time parameters for program 2 use the A and Keys to select 2 3 Press the el Key twice to display the Segment Editing parameter Select the number of the segment to be edited First segment 1 parameters will be edited so use the Key to select 1 4 Press the cel Key for less than 1 second to display the Segment Set Point parameter for segment 1 Use the and SZ Keys to set the Lt Segment Set Point parameter for segment 1 to 50 0 4 28 4 8 Program Settings I 5 Press the Key for less than 1 second to display the Segment Time parameter for segment 1 Use the A and 22 Keys to set the Segment Time parameter segment 1 to 5 00 6 Press the cel Key several times to display the Segment Editing parameter again This time the next segment number after the segment that was just edited will be displayed Check that segment number 2 is displayed To edit segment 1 parameters again or to edit parameters for another segment number use the and 221 Keys to select the desired
80. L Ade 8 33 Alam Set Setting Level E AEn setis Fes enu A Rudi 8 36 FID Setting Level e PE g u uy k rune tut uat Ba 8 39 Time Signal Setting Level uy aussi aya 8 43 Approximation Setting Level L EEE 8 46 Input Initial Setting Level L 8 49 Control Initial Setting Level L 8 55 Control Initial Setting 2 Level Eie uuu teca ai 8 63 Alarm Setting Level 8 74 Display Adjustment Level EN uuu uya ide oa roa ates 8 80 Communications Setting Level 5 8 84 Advanced Function Setting Level Fath 8 88 Expansion Control Setting Level but 8 94 Section 9 User Calibration 9 1 9 2 Parameters for User Calibration 9 2 Output Calibration Parameters 9 2 L laici RN RR RR 9 4 XV allDFellOfi asnasan ama 9 4 Quilp t Calibralioiu E 9 4 Registering Calibration Data 9 4 9 3 Thermocouple Input Calibration 9 5 PTEPaTolloliS TE HE 9 5 94 Analog Input Calibration iei ore it ee 9 8 9 5 Resistance Therm
81. Wait Band Lower Limit _ Next segment Timer stopped Timer restarted Current segment Time The difference deviation between the PV and the present set point are constantly compared during program operation If the PV is not within the wait band the present set point is held at the point that the deviation went outside the wait band and the program does not move on The program moves on as soon as the PV enters the wait band Segment completed SP z z a Wait Band Current segme ext segme Lower Limit Timer Timer Time stopped restarted e One out of following functions can be selected Segment Output Time Signal or Segment No Output described later e When the Time Signal parameter is enabled 6 outputs can be set for each program and three different times can be set for each output here are two timers for the time signal a switch ON timer and a switch OFF timer The timers start from the beginning of the segment e Outputs turn ON once the switch ON time has elapsed and turn OFF after the switch OFF time has elapsed 5 33 I Section 5 Functions and Operations ll Segment Outputs 5 34 SP Time signal output OFF time The Time Signal 1 Set Segment 1 to Time Signal 6 Set Segment 3 parameters are used to set the segments in which the time signals will start The default setting is O disabled The ON O
82. e dsi LIE wn aooo ima s EZ F uiv gifewoduoo A 17 Appendix Uonnoexe 10 pejoe es 1equinN 18S uue v L enjeA Wely p 19S wey y WWI 19407 Uuely 19S WEY nleA wely 18S wey y WWI 1940 UJel y z 195 Wey 18S uue y se owes y eje Buiwojo eu enjeA wely Z 18S wey edA 1ndui o Buipio55v 66666 01 6666 L 16981000H 01 1318 y ur 4907 wely 195 wely ed A 1ndui o Buipio55v 66666 01 6666 1 46981000 01 1318 r yuq jedd wely 195 Wey ed A 1ndui o Buipio55v 66666 01 6666 1 16981000H 01 13184 44 y 9n eA UHE V 195 wey ed A 1ndui o Buipio55v 66666 01 6666 1 4698 1000H 01 13183 JWI 19407 Uuel y 195 wely d 1ndui o Buipio55v 66666 01 66661 16981000H 01 1318 iur eddy uue y 18S uue v ed A 1ndui o Buipio55v 66666 01 6666 1 I6981000H 01 1318 enjeA WRI jeg uue v ed A 1ndui o Buipio55v 66666 01 6666 1 46981000 01 1318 c WI 19407 UJel y 195 wey edA 1ndui o Buipio55v 0 66666 01 6666 1 46981000 01 13184 c ur q dd uuelv 195 wey ed A 1ndui o Buipio55v d 1ndui o Buipio55v edA 1ndui o Buipio55v ed A 1ndui o Buipio55v uonisod 1104 jeuuroeq 0 ynejoq SUONEOIUNWWOD BIA Buuojuoui pue Dunes JO de Ha Aq pe
83. independent operation 5 11 Independent Operation Coordinated Operation 8 59 inferring causes from conditions abnormal measured values 10 4 Initial Setting Protection 5 24 8 4 initialization due to setting changes A 44 Input Cold Junction Compensation 8 99 Input Temperature Units 8 51 Input Type 8 50 input correction 5 2 Input Correction 1 8 31 Input Correction 2 8 31 input error 10 3 Input Initial Setting Level 8 49 A 23 input type 4 10 input type switch error 10 3 location 1 9 Input Value 1 for Input Correction 8 31 Input Value 2 for Input Correction 8 31 inputs terminals 2 10 inspecting indicator accuracy 9 14 installation procedure 2 3 insulation blocks 2 17 Integral Time 8 40 K key operation 5 39 keys description 1 7 using 1 7 Level Key 1 7 limit cycle 4 35 Limit Cycle MV Amplitude 8 102 Linear Current Output Type 8 56 list of services CompoWay F communications 6 6 MANU operation indicator 1 6 Manual Mode 4 47 Manual MV 8 7 Manual MV Initial Value 8 101 manual operation 4 47 Manual Output Method 8 101 Manual Reset Value 8 26 manual settings 4 36 Modbus communications 7 2 Mode Key 1 7 Monitor Item Level Setting 8 82 monitor values reading CompoWay F communications 6 17 Modbus communications 7 20 monitor setting items 5 21 Motor Calibration 8 72 motor calibration 4 18 motor calibration error 10 3 Move Average Move Average Count 8 34 Move to Advan
84. indui 10sues eBuei payloads 6umes Ke dsi eDuei 1oyuou DBunie Suoneoiunuuuioo BIA Buuojuoui pue Dunes JO de Ha Aq pexyasd sen eA JoyuouJ Bunes CAN 0090 0000 99 157 ssolppy l dii ejqeue 9 qeueA uonej1edo Appendix Z 4UIT ON 0 22 91 0 J0200000 H 01 00000000 H o uoneuns q xur Wesbold seul ed 1ndul o Buipio55v ed 1ndui o Buipio55v 6666 01 0 40 20000 01 00000000 H 44O 0 66666 01 46981000 H 01 00000000 440 0 66666 01 36981000 Ol 00000000 iz 91 1 70000000 H 01 10000000 0 8 01 0 80000000 01 00000000H Prd 10000000 00000000 H 10000000 00000000 10000000 I O H H I I I L 555 5 suoniedey weiboig Jr 940 pueg 1eM jur q dd pueg Wem 9 1es Wely 9 JequunN 195 did OL ndino 1ueuiPeg 6 indino lu u6 s 0181 3081 081 081 808k 9081 Vesi 8681 8000 1000 9000 9000 000 000 0100 100 D D LLI LLI 440 00000000 g 1ndino juewbes 10000000 34 00000000 4 indino juewbes 10000000 440 00000000 9 1ndino juewbes 10000000 34 00000000 s ndino juewbes L0000000 H 440 00000000 y 1ndino juewbes EN 3 ommo E235 perm 440 00000000
85. information Command mode 4 32 Fixed SP FT Remote SP F2 Fixed SP Use this command to select the SP Mode Refer to SP Modes in 5 7 Program Operation Functions P 5 31 for details on the SP Mode This command can be used in both setting area O and setting area 1 e f AT is being run in the specified channel an operation error will occur To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command MRC SRC Response code Response Codes The response for a normal end is shown above For the response codes refer to 6 7 Operation Commands P 6 13 Instruction Related MRC SRC code information Related Description Ch Command mode Hold Cancel 1 Hold Cancel Hold Cancel Hold Cancel Hold Cancel 6 9 Commands and Responses I This command starts or cancels the hold operation This command is used in setting area 0 An operation error will occur if itis used is setting area 1 Operation errors will also occur in the following cases e If AT is being executed e f the specified channel is being reset or is on standby To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command Respon se MRC SRC Response code Hesponse Codes The response for a normal end is shown above For the response codes refer to 6 7 Operation Commands P 6 13 M Advance Com
86. jue 3 71 30 J0 ss ss ed jqene en pA eS nun uoleed Dunes Ke dsiq Joyuou Bumes Ke dsiq x Jojeujejeg Je dete fonus julod jewioeq ynejeq quuv snqpoN 4 2 42 p lqesiq gL000000 H 92 sjeuueuo Ily jo 3ndino YO 1013 1ndu dSH V 1000000 H 92 sieuueu Ily jo indino HO 10113 Indul 6 1000000 H sieuueu Ily Jo 1ndino HO p Uuelv 81000000 c sieuueu Ily Jo indino HO Uuelv L000000 H Zz sieuueu Ily Jo 1ndino HO 2 Uuelv 9L000000 H LZ sjeuueu Ily Jo 1ndino HO Uuelv SL000000 H 02 INTV T 27 L000000 H 61 OL 1ndino WeIBOld LHO 21000000 81 6 1ndino uiei6oJd LHD 21000000 ZL 8 1ndino WesBOld LHO LL000000 H 91 1ndino uei6oJd LHD 01000000 SL 9 1ndino LHO 40000000 H tL S 1ndino weibold LHO 30000000 21 v 1ndino uei6oJd LHO 40000000 ZL 1ndino 4 LHO 00000000 LL z 1ndino uiei6oJd LHO 80000000 H 01 L 1ndino WresBOld LHD V0000000 H 6 1ndino pug LHO 60000000 H 8 nd no unu LHO 80000000 H 2 p lqesiq LHD 0000000 9 1043 1ndu dSH LHO 90000000 H s 1043 1ndu LH2 50000000 p v LHO 0000000 H g wely 0000000 H c z wely 20000000 H 1 L wely LHO 10000000 H h 010 0 peigesia 00000000H juowubissy 1ndino Avelixny AOQE SE se oues jueuuufiissy O 1ndu 1u9 3
87. lt ju w m Control mode key heating cooling control and position proportional control floating During cascade heating cooling control only channel 1 is displayed bx mp 13 m rr pue r al w 4 1 i w 4 i nx These parameters are normally used at the default values The AT Calculated Gain parameter specifies the gain used when PID constants are calculated during AT A smaller gain provides greater adaptability while a larger gain provides greater stability The AT Hysteresis parameter is used to set the hysteresis when switching ON OFF during the limit cycle while AT is being executed The Limit Cycle MV Amplitude parameter is used to set the MV amplitude during the limit cycle while AT is being executed This is effective when P z 0 00 in standard control or when closed is selected in proportional control The Temporary AT Execution Judgement Deviation parameter is used to determine whether temporary AT is executed when executing AT If AT is executed when the deviation is greater than the set value temporary AT is executed This is effective when P z 0 00 in standard control or when closed is selected in proportional control CH Bumpless at RUN 1 Setting 1 Setting 8 18 Expansion Control Setting Level L Eu AT Calculated Gain 0 1 to 10 0 AT Hysteresis 0 1 to 9
88. one input correspond to channels 1 to 4 First select a channel with the Key and then set the corresponding input correction values 5 1 Input Adjustment Functions I 6 Obtaining Input Correction Values for 2 point Correction Preparations Procedure for Using a 2 point Correction Temperature readings are taken using the EBAR 1 ER T at any two points the actual temperature at the required location the object and the present temperature of the E5AR T ER T 1 Set the input type based on the sensor 2 Obtain a temperature sensor that can measure the temperature of the object as shown in Figure 1 A EBAR T Digital Controller B Thermometer Figure 1 Configuration for Input Correction 1 Correction will be performed based on the temperature readings at two points one near room temperature and one near the desired SP Measure the temperature of the object when it is near room temperature and when it is near the SP B and check the corresponding readings of the Controller A at the same temperatures 2 Setthe Input Correction 1 parameter to the difference between the temper ature of the object B and the Controller reading A when near room temperature Object temperature B Controller reading A and set the Input Value 1 for Input Correction parameter to the Controller reading A 3 Setthe Input Correction 2 parameter to the difference between the temper ature of the object B and the corre
89. rv O O 0 02 Scaling Input Value 1 Scaling Input Value 2 Temperature Unit 3 Temperature Unit 4 Control Mode 1 Temperature Unit 1 Temperature Unit 2 SP Upper Limit SP Lower Limit Decimal Point Position D c i o D o Input Type 1 Input Type 2 Input Type 3 Input Type 4 Jayouesed peDueu HO UOWWOD HO A 44 Setting Lists uolpuo pug NO 4 1e uoneJedo 0 1ueuiBes 440 9 01 20615 eui 01 jueuibes NO 9 0 1 eufis owl 01 jueuifeg 1eg 9 0 euis eui JOSHO luloq 19S 9poIN 49 uoneunseq yur wesbold suol d H wesbold JUI 19m07 pueg eM yur q ddn pueg yem JequinN 18S Wey JequinN 199 did 0L 01 1ndino lu u6 s SIH Jo jueuiBes eui jueuiBeg JUIOd 18S uawas juewbas p sn sjuawbas saquinn C es a y l 01 U09 ndul M de d uonisod ndul eunjejeduue 5 weuufisse ON s uleved Burzi eniui jou uonipuo sJojouJeJed payejay Step Time Rate of Rise Programing 10 rogram Time Unit Number of Segments 10 Independent Operation Coordinated Operation Number of Enabled Scaling Display Value 1 Scaling Display Value 2 Scaling Input Value 1 Scaling Input Value 2 Channels Temperature Unit 4 Control Mode 1 SP Upper Limit SP Lower Limit Temperature Unit 1 Temperature Unit 2 Temperature Unit 3 Input Type 1 Input Type
90. settings and prevent accidental changes to the settings Level Changes at Startup Up To Protect Level Operation Program Adjustment Adjustment 2 Setting Level Level Level pL ERE L Rd e Rd key key key key less less than 1 s less than 1 s less than 1 s key less than 1 s than 1 s Approximation Time Signal PID Setting Alarm Set setting Setting Level Lage Setting Level 1 EET 5 L Prd Level L ba J key less key less key less 4Ed 3s LL Control in progress or longer or longer Protect Level t Pre Parameter Changes within Protect Level Protect Level LPEE APT peration Adjustment Protection 4 Setting Change Protection 2 JOFF 0 ON 1 PF Key Protection JOFF 0 ON 1 8 3 l Section 8 Parameters Operation Adjustment Protection 6226 Initial Setting Protection LLL Setting Change Protection LP PF Key Protection FPE The parameters that are protected are indicated below Default settings are shaded Operation Adjustment Protection This function restricts key operation in Operation Level Program Setting Level Adjustment Level Adjustment 2 Level Alarm Set Setting Level PID Setting Level Time Signal Setting Level Approxi mation Setting Level and Monitor Item Level
91. the parameter will change either forward or backward each time the Key is pressed The parameters will not change backward in the Calibration Level For details refer to Section 8 Parameters Parameter changes backward every key is pressed for less than 1 second second when the c key is held down al After holding dovvn co key for 2 seconds After holding down key for 1 second al Hold down the te key M Saving Parameter Settings 4 4 e The first parameter will be displayed if the Key is pressed when the last parameter is being displayed e To change a setting use the and Keys to change the setting and then either wait for 2 seconds or press the Key to save the change e A change to a parameter setting is also saved when the level is changed e Before turning OFF the power supply always be sure that any changes to parameter settings are confirmed e g by pressing the Key Any changes made with the and Keys that have not been saved will be lost when the power supply is turned OFF 4 1 Setting Levels and Key Operations I Control is stopped in following levels Input Initial Settings Control Initial Setting Control Initial Settings 2 Alarm Settings Dis
92. the setting of the MV at Reset parameter takes precedence In Manual Mode the manual MV takes prece dence value MV at PV Error for 5 Standard Control Models 105 0 to 105 0 Heating cooling control 1 Closed output ON Valve closed 0 No output valve opening hold 1 Open output ON Valve open MV at PV Error for Position propor tional Control Models Note The order of priority of the MV parameter settings is Manual MV MV at Reset MV at PV Error I Section 5 Functions and Operations 5 4 Display and Key Adjustment Functions E Display Scan Starting Stopping the Display Scan Start Display Scan at Power ON The display scan function is used to automatically change display channels on a Controller with more than one input This function applies only to channels that are enabled in the Number of Enabled Channels parameter If the Number of Enabled Channels parameter is set to 3 channels 1 2 and 3 are displayed The display scan can be started automatically after turning ON the power supply or by pressing the Key To stop the display scan hold down the Key for at least 1 second Use the Start Display Scan after Power ON and Display Scan Period parameters to specify how the display scan operates status after Start Display Scan Display Scan turn
93. to one specific channel Operation is as follows based on the ON OFF status of the event input mm Fixed SP Mode When the event input is ON the program is on hold and this status is held until the event input changes to OFF The Hold ON Clear Hold OFF function creates an operation command that applies to one specific channel During coordinated operation however the operation command applies to all channels This function is enabled only during program operation Operation is as follows based on the ON OFF status of the event input Clear Hold Mode Hold Mode When the event input is ON the segment is advanced to the beginning of the next segment The event input must be reset before this function can be activated again The advance function creates an operation command that applies to one specific channel During coordinated operation however the operation command applies to all channels This function is enabled only during program operation Operation is as follows based on the ON OFF status of the event input of Advance Mode 5 45 I Section 5 Functions and Operations Back e When the event input is ON the program returns to the start of the current segment being executed The event input must turn OFF once before this function can be used again The back function creates an operation command that applies to one specific channel During coordinated operation however the operation command a
94. 0 IHI ILI IHI ILI n Lop H gt 0 L lt 0 SPH L IHISILI 3 Set value 4 Upper and lower limit range Case 3 always OFF 1 Case Case 2 Ha t2 H SP L L H SP SP L H lt 0 L gt H lt 0 L gt 0 H gt 0 L lt 0 H LSP IHI2ILI o h lt SPH L IHISILI 4 Set value 5 Alarm with upper limit and lower limit with standby sequence With the above upper and lower limit alarms e Cases 1 and 2 e Case 3 Always OFF If hysteresis overlaps the upper and lower limits always OFF 5 Set value 5 Alarm with upper and lower limit standby sequence If hysteresis overlaps the upper and lower limits always OFF 6 For information on standby sequences refer to 5 6 Alarm Adjustment Functions Under the following conditions the SP of segment 1 is used as the SP for deviation alarms e f the Operation at Reset parameter is set to stop control and the program is reset in Program SP Mode 4 11 Using Auxiliary Outputs I e f the Operation at Reset parameter is set to stop control and the program is placed on standby in Program SP Mode B Alarm Values Alarm values are indicated by X in the alarm type table When separate upper and lower limits are set for an alarm the upper limit value is indicated by H and the lower limit is indicated by L When an upper and lower limit alarm upper and lower limit range alarm or lower limit alarm with standby sequence is selected the Alarm Upper Limit and Alarm L
95. 00000000 uewBbes V0000000 H 9 nd no 1ueuiPes HO HO 440 00000000 H m 1ueuiDeg ureiBolg SLYO 10000000 S ndino 1lu u6 s 34 00000000 H HO jueuiDeg wesBold 10000000 r 1indino 1 440 00000000H HO 1ueuiDeg WwesBOld LvO L0000000 H g 1ndino juewbes d 00000000 H m q ulb s me 10000000 c indino 1 440 00000000 H m 1ueuiDeg weibold ra 10000000 1ndino 1ueuibes 440 00000000H HO 1ueuiDeg 0170 L0000000 H 440 00000000H HO pem yuewHes weibold OvO yun euin aul 1ueuiDeg 1 Weibold SILH Jo 1ue u B s 1ueuufes 4 1110 18S 1u u 6 s 1 uleiB6oid 6 6S 66 0 00070 6S660000 H 91 00000000 40 69766 01 0070 65660000 01 00000000 H o 0070 ed 1ndui 0 Buipio55v NA ed A Indu na o Buipio55v uonisod en EA 199 owns julod G Y 66666 01 0 4698 1000 H 01 00000000 H LOvO ooro vq jejeure jeg sseuppy sseppy ed aigeven Quay snqpoy 3 AeM duo suoneoiunuJjuJoo J eAAoduJo2 uin luo ejqissod si um s ejeg uiei6oid yu Jeddn Bunjes dS 01 yul Bumes ds IT I Zx Humes Aelds jnejeq 1oyuou Dumes Ae ds q H A 40 Setting Lists JUIOd 18S JUaWBaS 81 lu u
96. 07 07 Move to Setting Area 1 07 Move to Protect Level 071 1 Manual Mode SP Mode 0 to 3 F 2 12 Hold 0 to 3 F 2 0 Hold Cancel 1 Hold 6 13 I Section 6 CompoWay F Communications 1 Executed for all channels 2 Specify the channel 0 CH1 1 CH2 2 CH3 3 CH4 F All channels Note When all channels is specified only enabled channels will respond and processing will begin from channel 1 If an error is detected on any one channel an operation error will occur If all channels end normally a normal end will occur When cascade control is selected for the control mode specify channel 2 commands for the following operation commands Run Reset e Auto Manual SP Mode e Cascade Open Close FINS mini Response Text Response code MRC SRC MRES SRES 30 05 2 2 4 MRC SRC FINS mini command text is returned here Result of execution of the command Response Codes e Erorname Desertion code 1001 Command length The command is too long too long j Command length The command is too short 1002 too short 4100 Parameter error Operation code or related information is not correct e Unable to execute because the communications writing function is disabled Unable to execute operation command For more information refer to corresponding operation command description in 6 9 Commands and Responses 2203 Operation error Unit error unit change displa
97. 1 K rq Current gutput 6 Input 3 J atl gt p Input 1 tl Li Se 6 4 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max me d 4 to 20 mA 500 Q max 16 be E iT K 0 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max V PT TC 0 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max G l V PT TC N Switched by output type setting Current Voltage Thermocouple K Switched by output type setting P Current Voltage Thermocouple K Ne Platinum resistance thermometer in Platinum resistance thermometer P Note With the E5AR T the power supply voltage must be 100 to 120 V for UL compliance With the E5AR T the power supply voltage must be 100 to 240 V for CE marking compliance 2 2 Using the Terminals E5AR TPRADF E5AR TPRQESMF FLK Auxiliary outputs Auxiliary outputs Relay outputs Transistor outputs 24 VAC DC 100 to 240 VAC s CN 24 VAC DC 100 to 240 VAC COM SUB1 B SUB2 B SUB6 C SUB7 C ZEHA Input power supply depends on model 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC DC no polarity Input power supply depends on model 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC DC no polarity SUB4 B SUB9 C SUB5 B SUB10 C VRYAYATEY ele eleme A A kt 4t 4t i SUB3 B SUB8 C gt 1 1 1 I 1 1 2 OUT4 Voltage output 12 V
98. 110 min b 120 min 120 min 2 2 2 1 Installation Installation Procedure E5AR T E5ER T D If the front of the Controller needs to be watertight attach the enclosed watertight packing If the front of the Controller does not need to be water tight the watertight packing does not need to be attached 2 Insert the Controller into the cutout in the panel 3 Insert the enclosed fittings into the grooves on the top and bottom of the rear case Watertight packing D Watertight packing Gradually tighten the screws in the top and bottom fittings alternating between them so that they are balanced Tighten the screws until the ratchet turns freely i e until the screws are no longer engaged Pulling Out the Normally there is no need to pull out the Controller However it can be Controller pulled out if needed for maintenance purposes 2 0 When pulling out the Controller place a cloth over the screwdriver to prevent scratches and other damage 2 3 I Section 2 Preparations 2 2 Using the Terminals Verify the layout of the terminals labeled beginning from A and from 1 using the markings on the top and sides of the case B Terminal Arrangements E5AR T E5AR TQ4B Auxiliary outputs N N 24 VAC DC 1100 to 240 VAC Relay outputs b m e m eae
99. 2 Input Type 3 Input Type 4 x 1 peDueu A 45 l Appendix A 46 T 2 Td 4 D 6 y 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 VVhen the control mode is changed added channels are initialized in the same vvay as the related parameters for the nput Type parameter A on the previous page This is the upper and lower limit of the sensor setting range For a temperature input this is 4 to 20 mA If this is PV or SP based on the PID Set Automatic Selection Data parameter then setting upper limit setting range x 0 1 if it is DV then setting range x 1 1 Initialized only if the control mode is changed to proportional control Temperature Initializes to upper and lower limits of sensor setting range Analog Initializes to values set for Scaling Display Values 1 and 2 parameters Upper lower limit of sensor setting range and Scaling Display Values 1 and 2 parameters are initialized The default setting is O The corresponding alarm type numbers in all alarm sets are initialized to O If the Closed Floating parameter is set to Float for position proportional control or if the Operation at Potentiometer Input Error parameter is set to Continue this is initialized if the integral time is O If the applicable channel is used for heating cooling control this is 100 otherwise it is 0 Therefore in cascade heatin
100. 2 2 Use this command to move to Protect Level Protect Level is described in 4 1 Setting Levels and Key Operations P 4 2 This command is used in setting area O If used in setting area 1 an operation error will result To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command Slave Function Write start Operation Related address code address code information CRC 16 H00 00 HOS Ho 1 2 2 T The response for a normal end is shown above For information on error responses refer to 7 7 Operation Commands P 7 15 Slave Function Write start Operation Related address code address code information CRC 16 1 2 2 E T Related Description H 01 Manual H 10 Auto 2 3 H 21 Manual 7 9 Commands and Responses I Response Related Description isti All Use this command to select automatic or manual operation This command is used in setting area O If used in setting area 1 an operation error will result To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command When the control mode is set to cascade control perform the Auto Manual operation command for channel 2 Slave Function Write start Operation Related address code address code information CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 The response for a normal end is shown above For information on error responses refer
101. 2 2 Parameter Initialization 8 89 CompoWay F communications 6 32 Modbus communications 7 31 parameters saving 4 4 part names and functions 1 4 PF Key Protection 5 24 8 4 8 5 PF settings 5 20 PF1 Monitor Setting Items 8 91 PF1 Setting 8 89 PF2 Monitor Setting Items 8 91 PF2 Setting 8 89 PID set automatic selection 5 10 PID Set Automatic Selection Data 8 98 PID Set Automatic Selection Hysteresis 8 98 PID Set Number 8 19 PID sets 1 2 5 10 PID Setting Level 8 39 A 19 PID Automatic Selection Range Upper Limit 8 42 position proportional control 4 16 Position proportional Dead Band 4 18 8 27 potentiometer input terminals 2 14 potentiometer input error 10 3 power supply terminals 2 10 precautions operating precautions 4 52 wiring 2 9 Present Value PV Present Set Point 8 9 procedures using two point correction 5 3 program data A 39 Program Editing 8 17 8 44 Program End ON Time 8 97 program end output 5 36 Program Execution Repetition Monitor 8 12 Program Link Destination 8 21 program links 5 31 Program No 8 10 program number 5 40 Program Output Selection 8 68 Program Repetitions 8 21 program repetitions 5 31 Program Setting Level 8 16 A 14 program settings 3 5 4 23 program status communications A 10 Program Time Unit 8 60 Proportional Band 8 40 proportional control 1 10 4 16 Protect Key 1 7 Protect Level 8 3 A 12 protection 5 23 pulling out the Controller 2 3
102. 2 Using the Terminals uu x uuu u u nennen nennen nnns 2 4 Terminal Arranmdermorls az reU Ge Dea rut Eo ves 2 4 Precautions when Wiring 2 9 VU F RQ z c m 2 10 Section 3 Typical Control Examples 2 1 lt olandard COnwol Morc Tm 3 2 PRD DIIC AUIONN eL 3 2 L TR are ee D 3 3 CUNO zan EE E D Dm 3 3 Program Sektlide ui u uu sd DA ic u 3 5 Pell canc EL E E T 3 6 3 2 Coordinated Electric Oven Operation 3 7 PAD ONC AUON M M 3 7 Wing mede C 3 7 CUMING EE EET LO TT 3 8 Xl Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 4 1 Setting Levels and Key Operations Changing Parameters ou a bo eid s cM UE Saving Parameter Settings 42 IIR DS 4 3 Initial Setting Example 44 Setting the Input Type joe MR er OCAQ ce E 4 5 Selecting the Temperature Unit 4 6 Selecting the Control Mode Standard Goblrol Heating Cooling Control
103. 46981000 H 01 enjeA Aeldsiq Buljeos Z c en eA Aejdsiq Buileos V 0c H l ye se OWES yuu Jeddn indul o quur 19M0 ynduy Z c enjeA Ndu 805 na 0 yal ye se owes Z enjeA Aejdsiq Dureog oi 66661 1318444 17 L enjeA Aejdsiq Buileos Vx r 43 ye se yw 4eddn ndu o pwj amo 1101 enjeA 1ndu bulleos 1 34e L0000000 H 0 9 00000000 H Li s lun enyejeduue p 1ndu mal ed 1ndu se ed t indu als G llonuo2 y JO woyoq y uo YOUMS ed Indu y uo Buipuedep indui Bo eue ue 10 6 01 S pue indui 104 p 01 0 312 sBun s ad Indy up L do 0 Do 10000000 00000000 sun e 1ndu v020 ed 1 1ndu se wes S000 d L e indu 8020 v000 1 do 10000000 00000000 sun z 1141 9020 6000 61 AOL 910 81 AG O10 ZL AG OL 91 WW 02 010 SL YW oz o1 v FL M 1 00Hd ZZ L 0 00114 Nnjen 1 uonisod Dumes Aelds e6uel 1olluouu Bunmi AIS HUN od peua inel q Idsiq yuou Sum s Da ed 1 1ndu se 1 do 2 00000000 V0000000 H 61000000 011000000 11 000000 01000000 40000000 H 30000000 40000000 20000000 40000000 V0000000 H 60000000 80000000
104. 5 Bit 0 Bit 1 Code Program Weight 2 Weight 4 Weight 8 Weight 16 Weight 32 Weight 10 Weight 20 number e The program number switches when the input changes from OFF to ON or ON to OFF e For binary coded hexadecimal BCH Program No Bit O Weight 1 to Program No Bit 5 Weight 32 are used For binary coded decimal BCD Program No Bit O Weight 1 to Program No Bit 3 Weight 8 and Program No Bit O Weight 10 to Program No Bit 1 Weight 20 are used C l Ol B O MY O co O O l CO O OT BR O T N e Inputs without program number allocations are treated as OFF e f the program number is 0 or 33 or higher the program number in EEPROM will be used 5 41 I Section 5 Functions and Operations e Run ON When the event input is ON operation is performed and the Run Reset OFF Reset parameter is set to Run This Run ON Reset OFF function creates an operation command that applies to one specific channel e Operation is as follows based on the ON OFF status of the event input e Run OFF e When the event input is ON the Run Reset parameter is set to Reset ON Reset This Run OFF Reset ON function creates an operation command that applies to all channels for coordinated operation and one specific channel for independent control e Operation is as follows based on the ON OFF status of the event input Auto OFF e VVhen the even
105. 99999 4 AL1L Alarm Set 4 Alarm Lower Limit 1 ti 19999 to 99999 y E3 P Alarm Set 4 Alarm Lower Limit 4 19999 to 99999 ca 8 36 CH Display Alarm Setting Level CH n Setting Alarm Set Alarm Value 1 Alarm Set Alarm Value 2 Alarm Set Alarm Value 3 Alarm Set Alarm Value 4 f e Setting 8 7 Alarm Set Setting Level L AL KARL Alarm function enabled The alarm set number for which display settings are to be made is selected using this parameter The Display Alarm Setting Level parameter is used to select the alarm set number for which display settings are to be made Up to 4 alarm sets alarm set numbers 1 to 4 to which the alarm values and upper lovver alarm limits have been registered can be used Setting range Unit Default value Gem Note The selected and executed alarm set number 1to4 Related Parameters Alarm Set Number Program Setting Level P 8 20 x E oa x a Pme Lec x e d Alarm function enabled The alarm values for alarms 1 to 4 can be registered for each alarm set The Alarm Set 1 to 4 Alarm Value 1 to 4 parameters are used to set the alarm values These parameters can be set when the Alarm Type parameter
106. Ada Level CAA Level T Pid Level Level i key less key less key less key less key less _ key less key less I than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s i key less than 1 5 I L 1s 3s or more or more Control stops Em I Input Initial gt Control Initial Control Initial Display Communications Setting Setting Setting ei Setting Adjustment Setting I Level Level ET J 2 Level eve Level Level D key key key key key less than 1 s less than 1 s less than 1 s less than 1 s less than 1 s key less than 1s L 04 i mas j dx E Au rU p p 5 m a s OS a TARI lm MEL wama CO Control in progress CO Control stopped ODSL MV Display Selection MV heating O or MV cooling C O BART Bar Graph Display Item See note 1 RET Display Auto return Time 0 99 0 Display auto return disabled D REF Display Refresh Period OFF 05 11 21 or MONL Monitor Item Level Setting See note 2 SC M Start Display Scan at Power ON OFF or ON SC T Display Scan Period 10 99 Note 1 OFF 2 Disabled OFF Elapsed program time percentage PRG T Input Initial Setting Level L O Elapsed segment time percentage SEG T Contr
107. Application Traditionally three programmable temperature Controllers were required to control electric ovens in three zones With the E5AR T ER T however only one Controller is required for coordinated operation as long as the same program is used Here the E5AR TCCESMWW FLK is used Channel 1 Program SP Broken line program Time IN1 IN2 IN3 9 Power Controller Power Controller A O O Power Controller A S lo B Wiring Sensor 3 100 to 240V AC p opb TE AN o H jJ H l l T T LILHS Power Controller 1415 410 20 mA 6 6 Sensor HL OL E 5 2 T11 Nje m ye Bou 11 T la RES RN ae 4 Heater N3 N 5 6 OUT1IOUT i 6 Ec Power Controller sengol 4 to 20 mA ieee A G3PX Heater Power Controller 4 to 20 mA I Section 3 Typical Control Examples M Settings Setting Procedure Input initial Setting Level Move to Advanced Function Setting Level cer 1 L Number of Enabled Channels al 3 8 Inputs 1 2 and 3 are set for type K thermocouples The settings for input 1 are shown below The same settings are used for inputs 2 and 3 NENNEN i NEN Input 1 type switch Same f
108. BIA Buuojuoui pue Dunes 104 9Je H Aq pexijeud senj eA 4o uoul um s uonipuot veel V100 NO 49Mog ye uonejedO 0061 0000 feidsig n JejeureJeg sseippy sseippv zum 9IqeueA Eu n 1 I A 7 Bunes onuo uoisuedx3 A 37 Appendix P 3 r 3 Li K 1 UOHEIA Q jJuewebpnr 001 07001 01 070 83600000 O 00000000 H uoneyoxz jv Avesodwel ze 0100 002 I 0709 0 0 S v3100000 H 91 22000000 AN n r 2221 1100 4 tnd gt 6 6 01 170 9000000 H 01 L0000000 H siseJejs H IV OZEL 0100 OOF 01 170 79000000 H 01 0000000 urec 1 3121 4000 uowsod Sumas an Lssesppy si een m 1 NO 10000000 H uonounj 1u unsnipy pm 440 0 440 00000000 H 10045 eouequnisid 2821 6100 enunuo2 L0000000 H 10413 1104 440 doiS 00000000 H 1e uonejedO 0661 8100 1 NO 10000000 H 440 0 440 00000000 H NNY 18 ssepdung 9221 2100 co 01 ea A 38 Setting Lists Owl 3 9 84615 owl wesbold 1 18S 9 yeubls oul wesboldg Hun eun o Buipio55v 1 yeuBis uuil se 5 y eje BulMOllO eu 18S Z 6461 owl wesboldg 1 669 66 01 070070 65660000 01 00000000 H 10 69766 01 0070 69660000 01 00000000 H
109. CH2 Program output 2 38 1 CH2 Program output 3 39 1 CH2 Program output 4 40 1 CH2 Program output 5 41 1 CH2 Program output 6 42 1 43 1 44 1 45 1 46 1 2 3 4 2772 N AN cc loc ooo OI QO N O co O to 4 CH2 Program output 7 43 CH2 Program output 8 44 CH2 Program output 9 45 CH2 Program output 10 46 1 Similarly CH3 47 to 65 CHA 66 to 84 8 67 I Section 8 Parameters Program Output Selection n Setting 8 68 1 The data that is output depends on the setting of the Program Output Selection parameter and will be program output 1 to 10 segment output 1 to 10 segment number output 1 to 6 or time signal output 1 to 6 2 On a Controller with more than one input assignment data can be set for channels 2 and higher for the number of supported channels U ALM output will be OR output of alarm functions 1 to 4 of all channels Related Information 4 11 Using Auxiliary Outputs P 4 37 Related Parameters Program Output Selection Control Initial Setting 2 Level Program Output assigned to Auxiliary Output e This parameter is used to set what is output when Program Output is selected for the Auxiliary Output Assignment parameter Setting range Unit Default value S
110. Correction 1 after adjustment Temperature e g 25 0 C Room temperature Near SP indicated on e g 25 C e g 550 C thermometer B Figure 2 Two Point Correction The following example for a K typing input 1 from 200 to 1300 C The temperature of the object is obtained At room temperature B 25 C the Controller reading is A 40 0 C Near the SP B 550 C the Controller reading is A 500 0 C e n this case the input correction values are obtained as follows Input Value 1 for Input Correction Controller reading A 40 0 C Input Correction 1 Temperature of object B Controller reading A 25 40 15 00 C Input Value 2 for Input Correction Controller reading A 500 0 C Input Correction 2 Temperature of object B Controller reading A 550 500 50 00 C 5 1 Input Adjustment Functions I B First Order Lag Operation First Order La e A fir rder ration serves as a filter for an inout For a Operation 1 Enabled st orde ag Ope p Controller with more than one input the operation is set for each of inputs 1 to 4 in the First Order Lag Operation 1 to 4 parameters To use a first order lag set the First Order Lag Operation Enabled parameter to ON the default setting is OFF The First Order Lag Operation Time Constant parameter must also be set and it is set so that the result of t
111. Current E N Ve bd r m gt 7L Hour Minute s l Output 3 Type Minute Second MMSS SBO 10 Auxiliary MAV 4 Movement I3 T Input 3 Type i 0 to 20 mA 0 4 to 20 mA 1 ye Minute Second Decisecond MMSSD Output 10 Assignment Ame 4 Enabled 0 to 19 04 Linear Current E F PR Step Time Rate of Rise Programming SOL 7 B Output 4 Type Step time TIME I H 0 to 20 mA 0 4 to 20 mA 1 Rate of rise programming PR Program 0 um de Bo a I3DU 1 t3T t Unit Ve Segment Outpu quare Roo SDU Inpu 5 mv PRU Time Unit of Ramp Rate Segment number ouput SGN OFF ON G SL H SP U Limit 1 C F SL H Pus uu H 10 hours 10H Time Signal TSG SQR 4 Extraction of 13005 7 2 Hour H Minute M Second 5 TRH 1 ze Square Root 4 Enabled Ve PVST PV Start Transfer Output 1 Upper A T opus Wee SP Start SP H E SCL 1 Straight line 0 to 19 nn 5P Ey s fae nr en Tisi de S RAO 1 Enabled tart time priority PV Transfer Output 1 Lower OFF ON ET ABA RSTM Operation at Reset Limit SCL 2 Straight line elt 4DU Input 4 Temperature Units Stop control STOP TRH 2 Approximation 2 Enabled T ZC ole 2 Fixed control FSP Transfer Output 2 Upper OFF ON ce 1 SPSL Set Point Selection nu FNC 1 Broken line Pat Present set point PSP JE Approximation 1 Enabled INP 1 PSP Present value PV Transfer Output 2 Lower ORION Scaling Input Value 1 a
112. D cr A Im im ia This level contains parameters for straight line and broken line approximation settings These parameters only appear if enabled in Control Initial Setting 2 Level Level Changes at Startup Up To Approximation Setting Level Povver ON Adiustment Level Eruz key less than 1 s key less than1s Approximation Setting Never EEE Program Setting level key less than1s Time Signal Setting Level key less than 1 s Wm GD OF EE Adjustment 2 1 evel 1222 key less than 1 s key less than 1 s PID Setting 7 Level LPzdJ Okey Weve ELA Control in progress Parameter Changes within Approximation Setting Level 11 1 Straight line Approximation 1 Input 1 1 999 9 999 SI2 1 Straight line Approximation 1 Input 2 1 999 9 999 SO2 1 Straight line Approximation 1 Output 2 1 999 9 999 11 2 Straight line Approximation 2 Input 1 1 999 9 999 SI2 2 Straight line Approximation 2 Input 2 1 999 9 999 SO1 2 Straight line Approximation 2 Output 1 1 999 9 999 502 2 Straight line Approximation 2 Output 2 1 999 9 999 8 46 FIO1 1 Broken line Approximation 1 Input 1 1 999 9 999 4 F
113. FF OFF ON c l Vie ESET End Condition DE ESEE RST CONT FST A EZ WT M Wait Mode PF2 PF2 Setting 5624 SEND ALL 22 ayr P ON Operation at Povver On PVTR PV Tracking CONT RST MANU RUN are OFF ON SNC Sensor Induction Noise Reduction 50Hz 60Hz 2 rm ca 2 voc MANT Manual Output Method HOLD INIT MANI Manual MV Initial Value Standard Type 5 0 to 105 0 Heating cooling 105 0 to 105 0 GP ALSP Alarm SP Selection ORLM psp PSP TSP MV Change Rate Limit Mode Mode 0 0 Mode 1 1 T Pend F End ON Time AT G AT Calculated Gain 2 251 ONJO O to 10 0 lb i0 100 SPTR SP Tracking AT H AT Hysteresis OFF ON 0 1 to 9 9 PIDI PID Set Automatic PF1 PF1 Setting AMOV al Move to Advanced Function Setting Level 1999 to 9999 Temperature Lower limit of sensor Setting range to upper limit of sensor Setting range Larger of 19999 and display value equivalent to input lower limit to smaller of 99999 and display value equivalent to input upper limit Analog PF1 Monitor Setting Item 2 2 JX K o o A 50 Password 169 less than 1 second PF1 5 PF1 Monitor Setting Item 5 22 onitor Setting Item 1 PFE25 PF2 Monitor Setting Item 5 2 ri CH N Number of Enabled Cha
114. Function Write start Operation Related Command address code address code information CRC 16 x oe o Hoo HA 1 1 2 2 Related AT Cancel h NENNEN NNNM 3 4 ll T information C AT Cancel AT Cancel A AT Cancel This command cancels AT This command is used in setting area O An operating error will occur if it is used in setting area 1 An operation error will also occur in the following cases e f the Run Reset parameter is set to Reset for the specified channel e f the Auto Manual parameter is set to Manual for the specified channel To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command Slave Function Writestart Operation Related Response address code address code information CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 The response for a normal end is shown above For information on error responses refer to 7 7 Operation Commands P 7 15 B Write Mode Slave Function Write start Operation Related Command address code address code information 16 2 2 1 1 2 Related 5 Description information H 00 Backup Mode H 01 RAM Write Mode This command is used to select the Backup Mode or RAM Write Mode The default setting is Backup Mode This command can be used in both setting area O and setting area 1 7 27 Section 7 Modbus Communications Response E Save RAM Data 7 28 To use this command t
115. I 1 I 2 7 8 If the PID Set Automatic Selection Data parameter is set to DV the DV used when performing auto select will be inverted For more information on the PID Set Automatic Selection parameter refer to 5 2 Control Functions P 5 8 4 13 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 4 Selecting the Temperature Unit When the input type is set to a temperature input input from a thermocouple or a platinum resistance thermometer either C or F can be selected for the temperature unit When using a Controller with more than one input set the temperature unit separately for each input inputs 2 to 4 according to the number of inputs Selecting C 1 Hold the Key down for at least 3 seconds to move from the Operation Level to the Input Initial Setting Level 2 Press the Key to select lt fat Input 1 Temperature Units Select C or F with the A and 21 Keys L C RIPE 3 Hold the Key down for at least 1 second to return to the Operation Level 4 6 Selecting the Control Mode I 4 6 Selecting the Control Mode The control mode allows various types of control to be performed The control mode is set to standard control by default M Standard Contr
116. JUaWBaS H cc jJuewBbes weibold 008S PHO SEE luloq 18S JUaWBaS H2 Lg juawBes weibold 00rS HO 0 7 7 luloq 18S JUaWBaS H2 Og 1ueuiBeg wepold 000S LIL O O H JUIOd 18S JUaWBaS H 61 lu ulB s wesboldg 0007 vd uonisod ain sseuppy ed e qeueA A 42 Setting Lists enj eA Aejdsip y se ewes eui 51 ed A L p sn slu u6 s Jo JOQUINN Z Wesbolg 0000 HO HO HO 63 HO p sn 5140 se eujes eui si eu L H Jo Jequunw Z Wesbolg 0000 H H vd OL 1ndino juewWbEeS ze juawbes urej604gd 6108 luloq 18S 1u u65 s ss ss ed ajqeue aNIeA 199 uu melee Kelds q Joyuou Bumes Ke dsiq zm J9jouJeJegd IDEM UV uiod 6010 ynejeq quay 4 Aemodwog A 43 Added channels initialized ings A Parameters that are initialized when the settings of related parameters are changed are listed in the Related parameter column ing Parameter Sett Meaning of Symbols O Initialized Not initialized Appendix Initialization Due to Chang Buiooo Duneep prepueis enjeA enu AN enuen pueg pee Ad sjeuueu pejqeu3 jo 1equinN wa ejdsiq udeic jeg uonosjes e dsiq AW 8 0 did 19407 AW 8 01 did 1117 dd AW eui e b lu p 01 189 WHEY y 01 Yu 19407 uey p 01 38S WHEY y quur eddy Wey p
117. Lr ale Zu n 2 o X ile 2 X rm Ls P4 E3 s 2 r3 22 22 E can d I 2 us T ca t3 2 o 2 2 E r1 hd Lc Es 25 lt 216 2 A es A lt d E X rA r1 cae C R lt A 2 X Cre ra ica E SE Li c Sor AT AT Execute Cancel OFF 0 to 8 CMWT Communi cations Writing OFF ON SPMD SP Mode PSP RSP FSP FSP Fixed SP SP Lower Limit to SP Upper Limit C SC Cooling Coefficient 0 01 to 99 99 C DB Dead Band 19 99 to 99 99 OF R Manual Reset Value 0 0 to 100 0 PVS Hysteresis Heating 0 01 to 99 99 CHYS Hysteresis Cooling 0 01 to 99 99 CP Control Period Heating 0 2 to 99 0 C CP Control Period Cooling 0 2 to 99 0 DB Position Proportional Dead Band 0 1 to 10 0 OC H Open Close Hysteresis 0 1 to 20 0 STB Standby Time 0 00 to 99 59 x Z ce lt x d ES E AES E Br I 9 4 c3 EM 4 E T D Lf nd Tul cl E3 Fd MV R MV at Reset 5 0 to 105 0 2 Standard Model 1 MV E MV at PV Error 5 0 to 105 0 Standard Model 1 ORL MV Change Rate Limit Heating 0 0 to 100 0 CORL MV Change Rate Limit Cooling 0 00 to 100 0
118. M Operating Programs Using Multiple Channels e Models with Two Independent operation or coordinated operation can be used when 2 Inputs channel standard control or 2 channel heating cooling control is selected Note Multi channel program operation is not possible if heating cooling control is selected for a model with two outputs 1 Independent The following table shows the number of programs if the Independent Operation Operation Coordinated Operation parameter is set to Independent Operation Channel 1 Channel 2 Number of segments Number of Setting Number of Setting programs range programs range 1 to 16 16 1 to 16 1 to 10 10 1 to 10 16 10 ws s pes I Section 5 Functions and Operations 2 Coordinated Operation e Models with Four Inputs Coordinated operation based on channel 1 is possible when the Independent Operation Coordi nated Operation parameter is set to Coordinated Operation The program will be the same for both channel 1 and channel 2 1 Present Set Point or PV Channel SP offset As shown in the diagram on the right coordinated operation is enabled when the channel 1 program pattern is input to the channel 2 remote SP Temperature SP Offset The present SP or the PV can be set as the program pattern from oo channel 1 If the PV is set and channel 1 has an input error an RSP input error will occur for channel 2 An offset can be s
119. None even or odd CRC 16 Cyclical Redundancy Check Communications buffer Communications O to 99 ms response send wait time Default 20 ms Note Default settings are shaded 7 2 7 1 Communications Method I B Transfer Protocol The host computer sends a command frame and the EBAR T ER T returns a response frame based on the contents of the command frame One response frame is sent in response to one command frame Host computer E5AR ER T The exchange of the command frame and response frame is described below After a receiving a response from the Controller have the host computer wait at least 5 ms before sending the next command When writing multiple sets of parameters in a row such as when writing to the variable area or performing a compound write control characteristics may be affected Observe the following points Write a maximum of three parameters at at time 5 ms min 7 3 I Section 7 Modbus Communications 7 2 Frames Commands from the host computer and responses from the E5AR T ER T take the form of frames that conform to the Modbus RTU protocol The data included in command frames and response frames is described in this section In the following descriptions an H before a numeric value for example H 02 indicates that the value is a hexadecimal number Numbers or letters enclosed in quotation marks for example 00 are ASCII characters E Command Frames 7 4
120. OFF Manual ON Channel 1 Program SP OFF Remote SP ON Channel 1 Remote SP OFF Fixed SP ON Channel 1 Program SP OFF Fixed SP ON aa u 0 s E r emm E Gemma p Channel 2 Back Channel 3 Back x Channel 4 Back Communications e When the event input is ON parameters can be written using Writing OFF ON communications e The Communications Write OFF ON function creates an operation command that applies to all channels V L I no ju Lr J ju w Mi e Operation is as described below based on the ON OFF status of the event input 5 39 I Section 5 Functions and Operations Lo Communications Writing OFF Communications Writing ON Program Number The program number can be specified using the ON OFF status of event inputs e This program number function creates an operation command that applies to all channels for coordinated operation and one specific channel for independent control e This function is enabled only during a reset The following table shows the operation based on the ON OFF status of event inputs Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 0 Bit 1 Code Program Weight 2 Weight 4 Weight 8 Weight 16 Weight 32 Weight 10 Weight 20 number Or or Juss 9 77 5 40 5 8 Using Event Inputs I Bit 0 7 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit
121. Output 1 Relay relay Pulse voltage pulse voltage current Current current b Output 2 Relay relay Pulse voltage pulse voltage current Current current Auxiliary outputs None 4 relay outputs SPST NO common 2 transistor outputs 10 transistor outputs CD Optional function 1 None Blank RS 485 communications 8 Optional function 2 None 4 event inputs 8 event inputs 9 Input 1 Multi input 2 event inputs Multi input FB potentiometer input Multi input multi input 0 Input 2 Multi input multi input W 0 Communications method None CompoWay F FLK The above information on the model number structure is based on functionality Models may not actually be available for all possible combinations of features Please check the catalog for availability before ordering l Section 1 Overview Section 2 Preparations o c ho Q o Lum 2 1 2 2 2 2 Using the Terminals 2 4 I Section 2 Preparations 2 1 Installation M Dimensions E5AR T B installation Panel Cutout Dimensions E5AR T 9295 U
122. PV Dead Band 8 99 PV Decimal Point Display 8 53 PV Start 8 61 PV start 5 37 PV Tracking 8 100 RAM Write Mode 8 92 ramp back 4 42 rate of rise programming 5 28 ratings A 2 reading monitor values CompoWay F communications 6 17 Modbus communications 7 20 set values CompoWay F communications 6 18 Modbus communications 7 21 Remaining Segment Time Monitor 8 12 Remaining Standby Time Monitor 8 12 Remote SP Lower Limit 8 52 Remote SP Monitor 8 13 Remote SP Upper Limit 8 52 resetting operation 4 41 resistance thermometer calibration 9 10 reverse operation 4 20 reverse operation heating 1 10 RS 485 2 16 RSP input error 10 3 RSP operation indicator 1 6 RST operation indicator 1 6 Run Reset 8 15 CompoWay F communications 6 26 Modbus communications 7 25 Run Reset Key 1 7 S Save RAM Data CompoWay F communications 6 30 Modbus communications 7 28 scaling 4 11 Scaling Display Values 8 51 Scaling Input Values 8 51 Segment Editing 8 18 segment number output 5 36 Segment Output 8 19 segment outputs 5 34 Segment Rate of Rise 8 18 Segment Set Point 4 24 Segment Time 4 24 8 18 Sensor Induction Noise Reduction 8 54 sensor input setting ranges A 4 Set Point Offset 8 32 Set Point Selection 8 62 Set Value Compound Write CompoWay F communications 6 23 set values 4 6 reading CompoWay F communications 6 18 Modbus communications 7 21 writing CompoWay F communications 6 21 Modbus communic
123. Refer to 6 9 Commands and Responses P 6 17 for more information Values read and written to a variable area are expressed in hexadecimal and disregard the decimal point Negative values are expressed as a two s complements Example D 105 0 H 0000041A This variable is an 8 digit number in hexadecimal Negative values are expressed as a two s complement The decimal is disregarded If the PV of the EBAR T ER T is 105 0 it will be read as H 0000041A 105 0 1050 H 00000414 Read write data will be the same as display values when reading or writing data using the program time unit For example if the display value is 99 59 the read write data will be H 00009959 I Section 6 CompoWay F Communications 6 5 Read from Variable Area Read from a variable area by setting the required data in the following FINS mini command text format FINS mini Command Text Variable MRC SRC type Read start address Bit position Number of elements A n ee xx 2 2 2 4 2 0001 to 0019 Data name Description Specify the Read from Variable Area FINS mini MRC SRC command Variable type Specify the variable type Read start address Specify the first address to read Bit position Not used on the E5AR T ER T Specify 00 donero demene Specify the number of variables to read max of 25 H 19 Not needed for a compound read FINS mini Response Text Response code MRC SRC MRES SRES Read data e a T 1 2 2 4 Number
124. SBO 10 Auxiliary Output 10 Assignment 0 to 84 HRL 4 Transfer Output 4 PSOT Program Output Selection MAV 1 Movement Average 1 Enabled OFF or ON Movement Average 4 arr Enabled OFF or ON SQR 1 Extraction of Square Root 1 Enabled OFF or ON Root 4 Enabled OFF or ON SCL1 Straight line Approximation 1 Enabled OFF or ON SCL2 Straight line Approximation 2 Enabled OFF or ON Wi RENCHE seri Broken line Approximation 1 Enabled OFF or ON Output segment SGO Lower Limit Output Segment Number SGN or Time signal TSG LAG 1 First Order Lag Operation 1 Enabled OFF or ON 11 LAG 4 First Order Lag Operation 624 Enabled OFF or ON TRH 1 Transfer Output 1 Upper Limit CALB Motor Calibration OFF or ON MOT Travel Time 1 to 999 8 63 l Section 8 Parameters Control Transfer Output Assignment nu 1 to 4 pee e Use this parameter to assign output content to outputs Default Setting range e value Disable 0 Setting CH1 7 output heating or open for control output 1 CH1 control output cooling or close for control output 2 CH1 disable 3 CH1 present set point 4 CH1 PV 5 CH1 control output heating or open for transfer output 6 CH1 control output cooling or close for transfer output 7 CH1 valve opening 8 CH2 con
125. SUBe C 4 1 5 100 to 240 VAC SUB1 B SUBe C I ys 1 0 J 1 r SUB2 B SUB7 C SUB2 B SUB7 C I 2 1 I Input power supply 2 SUB3 B SUB8 C 4 SUB3 B SUB8 C lt depends on model n 100 to 240 VAC or 24 4 l SUB4 B SUB9 C 3 6 b 5 84 SUB9 C VAC DC no polarity 5 SUB5 B SUB10 C X LA J SUB5 B SUB10 C X 6 n T eae B LEA a B N 3 i m Rs 49 C 1 Ia Event inputs D E _ OUT Event inputs I Current output AG 2 21 I Voltage output 12 V 21 mA un 1 sea mane soanar HG B eT T eve evo AO 5 Az Z Al I Switched by output 4 i3 EV4 E Evs D FAS 3 Voltage autput io v EV4 E EV8 D type setting 1 TA 2 0 y j EVS E EV9 D Face 4 Sud cua 2557 EV6 E EV10 D e 5 4 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max E EV6 E EV10 D 2 4 j F 0 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max 0 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max p 6 T Switched by output type setting C Switched by output type setting J PT TN t LI 1 I o OUT4 D D OUT4 129 Current output 2 Input 2 K LOL e Voltage output 12 V 21 mA 4 4 to 20 mA 500 max Input 4 4 fl 3 3 0 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max l leek ee 3 TT e Switched by output 10 imi Voltage output 12 V type setting B 21 mA or 5 Input 1 K I OUT3 ag T l I Current output Input
126. Signal Setting and Approximation Levels were changed the most time would be required which is about 5 seconds Slave Function Write start Operation Related address code address code information CRC 16 H00 H00 04 1 1 2 2 2 The response for a normal end is shown above For information on error responses refer to 7 7 Operation Commands P 7 15 Slave Function Write start Operation Related address code address code information CRC 16 H00 H00 05 H00 1 1 2 2 2 This command writes the set values in the Operation and Adjustment Levels to EEPROM Operation and Adjustment Levels are described in 4 1 Setting Levels and Key Operations P 4 2 This command can be used in both setting area O and setting area 1 To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command 7 9 Commands and Responses I Hesponse B Software Reset Response Slave Function Write start Operation Related address code address code information CRC 16 HOO H05 H O0 1 1 2 2 2 The response for a normal end is shown above For information on error responses refer to 7 7 Operation Commands P 7 15 Slave Function Write start Operation Related address code address code information CRC 16 HOO H06 H O0 1 1 2 2 2 A software reset causes the same operation as turning the power OFF and ON This command can be used in both setting area O and setting area
127. T provides multi outputs that allow selection of pulse voltage outputs or linear current outputs Select the output type in the Output Type parameter for each output The following are multi outputs output 1 of the EBAR TQI I and E5ER TQI IL JL and outputs 1 and 3 of the 17 e A linear current output can be set to 4 to 20 mA or to 20 mA in the Linear Current Output Type parameter Output Type 114 no yy ju w E Bae e The pulse voltage output is 12 VDC 40 mA Output Type for multi outputs Pulse voltage output Linear Current Output Type Linear current output 01020 Im E Output Assignments The type of data that is output from each output be assigned On Controllers with more than one input the data assignments can also be set for channels 2 and higher for the number of supported channels Outputs Control Transfer Output Assignments Channel 1 Channel 1 Control Output Heating Channel 1 Control Output Cooling 22 Channel Present Set Poit Channel 1 Present Value PV gy Channel 1 MV Heating Channel 1 MV Cooling 7 Channel 1 Valve Opening 8 Channel 2 Control Output Heating Channel 2 Control O
128. Thermocouple Platinum resistance thermometer E5AR TC4B 24 VAC DC 1100 to 240 VAC Auxiliary outputs x Relay outputs Q 10 B I 2 SUB1 Input power supply depends on model a SUB2 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC DC no polarity COM SUB3 SUB4 OUT2 Current output 4 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max 0 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max 3 Switched by output type setting OUT1 lt 6 Current output 4 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max 6 LF 0 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max Switched by output type setting Current Voltage Thermocouple a Platinum resistance thermometer J E5AR TC43B FLK 100 to 240 VAC B C D El Auxiliary outputs N m7 Relay outputs P AN 6 B 2 7 com I 1 i 2 SUB1 1 1 a B suB2 5 4 COM 6 m Go SUB3 NE T x 1 1 1 Lo SU B4 I nd 16 2 1 3 rm aif T 1 1 1 i al 6 rJ GIH lI J K Bajat D Tf Event inputs E RS 485 EVT race OUT2 A 2 EV2 Current output 4 to 20 mA 500 max 3 3 0 to 20 mA DC 500 max ol I
129. Unit Heating 0 0 to 105 0 cooling Related Parameters Control Mode Control Initial Setting Level P 8 58 Position proportional Control Model This parameter monitors the amount of valve opening during operation e This parameter monitors the amount of valve opening during position proportional control e A potentiometer can be connected and the Motor Calibration parameter can be executed to monitor the amount of valve opening Control Monitor range Unit Position propor 10 0 to 110 0 tional Related Parameters Control Mode Control Initial Setting Level P 8 58 Motor Calibration Control Initial Setting 2 Level P 8 72 CH Run Reset CH Auto Manual Ol if Operation p Operation 8 3 Operation Level J m e Use this parameter to start and stop program operation The default setting is 5 Reset Press the A and zi Keys to select Run or 5E Reset When Reset is selected the RST indicator will light Related Information 4 12 Starting and Stopping Operation P 4 41 Related Parameters PF1 Setting and PF2 Setting Advanced Function Setting Level P 8 89 PF1 setting z Auto Manual and PF2 setting z Auto Manual e Use this parameter to select Auto or Manual Mode The default setting is Fuz a Auto Press the and Keys to
130. a normal end is shown above For the response codes refer to 6 7 Operation Commands P 6 13 Instruction Related MRC SRC code information Cre Le le A software reset causes the same operation as turning the power OFF and ON This command can be used in both setting area O and setting area 1 To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command MRC SRC Response code Response Codes The response for a normal end is shown above For the response codes refer to 6 7 Operation Commands P 6 13 E Move to Setting Area 1 6 30 Instruction Related MRC SRC code information Use this command to move to setting area 1 6 9 Commands and Responses I Response The command is used in setting area 0 Nothing happens if the command is used in setting area 1 If the command is used when the Initial Setting Protection parameter is set to 2 Disable Move to Input Initial Setting Level an operation error will occur To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command MRC SRC Response code Hesponse Codes The response for a normal end is shown above For the response codes refer to 6 7 Operation Commands P 6 13 B Move to Protect Level Response B Auto Manual Instruction Related MRC SRC code information Use this command to move to Protect Level Protect
131. another output connect the output as explained in step 2 and repeat steps 3 to 7 8 Turn OFF the power to quit Calibration Mode 9 13 I Section 9 User Calibration 9 7 Inspecting Indicator Accuracy e After calibrating an input always inspect the indicator accuracy to verify that the input was calibrated correctly Operate the E5AR T ER T in the PV SP state e Check the indicator at three points the upper limit lower limit and mid range limit of the indicator range M Thermocouples Preparations Connect the required devices as shown below Be sure to connect the E5AR T ER T to the cold junction compensator using the compensating leads that you intend to use for the thermocouple E5AR T ER T Input power Cold junction compensator supply Compensating leads Operation Make sure that the cold junction compensator is at O C and set the SIV output to the voltage that is equivalent to the inspection value startup power If the cold junction compensating system uses an external setting a cold junction compensator and compensating leads are not needed B Resistance Thermometers Preparations Connect the required devices as shown below ESAR T ER T m Input power supply L resistance Operation Set the 6 dial resistance box to the resistance that is equivalent to the inspection value 9 7 Inspecting Indicator Accuracy I M Analog Inputs Preparations Connect the required devices as
132. code address elements CRC 16 LE ae ae 1 1 Address Monitor value Monitor value value Monitor value Address Data name Data name PV 8 404 PV Present Set Point H 8406 Present Set Point 3 l H 0404 H 0406 Monitor Monitor Alarm Set Number H 8410 Alarm Set Number Monitor D PV HC44 Present Set Point H C406 m7 C Point 4 H 040C H 040E H 0410 H 4404 H 4406 H A40A PID Set Number H C40A PID Set Number Monitor Monitor HCA0C Program Status H C40E Program Status Alarm Set Number H C410 Alarm Set Number Monitor Monitor This command is used to read the present values status and other monitor values The number of elements can be set from H 0004 to 006A 4 to 106 to allow reading monitor values in consecutive addresses H 440C H 440E H 4410 When used in setting area 1 the response for the present value and internal SP will be O and the response for the status will be as indicated in the notes in E5LIH T Status Communications Appendix Setting Lists P A 8 Slave Function Byte Read data Response address code count Data 1 Data 1 o ep Desspten ta pit 1 1 1 Number of elements x 2 bytes Data n Data n CRC 16 The response for a normal end is shown above For information on error responses refer to 7 5 Read from Variable Area P 7 11 7 20 7 9 Commands and Responses I M Reading Set Values Slave Function Read start Number of address code address eleme
133. code calculated from the slave address through the end of the data For the calculation method refer to Example of CRC 16 Calculation in 7 2 Frames P 7 4 CRC 16 7 16 7 7 Operation Commands Response Codes Function Error code code H Variable data error Operation error H 02 03 04 Command Response Example Cause Variable The variable address is not H 0000 address error Error in written data e Incorrect operation code or related information The operating status does not permit writing e The communications writing func tion is disabled The command will be received even if the communica tions writing function is disabled e Cannot process See description of commands in 7 9 Commands and Responses P 7 20 e Unit error unit change display unit error or EEPROM error p Normal end No error Operation Command to Channel 2 slave address H 01 Channel 2 Operation Command Address H 0000 Written data H 0111 Reset command to channel 2 Command CRC 16 Response 0000 01 11 I Section 7 Modbus Communications 7 8 Setting Areas 7 18 The E5AR T ER T has two setting areas for communications Setting area O and setting area 1 In setting area 0 operation continues Setting area 0 makes it possible to perform operations that require operation to be in progress such as reading the PV writing an SP and starting resetting operation Run Heset as well as o
134. communications FINS mini Command Text and FINS mini Response Text are set as described in this section 6 Command Text FINS mini Command Text consists of a main request code MRC and a sub request code SRC followed by the required data FINS mini STX Node No Sub address SID command text ETX BCC Cix MR SRO Data Bytes 2 2 Response Text FINS mini Response Text consists of the MRC and SRC followed by a main response code MRES and sub response code SRES and then the required data FINS mini STX Node No Sub address End code Response text ETX BCC wl MRC 980 MRES SRES Data Bytes 2 2 2 2 If the specified FINS mini command was not successfully executed the response will contain only the MRC SRC MRES and SRES List of FINS mini Commands for CompoWay F Read from Variable Area Heads monitor values or set values Write to Variable Area Writes set values Composite Read from Variable Area Reads multiple monitor values or set values Composite Write to Variable Area Writes multiple set values Reads in order the contents of addresses speci 01 10 Composite Registration Read fied for the Composite Read Registration com mand T I Specifies the addresses to be read for the Com posite Read from Variable Area command az ini Reads the contents of the registration for the Composite Read from Variable Area command Controller Attribut
135. directly exposed to sunlight Locations subject to strong shocks or vibration Locations where water or oil may splatter on the Digital Controller Locations directly exposed to radiant heat from heating equipment Locations subject to sudden or extreme changes of temperature 15 Do not use paint thinner or similar chemical to clean with Use standard grade VI alcohol Precautions for Correct Use Service Life Use the product within the following temperature and humidity ranges Temperature 10 to 55 C no icing or condensation Humidity 25 to 85 When the product is installed inside a control panel make sure that the temperature around the product not the temperature around the control panel does not exceed 55 C The service life of this product and similar electronic devices is determined not only by the number of switching operations of relays but also by the service life of internal electronic components Component service life is affected by the ambient temperature the higher the temperature becomes the shorter the service life becomes and the lower the temperature becomes the longer the service life becomes Therefore the service life can be extended by lowering the temperature of the product Be sure to install the product according to the specified conditions Otherwise the heat generated by the product will cause the internal temperature to rise short ening the service life If necessary cool the
136. enable or disable disturbance overshoot adjustment A Setting range Unit Default value e 22 Disabled BE n Enabled ma arr Disabled Setting Related Information Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment in 5 2 Control Functions P 5 13 8 104 Section 9 User Calibration 9 1 Parameters for User Calibration 9 2 9 2 USePOalIBIalloli seca uyu a uyaq D bil 9 4 9 3 Thermocouple Input Calibration 9 5 9 4 Analog Input Calibration 9 8 9 5 Resistance Thermometer Calibration 9 10 9 6 Output Calibration 9 12 9 7 Inspecting Indicator Accuracy 9 14 2 O x o 0 5 I Section 9 User Calibration 9 1 Parameters for User Calibration e To perform user calibration enter 1201 for the Move to Calibration Level parameter in the Advanced Function Setting Level The Controller will enter Calibration Mode and A d will be displayed on the display e f the Move to Calibration Level parameter does not appear set the Initial Setting Protection parameter to 0 in the Protect Level and then move to Advanced Function Setting Level e Calibration is ended by turning OFF the power e The parameters for input calibration are shown below The las
137. exceed the specifications specifications e For RS 485 the total maximum length is 500 m Another Controller has the same unit number Make sure each unit number is set only once Noise is corrupting the communications data e Separate the communications cable from the noise source 2 Use shielded communications cables S Use an optical interface O e Have the program resend the command when a problem is detected in the response Incorrect use of communications devices Check application methods in the instructions for e Optical interface each device e RS 232C RS 485 converter Incorrect installation of RS 485 terminators Install terminators only on the devices on the ends of the transmission path Communications begin as soon as the power ofthe Wait at least 2 seconds before beginning E5AR T ER T is turned ON communications after the power is turned ON Unstable signals that occur when the EBAR T ER T Initialize the host system reception buffer at the is turned ON or OFF are read as host system data following times Before sending the first command e After the power of the ESAR T ER T is turned E OFF The host system sends a command before Make sure that the program always reads the receiving a response from the E5AR T ER T response after sending a command The interval between receiving a response and Allow an interval of at least 5 ms after receiving a sending the next command from the host system
138. execution to segment 1 of the program number set for Program Link Destination parameter Operation will be completed when the Program Link Destination parameter is set to program O If a program repeat operation is also set the program link will start after the program repeat operation has been completed If the Program Link Destination parameter is set to the current program number the program will be repeated endlessly Once all programs have been executed operation will be according to the setting for the End Condition parameter The E5AR T ER T uses three SP modes Program SP PSP Fixed SP FSP and Remote SP RSP The diagram on the right shows an example of switching between Program SP Mode and Fixed SP Mode during program execution 5 31 I Section 5 Functions and Operations The operation is as follows 1 Switch from Program SP to Fixed SP in segment N 2 The mode changes to Fixed SP SP SP Tracking B Wait 5 32 3 Return to Program SP from Fixed SP in segment N 1 If the Operation at Reset parameter is set to stop control the timer will not start FSP PSP PSP FSP FSP changed Segment N Segment N 1 Time when the Run Reset parameter is changed to Run in Fixed SP or Remote SP Mode When the SP Tracking parameter is set to ON the program SP is held after the mode is changed from Program SP to Fixed SP and until the Fixed SP is changed The SP is not t
139. function alarm output and operation indicator is shown below Auxiliary Auxiliary Operation Set value dg output function output indicator N Close in Alarm Open in Alarm Setting range Unit Default value a a Close in alarm a a Close in alarm n L Open in alarm Related Parameters Reference Alarm Set Alarm Value Alarm Set Setting Level P 8 37 Alarm Set Alarm Upper limit Alarm Set Setting Level P 8 38 Auxiliary Output Assignment Control Initial Setting 2 Level P 8 67 Alarm Type Alarm Setting Level P 8 75 Alarm Hysteresis Alarm Setting Level P 8 77 Standby Sequence Reset Alarm Setting Level P 8 78 Alarm SP Selection Expansion Control Setting Level P 8 97 Setting 8 79 Section 8 Parameters 8 15 Display Adjustment Level i This level contains parameters for adjustment of the display contents including selection of the bar graph display items display refresh period Monitor Item Level settings and display scan parameters Level Changes at Startup Up To Display Adjustment Level Power ON Gm Ss ee Sse o lt ESS di sd gem 15 qx LE d Sa n 1 7 5 Adiustment Adiustment 2 un PID Setting 77 7 i 1 Level Level LAI Level
140. h 10H Hour H Minutes M or Seconds S PVST PV Start SP start SP PV start slope priority PV R or PV start time priority PV T RSTM Operation at Reset Stop control STOP or Fixed control FSP SPSL Set Point Selection Present set point PSP or Present value PV 8 55 I Section 8 Parameters Model with multi output na n V a Output 1 Type kup w a bos nm Output 3 Type Use these parameters to select the output types for multi outputs e Select a pulse voltage output or linear current output e When pulse voltage output is selected the output is 12 VDC 21 mA for the E5AR TQQUILIWW LILILI and 12 VDC 40 mA for all other models e When linear current output is selected use the Linear Current Output Type parameter to select an output of O to 20 mA or 4 to 20 MA Setting range Unit Default value e 0 Pulse voltage output 1 Linear current output Setting Related Parameters Reference Linear Current Output Type Control Initial Setting Level P 8 56 Control Transfer Output Assignment Control Initial Setting 2 Level P 8 64 P 9 t nm Linear Current Output Type 1 to 4 Current output Use these parameters to select the linear current output types Select a 0 to 20 mA output or a 4 to 20 mA output 1 0 0 to 20 mA 1 1 4 to 20 mA Setting Related Parameters By Control Transfer Output Assignment Control Initial Settin
141. height PV 12 8 mm SV 7 7 mm PRG SEG 7 7 mm E5ER T character height PV 9 5 mm SV 7 2 mm PRG SEG 7 2 mm Varies by model 10 to 55 C no condensation or icing 3 year warranty 10 to 50 C 25 to 65 C no condensation or icing Note 1 100 to 240 VAC and 24 VAC VDC are on different models Please specify the desired model when ordering 2 Multi inputs Switch between temperature and analog input using the input type switch Basic insulation between power supply and input terminals and between power supply and output terminals 3 Voltage outputs for the IL IL WW L IL IL are 21 mA max 12 VDC 40 mA max See note 3 with short circuit protection circuit A 2 Specifications MN Controller Performance Specifications Thermocouple input 0 1 of indicated value or 1 C whichever is greater 1 digit max See note 1 Not using internal cold junction compensation 0 1 of indicated value or 1 C whichever is smaller 1 digit max See note 2 Indication accuracy Analog input 0 1 FS 1 digit max Platinum resistance temperature sensor input 40 1 of indicated value or 0 5 C whichever is greater 1 digit max Position proportional potentiometer input 5 FS 1 digit max Temperature variation R S B or W thermocouple input influence See note 3 X196 of PV or 10 C whichever is greater 1 digit max Other thermocouple input 1 of PV or 4 C whichever is
142. indino 1 2281 9100 10000000 440 00000000 c 1ndinO jueuDes 281 9100 10000000 34 00000000 Lindino juewbes 8281 vLOO 10000000 440 00000000 HO wen 9281 6100 nun euin uuej6oJd G 6 6S 66 0 070070 66866000 H 01 00000000 H o Bulpsoooy 69 66 01 0070 6566000 01 00000000 H ew 1490 z8L 2100 m emi na 91Bulpiooov Da a 66666 01 0 46981000 H 01 00000000 H HO esiH Jo eyed jueuDes 2281 1100 ed 1ndui na ol yu s ddn 49 0 4w 490 dS HO JUIOd 195 1u uu6B S 0281 0100 NENNEN LN 0 GN3 HO Dumpa jueuDes vO8L 2000 8 l ye se eureg 91400 9 jo o L L0000000 H HO p sn siueuiBeg JequinN 2081 1000 m Cx E O Z ZE 91 1 02000000 H 01 L0000000 H rj wesbold m 0000 SUONCOIUNWUWOD BIA Buuojuoui pue Dunes JO 9Je H Aq p xil ld sen eA 4o uoul um s Bumes wesbold A 14 Setting Lists SIequunu 195 Wee pue sjequunu 195 qid JO 1deoxe epeoseo JO uomnejedo JO eyep uej604d Buas u uA jeuueuo esf 8 101 U0D epeos o JO epis 1epuooes z Jeuueuo pue uormejedo p leulp4002 10J y O Z Sjeuueuo 10 17 J Onuo opeos o JO epis Auepuooes z jeuueuo pue uone14edo pejeurpJooo JO t 01 Z sjeuueuo JO ue sesseJppy 9 enjeA ejdsip eui se owes eui si d
143. is 0 00 4 15 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control Cooling Coefficient If heating and cooling characteristics of the controlled object are different and good control characteristics cannot be achieved with the same PID constants a cooling coefficient can be set to adjust the proportional band for the cooling control output to achieve balance between heating and cooling control Heating P P Cooling P Heating P x Cooling coefficient The cooling P is obtained by multiplying the heating P by the cooling coefficient to control the cooling output with different characteristics from the heating output The following control modes can be selected only on Controllers with 2 inputs M Standard Control with Remote SP e An external DC current or voltage signal can be input into the remote SP input input 2 to perform standard control using the remote SP input as the SP e Input 2 can be used within the setting range determined by the input 2 type E Heating Cooling Control with Remote SP E Proportional Control Straight line Approximation 1 Straight line oroximation 2 Ap 4 16 e An external DC current or voltage signal can be input into the remote SP input input 2 to perform heating cooling control using the remote SP input as the SP Input 2 can be used within the setting range determined by the setting of the Input 2 Type parameter Proportional control is used to maint
144. is selected the MV is increased when the PV increases When reverse operation is selected the MV is increased when the PV decreases Setting range mam Default value ar r Reverse operation Reverse operation ar d Direct operation Related Information Direct Operation Cooling Reverse Operation Heating in 4 7 Setting Output Parameters P 4 20 8 12 Control Initial Setting Level t CH rt Position proportional Control Model y Closed Floating e Use this parameter to select the control method for a Position proportional Control Model a Setting range Unit Default value nk Floating r Setting Independent Operation nad Coordinated Operation CH2 standard control or CH2 heating cooling control e This parameter can be used to select independent or coordinated operation for models with two input channels f coordinated operation is selected coordinated operation based on channel 1 is enabled The program will be the same for channels 1 and 2 oe Lt Independent operation Coordinated operation n Setting LL r 1 L L nnt Related Information Reference Operating Programs Using Multiple Channels in 5 2 Control Functions P 5 11 Related Parameters Set Point Offset Adjustment Level P 8 32 Set Point Selection Control Initial Setting Level P 8 62 8 59 I Section 8 Parameters Number of Segmen
145. is used in setting area 0 An operation error will occur if it is used is setting area 1 7 33 I Section 7 Modbus Communications M Advance 7 34 Response Response Operation errors vvill also occur in the follovving cases f AT is being executed f the specifled channel is being reset or is on standby To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command Slave Function Write start Operation Related address code address code information 16 2 1 1 2 2 The response for a normal end is shown above For information on error responses refer to 7 7 Operation Commands P 7 15 Slave Function Write start Operation Related address code address code information CRC 16 1 2 2 Related E i T This command executes an advance operation Operation will move to the beginning of the next segment This command is used in setting area O An operation error will occur if itis used in setting area 1 Operation errors will also occur in the following cases If AT is being executed e f the specified channel is being reset or is on standby To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command Slave Function Write start Operation Related address code address code information CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 The response for a normal end is shown above For inf
146. it is used in setting area O To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command MRC SRC Response code Response Codes The response for a normal end is shown above For the response codes refer to 6 7 Operation Commands P 6 13 6 9 Commands and Responses I B Alarm Latch Cancel M SP Mode Response Instruction Related MRC SRC code information Related information Ch Command mode cov 1 Alam Latch Cance Alarm Latch Cancel Alarm Latch Cancel Alarm Latch Cancel Alarm Latch Cancel This command cancels the alarm latch The command is used when the alarm latch function is in use This command can be used in both setting area O and setting area 1 If AT is being executed for the specified channel an operation error will occur To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command MRC SRC Response code Hesponse Codes The response for a normal end is shown above For the response codes refer to 6 7 Operation Commands P 6 13 Instruction Related k Related Description information Commandmode mode Program ee Remote SP Fixed SP Remote SP Close Cascade Remote SP Open Cascade Remote SP Fixed SP 6 33 I Section 6 CompoWay F Communications B Hold 6 34 Response Related Description
147. le INVH 9poiN IHM INVH 4 8 poly dnyoeg Spo AUM INVH p 01 z0000000 H 91 L0000000 H sj uueyp pejqeu3 jo s qum 8121 2000 cd AOQE se ewes AOQE SE ewes S Wal um SAoluoy 244 9121 4000 AOQE se ewes AOQE SE ewes p uey zJd viz vooo AOQE se ewes AOQE se owes E AOQE SE ulES AOQE SE AOQE SE ulES AOQE SE w m s aoluoy Z4d 2121 6000 c Wal Bu ll S iolluo l 2 4 0121 8000 ue 2 4 3021 2000 AOQE se aues AOQE se awes G Wal Bum SAOUO N Ld OE AOQE se AOQE SE y dd WOzt sooo onqeseoueg ULC way Bumagyiowuow 144 g zi f000 ewqeseeueg enoge se owes z wei Bumesuoyuo Ld 9021 000 ss 1 ss 1u ed e qeue nIPA oS nun Keyds q en eA 1o0juouJ Dumes Joyowesed 2 Bonami yewioeq neea snqpoN 4 2 6 Setting Lists E SPO L0000000 H 0 0 POIN 00000000 0 SOL 01 0 S0L V LEOO000 H 01 93944444 H Buiooo 6uneeH 0 SOL 01 0 S VLEO0000 H 01 39444444 H psepueis L LINI 3ndino enjeA neod L0000000 H 0 PICH AW 00000000 H po WWI eje BHueyD AN OLEL 3000 9n EA IEHU AW ENUEN VIEL 4000 1 NO NO 10000000 H 4
148. line c peration 7 Operation 4 Control mode is control with Remote SP Channel 1 REP 5 PV2 RSP2 PRAP i Remote SP Fixed SP bos s UE Fixed SP PFSP 1 weve revecvucas seus coevsa T PVA RSP 4 Program Program SP CSP 1 PID l DireciReverse Operation BB ALM3 1 Pe Ed Remote SP Input Error ALM 1 1 Potentiometer Input Error ERR 1 MV at PV Error 9 i RNRS1 TTE Error Run MVat Reset ooo o Stop SGN1 MNAT 1 Auto SEG 1 Manual MV 9 PEND 1 Manual Standard Models m Position Heating Cooling Control Proportional Models Control Mode 9 Auxiliary Output Assignments Standard Control Dead Band Position Proportional Dead Band MVH 1 MVC 1 VLVO 1 VLVC 1 j Control Transfer Output 1 Assignments II OUI 1 OUT 2 OUT3 OUT4 SUB1 SUB2 SUB3 SUB4 SUB5 SUB6 SUB7 SUB8 SUB9 SUB 10 Channel 1 PV Channel 1 Channel 1 Alarm 1 Channel 1 Remote SP Program Remote SP Mode Channel 1 Alarm 2 Channel 1 MV Heating Channel 1 Channel 1 Alarm 3 Channel 1 MV Cooling Program Fixed SP Mode Channel 1 Alarm 4 Channel 1 MV Open Channel 1 Program No Channel 1 Input Error Channel 1 MV Closed Channel 1 RUN Reset Channel 1 Remote SP Error Channel 1 SP for Coordinated Chann
149. of elements x 8 bytes for compound read number of elements x 10 bytes Response Codes k u Erorname Desorption code 1001 Command length too The command is too long long Command length too The command is too short bu short 1101 Area type error Incorrect variable type 110B Response length too Number of elements is greater long than 25 H 0019 1100 Specified bit position is not 00 2203 Operation error Unit error unit change display unit error or EEPROM error ww Wem 1 0 6 10 6 6 Write to Variable Area 6 6 Write to Variable Area Write to a variable area by setting the required data in the following FINS mini command text format FINS mini Command Text Variable Write start Number of MRC SRC type address Bit position elements Write data 2 71 s eee 2 2 2 4 2 0001 to 0018 4 mand Specify the number of variables to be written max of 25 H 18 Not needed for a compound write Enter the data to be written FINS mini Response Text Response code MRC SRC MRES SRES 1 I 02 2 ote sss 2 4 Data name Description MRC SRC FINS mini command text is returned here Result of execution of the command Response Codes uqu Desenpton code n Command length The command is too short 1002 too short 1101 Area type error Incorrect variable type Number of ele The specified number of elements does 1003 ments data num not agree with the act
150. out for the analog input The display value for the input value specified in the Scaling Input Value 1 parameter is set in the Scaling Display Value 1 parameter and the display value for input value set in the Scaling Input Value 2 parameter is set in the Scaling Display Value 2 parameter The Decimal Point Position parameter is used to specify the decimal point position of the set values SP etc given in EU e Scaling settings for inputs 2 to 4 of a Controller with more than one inputs are set for channels 2 to 4 Press the Key to change to the desired analog input channel and then set the scaling e Scaling Input Value 1 pu ne 4 input upper limit Setting l l 19999 to Scaling Display Value 1 Scaling upper limit 1 EU Scaling Input Value 2 Input lower limit to input upper limit Scaling lower limit 1 to 99999 Decimal Point Position The unit depend on the input type setting 0 Scaling Display Value 2 8 51 I Section 8 Parameters The operation of EBAR T ER T control functions and alarms is based on the input values If a value greater than a Scaling Input Value 2 is set for c P i Scaling Input Value 1 operation will work in the opposite direction of the display values The user must confirm compatibility with devices For details refer to 4 4 Setting the Input Type P 4 10 Remote SP Upper Limit Remote SP Lower Limit 8 52 Related Parameters Input T
151. p pnioul si uoyewxosdde eui 1uBrejs ueuMw Uonoun uomnejedo y 10 gyep indui y uo peseq sen eA pezi euiuou jeg suomnoun uone1 do y JO uoee 10 sen eA 1es 666 6 01 666 L 40 20000 01 E844444 H oz 1ndino uoneuxojddy eui uexoug x 6666 01 666 L 10220000HH 01 1 844444 H 666 6 01 666 L 20720000 H 01 L E844444 H 666 6 01 666 L 20720000 H 01 E844444 H 666 6 01 666 L 40 20000 01 1 844444 H 666 6 01 666 L 102200001H 01 L 844444 H 666 6 01 666 L 10220000HH 01 LE844444 H 666 6 01 666 L 20720000 H 01 L 844444 H 666 6 01 666 L 40 20000 01 LE844444 H 666 6 01 666 L 40720000 H 01 L 844444 H 666 6 01 666 L 40 20000 01 LE844444 H Le uonisod 666 6 01 666 L 10 20000 01 L 844444 H 10ju0ou Dumes SuomneoiunuuuJloo BIA Buuojuouu pue Bul118s JO ae H Aq sen eA JOWUOW HUINES L Jayoweled Sseuppy sseippv dit eigene Bind snapo 5 Indjno uonewixorddy ul j u yo g oz 1ndu uoreuuxoJddy eui uexoJg ndu uomeuuixoJddy euip uexoug Z indino z uomeuixojddy euidu6res Indino g uoneuxo4ddy eui 1uBreds c indu z uogeuixoiddy euru6res vogo pu 1nduj z uoneuxo4ddy ull 1uBie1s Fe c ndinO uoneuixojddy ull luBie11s NEN indino uoneurxoiddy eui ureds PERPA uogeuixoddy aul yybreys 2080 100
152. range Default value value Position 1 Closed 0 Hold Proportional 0 Hold 1 Open Related Information 4 12 Starting and Stopping Operation P 4 41 8 29 I Section 8 Parameters CH wn csr r r rr cs r rs r r rr rr s MV Change Rate Limit Heating art MV Change Rate Limit Cooling bark 2 PID control Proportional band z 0 00 e The MV change rate limits set the maximum allowed change in the MV or the opening on a Position proportional Control Model per second If a change occurs in the MV that exceeds this limit the MV will be changed at the set rate limit until the required change is attained When set to 0 0 the function is disabled e For standard control use the MV Change Rate Limit Heating parameter The MV Change Rate Limit Cooling parameter cannot be used For heating cooling control the MV change rate limit can be set separately for heating and cooling Use the MV Change Rate Limit Heating parameter for heating and the MV Change Rate Limit Cooling parameter for cooling e The MV change rate limits cannot be used in the following situations e In Manual Mode e When AT is being executed During ON OFF control P 0 00 During a reset i e while outputting the value set for the MV at Reset parameter e During an error i e while outputting the value set for the MV at PV Error parameter A MV Change Rate Limit 0 0t0100 0 s 0 0 Disabled Heating etting
153. range of specifications for ambient temperature and humidity The service life will decrease due to increased internal temperature if multiple Digital Controllers are mounted closely side by side or one on top of the other If this type of mounting is used use forced cooling e g use a fan to blow air onto the Digital Controllers Do not prevent heat dissipation by obstructing the periphery of the Digital Controller Do not block the vents on the Digital Controller unit The supplied power voltage and load must be within the rated and specified ranges Be sure to confirm the name and polarity for each terminal before wiring the terminal block Do not connect anything to unused terminals Use the specified size of crimp terminals M3 width 5 8 mm max to wire the terminal block When connecting bare wires use copper stranded or solid wires and use AWG22 cross sectional area of 0 326 mm to AWG14 cross sectional area of 2 081 mm for the power supply terminals and AWG28 cross sectional area of 0 081 mm to AWG16 cross sectional area of 1 309 mm for other terminals Length of exposed wire 6 to 8 mm Ensure that the rated voltage is attained within 2 seconds after turning ON the power Turn OFF the power first when you need to draw out the Digital Controller Do Not touch the terminals or the electronic components or subject them to physical shock When inserting the Digital Controller do not allow the electronic components
154. segment number 7 Press the cel Key for less than 1 second to display the Segment Set Point parameter for segment 2 Use the IA and Keys to set the Segment Set Lt Point parameter for segment 2 to 100 0 g LA 8 Press the kel Key for less than 1 second to display the Segment Time parameter for segment 2 Use the and 121 Keys to set the Segment Time parameter for segment 2 to 8 00 juo w cx ju w Dur T g ny 9 Press the cel Key several times to display the Segment Editing parameter again Check that segment number 3 the next segment to be edited is displayed bm mr 10 Press the cel Key for less than 1 second to display the Segment Set Point parameter for segment 3 Use the A and Keys to set the Segment Set Ll Point parameter for segment 3 to 100 0 11 Press the kel Key for less than 1 second to display the Segment Time parameter for segment 3 Use the and 221 Keys to set the Segment Time parameter for segment 3 to 10 00 12 Press the el Key several times to display the Segment Editing parameter again Check that segment number 4 the next segment to be edited is displayed 4 29 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 13 Press the cel Key for less than 1 second to display the Segment Set Point parameter for segment 4 U
155. set the parameters The default setting is shaded Set Input Setting range Input type smien Setting PHO0 200 0 to 850 0 300 0 to 1500 0 6 T 1 2000104000 3000107000 S 1000108500 10001015000 9 TU 200014000 300 010 700 0 m R 1001017000 001030000 13 B 10001018000 30001032000 _ Depends on scaling ANALOR One of the following ranges is dis played depending on the scaling 19999 to 99999 010 5 1999 9 to 9999 9 199 99 to 999 99 Oto 10V 19 999 to 99 999 1 9999 to 9 9999 Set the input type switch of each input to match the Input Type parameter of the corresponding input The default setting is 2 TC PT Related Parameters Input Temperature Units Input Initial Setting Level P 8 51 SP Upper Limit and SP Lower Limit Control Initial Setting Level P 8 57 8 50 8 11 Input Initial Setting Level t t Input Temperature Unit cu Temperature input e Select Celsius C or Fahrenheit F for the temperature unit A Setting range Unit Default value e Setting Related Parameters Input Type Input Initial Setting Level P 8 50 5 Scaling Input Value 1 LP Scaling Display Value 1 d n Scaling Input Value 2 202 Scaling Display Value 2 dSP 2 Decimal Point Position ar Analog input e These parameters are used with an analog input e Scaling is carried
156. setting 6 J 0 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max com 6 f N m V Switched by output type setting LL D dl tox T cul m OUT4 i xl Voltage output 12 V 2 Input 2 ie rq 2 me 7 10 40 mA 8 H 2 3 nput 2 16 2 l Lu l td F ARM OUT3 Paley ay PT TO m Fy PT C Voltage output 12 V B EE ae 4 40 mA or 5 2 gt 6 b iB Current output s nput 1 Ir 7 5 4 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max H pg R ee 6 P d lt 0 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max LG I v PT TC ik EUH Switched by output type setting Current Voltage Thermocouple V PT TC K A Ne Platinum resistance thermometer E Current Voltage Thermocouple V Platinum resistance thermometer P E5AR TCCESMWW FLK 4 loop Controller E5AR TQQE3MWW FLK 4 loop Controller ox N Auxiliary outputs Auxiliary outputs Transistor outputs BIC Transistor outputs 24VAC DC 1100 to 240 VAC COM COM qp E A um SUB1 B
157. shown below E5AR T ER T p Input power supply LL Operation Set the STV output to the inspection value voltage or current p Input power supply L l Section 9 User Calibration E o G o i o o 9 16 Section 10 Troubleshooting 10 1 Troubleshooting Checklist 10 2 10 2 Eror Messages 10 3 10 3 Inferring Causes from Conditions Abnormal Measured Values 10 4 10 4 Inferring Causes from Conditions Abnormal Control 10 6 10 5 Inferring Causes from Conditions Abnormal Outputs 10 9 10 6 Inferring Causes from Conditions Communications Problems 10 10 10 7 Inferring Causes from Conditions Reset Operation 10 11 O c o o 5 o 10 1 I Section 10 Troubleshooting 10 1 Troubleshooting Checklist If you encounter difficulty with the Controller use the following checklist to troubleshoot the problem Check the operating state of the E5AR T ER T as indicated by the Check the display display Error messages and indicators are described in 10 2 Error Messages P 10 3 If an error message is displayed refer to this section to troubleshoot the problem Check switches and wiring Check switch settings and wiring Power Supply e s the power turned ON s the terminal volta
158. started Start control The output does not increased due to MV limits Change the MV limits to suitable values The cooling fan is running Stop the cooling fan B The Measured Value Increases Above the SP Possible cause Solution Abnormal measured value Troubleshoot as described in 10 3 Inferring Causes from Conditions Abnormal Measured Values P 10 4 The load is connected to the wrong channel and Wire correctly the heater is being controlled by the control output of another channel Connections The contact of the control output drive relay has Replace the relay melted Short circuit failure in SSR Replace the SSR Current flows to heater due to SSR leakage Connect a bleeder resistor to prevent operation current due to leakage current 10 6 10 4 Inferring Causes from Conditions Abnormal Control i Direct operation and reverse operation settings are Set the correct settings incorrect The PID constants are not suitable e Execute AT e Set suitable PID constants The output does not decrease due to MV limits Change the MV limits to suitable values Settings Output is taking place in Manual Mode Leave Manual Mode The controlled object generates heat Use heating cooling control Large overshoot See the Overshooting or Undershooting Occurs troubleshooting table Method of use E Overshooting or Undershooting Occurs Abnormal measured value Troubleshoot as described in 10 3 Inferring
159. switching between ON and OFF to stabilize operation The width of the hysteresis is called simply the hysteresis The hysteresis is set for both heating and cooling control output using the Hysteresis Heating and Hysteresis Cooling parameters For standard control heating or cooling control only the Hysteresis Heating parameter is used regardless of whether heating or cooling is being performed x Hysteresis Heating OFF PV SP ON For heating cooling control an area can be set where the MV is 0 for both heating and cooling This area is called the dead band This means that 3 position control can be performed Dead band Hysteresis Heatin ON Heating Cooling OFF PV A SP Hysteresis Cooling 4 31 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control M Settings Setting ON OFF Control Proportional Band 0 00 4 4 m t ee Li ad ot gt me LI d Z Z ane Setting the Hysteresis 4 32 To perform ON OFF control the SP Proportional Band and Hysteresis Heating parameters must be set To ON OFF control and an hy
160. that indicates the end of the text 03H Block Check Character BCC This byte stores the result of the BCC calculation from the node number through EXT End Codes Error End detection code Neb priority FINS command error Could not execute the specified FINS command 4 y Sum of bits that are 1 in received data does not agree vvith the 10 Parity error ae communications parity Stop bit of command frame characters is 0 4 on Attempted to transfer nevv data vvhen reception data buffer is 12 Overrun error already full Calculated BCC is different from received BCC mand Text Characters other than O to 9 or A to F are contained in the FINS mini Command Text or for Echoback Test data other 14 than the test data was returned No SID and FINS mini Command Text or no FINS mini Com MRC SRC are not correct in FINS mini Command Text No sub address SID or FINS mini Command Text or 16 Sub address error sub address is less than 2 characters and no SID and FINS mini Command Text Frame length error The command frame exceeds the specified number of bytes 00 Normal end Command was executed normally without error A response is not sent to command frames that do not end with the ETX BCC characters 6 5 I Section 6 CompoWay F Communications 6 3 FINS mini Text The FINS mini Command Text and FINS mini Response Text form the body of command response
161. the E5AR T the power supply voltage must be 100 to 240 V for CE marking compliance M Precautions when Wiring To avoid the effects of noise wire the signal wires and the power line E o separately e Use crimp terminals to connect to the terminals 1 Os mm max e Tighten screws to a torque of 0 40 to 0 56 Nem e Use M3 crimp terminals with one of the shapes shown at the left 2 9 I Section 2 Preparations B Wiring Power Supply Terminals Bo NN MEN NO Mon m 2 10 The area inside the lines around terminal numbers in the diagram represents the interior of the Controller and the area outside the lines represent the exterior e Connect terminals A1 and A2 as follows The input power supply depends on the A _ model QD 2 7 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC VDC no polarity p Input voltage E5AR T E5ER T 100 to 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 22 VA 17 VA 100 to 120 VAC 50 60 Hz for UL certification 100 to 240 VAC 50 60 Hz for CE marking 24 VAC 50 60 Hz 15 VA 11 VA 24 VDC no polar For input 1 IN1 connect terminals K4 to K6 on the E5AR T or E4 to E6 on the EBER T according to the input type as shown below For a Controller with more than one input connect inputs 2 to 4 IN2 to INA in the same way according to the number of input points E5AR T
162. to 7 7 Operation Commands P 7 15 M Parameter Initialization Response Slave Function Write start Operation Related address code address code information CRC 16 HOO HOB 00 1 1 2 2 2 This command returns all settings to the default settings This command is used in setting area 1 If used in setting area O an operation error will result To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command Slave Function Write start Operation Related address code address code information CRC 16 H00 H00 HOB H00 1 1 2 2 2 The response for a normal end is shown above For information on error responses refer to 7 7 Operation Commands P 7 15 7 31 I Section 7 Modbus Communications B Alarm Latch Cancel Slave Function Write start Operation Related Command address code address code information 16 2 1 1 2 2 Related Description H FO This command cancels alarm latch The command is used when the alarm latch function is in use This command can be used in both setting area O and setting area 1 If AT is being executed for the specified channel an operation error will occur To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command Slave Function Write start Operation Related Response address code address code information CRC 16 he o Hoo kc 1 1
163. to contact the case Do not remove the inner circuit board 10 The output may turn OFF when shifting to certain levels Take this into consid eration when performing control 11 Allow a warm up time of at least 30 minutes 12 To prevent inductive noise separate the Digital Controller terminal block wiring from power lines that carry high voltages or high currents Also do not wire power lines together with or parallel to the Digital Controller wiring Using shielded cables and separate conduits or ducts is recommended Attach a surge suppressor or noise filter to peripheral devices that generate noise in particular motors transformers solenoids magnetic coils or other equipment that has an inductive component When a noise filter is used at the power supply first check the voltage or current and attach the noise filter as close as possible to the product Allow as much space as possible between the product and devices that generate powerful high frequencies e g high frequency welders high frequency sewing machines or surge 13 Install a switch or circuit breaker that allows the operator to immediately turn OFF the power and label suitably 14 The product is designed for indoor use only Do not use the product outdoors or in any of the following locations Locations where dust or corrosive gas is present in particular sulfur or ammonia gases Locations where condensation or ice may form Locations
164. 0 97V19000 H O V0000000 H G L indui 19 8uuollu lod e sjeo j Jo senunuoo uonejedo p sol jeuonuodoud uonisog 06 666 O 00 0 94V L9000 H 01 00000000H zl indui 191 uuonu lod 1e sdojs uormejedo p solo spuooes jeuonaodoud uonisog Buiooo Buneeu piepuels Spuooeg i 6666 01 070 4 960000 H 01 00000000 H 6666 01 170 60000 01 L0000000 H G L indui e sjeojj Jo senunuoo uonejedo paso d jeuonuodoud uonisog 6666 O 070 46060000 01 00000000H 1 1e sdojs uomejedo p solo spuooes L 0662 Ieuoniodoid uonisoq B5uijooo Bune uy piepue1s oul e16e1u did 2070 V000 haa 015 66 666 01 1070 46981000 H O L0000000 H Jeuon1odoud uonisog 66666 01 0070 16981000 H 996 000L 56666 O O 00000000 6ul jooo bunesau puepuels pueg jeuonjodojd dild 0000 ls 8 01 1 80000000 0 L0000000 H uonoejes Cid eidsiq vo SUOI EOIUNWWOD BIA Buuojuoui pue Dunes JO de Ha Aq sen eA 4o uoul um s I A 1 did Vdid se ewes eui ee Buimojjo eu 1 o I 66666 01 6666L 4698L000 H ol 14184 1 1 H d 1ndul yo 1e se ulES c eulejeiu did 90vO 2000 oul L A YEAH Q did vOVO 2000 A 19 Appendix uoinejedo 129jJ JOU IM 1 ING peDueuo eq ues SIU ejep euJelul 10 S4
165. 0 g 1ndu uogeuxo4ddy eul jublreys 0090 0000 Bumes uonpulxolddy A 22 Dum s ed 1ndu Aq peuiuuejeq peBueuo si ed 1ndui y ueuMw dA 1ndui eui 10 siuui pue Jeddn eui o pezi eniu uouMs ed indul v jo Gum s y Jo ssajpuebHeu z S j9 eurejed 1ndu eui 104 en eA jjnejep eu L Setting Lists 1 NO 10000000 H 0 440 00000000 H e dsiq luloq ewid Ad 4120 3000 HO Jeddn indui o juajeainbs enjeA Aeidsip pue 66666 10 Jej euis o WWI indul O 1uejeainbe en eA e dsip pue 6666L 10 190127 Bojeuy oDuej ed 1ndui Josues Jo wij Jeddn o eBuei josueg o 002 H l ye se euies enyejeduuoe H WWI dS e10uieH 2120 3000 0 66 6666 O 666 1 WOD Dumeg uoun psouenpy o 1 ZH 09 L0000000 H uow ZH 0S ZH OS 00000000 H WOD uomnonpeu esioN uononpu josueS 0220 0100 NO a BB LL ywi ndu Jeddn o juejeainbe ene Aeidsip pue 66666 10 Jews oi juu indul O 1uejeainbe en eA e dsip pue 6666 10 Jebueq Bojeuy eDueij Sum s 10sues ed A 1ndui Jo wij Jjeddn o Bue1 Burjes 10sues Jo ywl na o Buipjoooy 0081 H l 1e se eynyejeduue yw Jedd dS 104 vi20 4000 0 ON 01 0 vV0000000 H 01 00000000H AF uonisog luloq euuroe n3 001 H l 1e se eures 66666
166. 000000 01 00000000 H 1uno2 eDejeny A0N eDeieAy e o 2080 9 0 2 1 318 suoneoiunuuuioo 40 sanea um s seul 26 91 8 2 50000000 01 00000000 H 1uno2 A0N z eDeleAy e o vOSO 2 2 1 ase suoneoiunuuoo 10 sen eA Dunes seu ze 9L 8 v c 30000000 H 01 00000000 H T 4 gt 4 41 4 4 T juno A0N eDeJeAy AOV 8080 juejsuo awl y uomejedo 6e 1p10 151 9090 juejsuo ul e uomejedo Be 151 7080 yu En gum E 2 K a ri x gt u 6666 01 070 40 20000 01 00000000 H m 1 1 61666 01 0 0 40 20000 01 00000000 H Spuo29 6 666 01 070 40 20000 01 00000000 H juejsuo 2 uogesado De11epiQ 1911 2080 SpUo29 6 666 01 070 40 20000 01 00000000 H juejsuo uogeied De11epiQ 1911 0080 sso sso adh ejqeueA anjeA eS un uolusod Dumes Keyds q iolluouu 6una s Keyds q E JojeujeJed l s a julod yewioeq ynejeq qunv sngpoy AeNxoduuo2 SUOIEOIUNWIWOD BIA Buuojuoui pue JO ae H Aq pexiejd sen eA 4ououl um s 9 9 Z jueuunsn py Du Eni En Eni gt L x x E 1 1 m m m 22 22 1 1 al al 5001 spuodes spuooeg uu z enjeA Aeydsiq Buijeos uu 16 0J enjeA Aejdsiq Buipeog Hoyeuy indui JOSUAS JO s
167. 0000000 H 1u u s 1es 1 IeuBiS owl O 406 2000 Hun euJn v 6 68 66 01 070070 66966000 01 00000000 ureJ604d o Buipjooov 0070 l 10 69 66 01 0070 6S660000 H 01 00000000 H c OWI 440 24615 eur 0061 9000 yun euJn 66966 01 070070 66966000 01 00000000 o Buipjooov 0070 l l 10 69 66 01 0070 69660000 01 00000000 H c OWI NO 1 TEUB S eur V06L 9000 c JUaUBAS 1eg 1 jeus eur p lqesiq 0 sjuewBbes jo 01 0 00000000 H 8061 000 Hun eun o Buipio55v v 6 68 66 01 070070 66966000 01 00000000 10 69766 01 0070 69660000 01 00000000 H OWL 440 124615 OWI 9061 6000 5 5 8 Hun eun o Buipio55v t 6 6S 66 01 070070 66866000 H 01 00000000 H 10 6866 01 000 6S660000 H 91 00000000 H p lqesiq 0 siueu amp es Jo 01 0 00000000 H eui NO 1 184615 eui 1ueuiBeg jas TEU S eut 061 0061 c000 V000 I O I O o IER 3 Z ZE 01 1 02000000 H 01 L0000000 H HO 0061 0000 6d uonisod ain sseJppy ssouppy 2221 SUONCOIUNWUWOD BIA Buuojuoui pue Dunes JO 9Je H Aq sen eA 4o uoul um s 9 9 jeubis OUI A 21 Appendix 000 1 01 000 0 eBuei pezijeuuou eui o juejeAinbe si O 0 008 E 01 0 002 2 010061 01 0 00Z 40 Indu y d e jo eDeis 1ndui eui ur
168. 002 uonisod 1100 jeuuroeq Puras inejeq Aelds q 26 91 SZ PHO pz 01 21 SHO 91 016 ZHO AURIS 8 ulu dO LHO 80000000 H 2 nd no s lsuein 10 0 1o Sulloo2 1ndinO Jo3u02 LHO 0000000 9 nd no 1eJsueJ JO u do 10 Sune H 1ndino 02402 LHO 90000000 H S Ad 1ueseJd LHO 50000000 iz 1utod 19S 1ueseJd LHO 70000000 H dS 0000000 H 2 nd no joluoo JO 0 10 Sune H 1ndino jo3u02 LHO 20000000 L 1ndino ionuo JO u do 10 Sune H 1ndino 02402 LHO L0000000H 0 p lqesiq 00000000 1ojyuou 6umes suomeoiunujuloo Buliolluoui pue Bunnies JO ae H Ag pexijeud sen eA Joyuouj Dumeg Keyds q nueuuufissy indino Jejsuej o1002 2030 ss l T Ena v Lsnapon o e z Dunes J9 sseJppy led ejqeueA enlu 1onuo2 A 26 Setting Lists dx E LC at 1 gt u 4 z 20 Zn EN NEN 2 777171 7 EAE E 1 y y 7 7 e o AOQE SE ewes AOQE se juawuUBbissy p 1ndu 1u8 3 AOQE SE AOQE se juawubissy e 1ndu 1u8 3 AOQE SE aues AOQE se juawuUbissy z 1ndu 1u8 3 18 01 Z9 PHO LG000000H 01 46000000 H L9 01 Zt EHO 06000000 Ol 2000000 Lp O ZZ ZHO 62000000H 01 91000000 H Hers juowubissy 1ndu
169. 01 199 Uue y p 0 senjeA wey c pue uonoauo ndu z pue senjeA 1lu unsn pv ndu Buiooo 6uneep prepueis 1013 Ad 1 AW Buiooo Duneep prepueis Josey 1e AW pueg pee dS pexi4 PON dS 15 AN enuen JWI 01 o 1ndinQ Jojsuei jur J ddn p 0 0 1ndinQ Jojsuei y 01 1 1ueuiufissy indino ieixny 0L 01 1 jueuuufissy 1104 jue 3 y O JuawUBissy 1ndin Jejsuei 1 101002 eBuei indui jo yw 1603 O Aejdsiq Burpeos 40 eHues S m s Indu jo yw 1901 O H 907 dS z enreA Aejdsiq Bureos O eBuei 1ndui jo quip q ddn O Z enreA Aeldsiq Burpeos 40 eBuei 1ndui jo yw q ddn O jur q dd 45 ejoueg O g O 8 o 1 aig dS AG Ad 117 jeddr auey uonoejes oneuioiny L eldsiq Buileos O 10sues jo llul 1603 O L enreA eldsiq Buipeos 10 eHues 10sues Jo yul O yw 19M0 49 z enpeA Aejdsiq Bueos O e6ues 10sues jo yw jedd y O Z enreA Aejdsiq Burpeos Jo ebues Dunes 10sues jo yw Jedd O jur 1eddf dS eO z pue senjeA indu Buljeos 00 5 yndul e1nye1eduue L WowBB 0 s uleved Burzi eniui jou uonipuo SJojouJeJed payejay CI o o O G gt gt gt gt 5 c QD 2 Qa 2 SS
170. 05 0 e When using the Position proportional Models fully open fully closed or hold status can be selected using the MV at Reset parameter In open status only the output on the open side is ON In closed status only the output on the closed side is ON In hold status the outputs on both the open and closed sides are OFF The default setting is hold Operation at Reset Parameter Set to Fixed Control The following diagram shows the status transitions when the Operation at Reset parameter is set to fixed control See note 1 RESET fixed control 1 See note 2 4 41 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control Note1 The program moves into Program SP Mode and program operation starts from the fixed SP 2 Control does not stop Control is executed for the fixed SP The program moves into Fixed SP Mode Control is executed for the remote SP when the program moves into Remote SP Mode e f the Operation at Reset parameter is set to fixed control the first segment will become a ramp segment The following table shows example settings x sme 8 SegmenisP froo f Segment Time 8 00 10 00 5 00 h min SP Segment Segment 2 Segment 3 100 0 50 0 FSP 8 00 10 00 5 00 Time h min Operation at Power This parameter determines the operating status when the power to ON the EBAR T ER T is turned ON The following 5 selec
171. 1 To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command Slave Function Write start Operation Related address code address code information CRC 16 H00 H06 H 00 1 1 2 2 2 The response for a normal end is shown above For information on error responses refer to 7 7 Operation Commands P 7 15 E Move to Setting Area 1 Slave Function Write start Operation Related address code address code information 16 H00 H0 07 00 1 1 2 2 2 Use this command to move to setting area 1 The command is used in setting area 0 Nothing happens if the command is used in setting area 1 If the command is used when the Initial Setting Protection parameter is set to 2 Disable Move to Input Initial Setting Level an operation error will occur To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command 7 29 I Section 7 Modbus Communications Response Slave Function Write start Operation Related address code address code information CRC 16 H00 H00 07 HO00 1 1 2 2 2 The response for a normal end is shown above For information on error responses refer to 7 7 Operation Commands P 7 15 B Move to Protect Level Response B Auto Manual 7 30 Slave Function Write start Operation Related address code address code information 16 H00 H00 H 08 1 1 2
172. 1 Setting Levels and Key Operations P 4 2 for details When pressed this function key activates the function set with the PF1 parameter Example When the PF1 parameter is set to RUN RST this key functions as an Run Reset Key that is used to switch between Run Mode and Reset Mode RUN RST is the default PF1 setting The mode changes from Reset Mode to Run Mode when the key is pressed for at least one second and changes from Run Mode to Reset Mode when the key is press for at least two seconds When pressed this function key activates the function set with the PF2 parameter Example When this key is set as a Channel Key the channel is switched on mod els with a multi channel configuration The channel switching sequence is as fol lows CH1 CH2 Highest channel set in the Enabled Channel Setting l 1 7 Section 1 Overview 1 3 HO and Main Functions B I O Configuration The I O configuration of the EBAR T ER T and internal setting items are shown in the following diagram EV EV2 EV3 EVA EV5 EV6 EV EV8 EVI EV10 IN1 IN2 IN IN4 Input 1 Type 1 Switch Input 1 Type Temperature Unit Scaling Extraction of Extraction of xtraction of Square Root 1 Square Root 2 are Root 3 are Root 4 Event input assignments Moving Average Moving A 2 p g oving Average ng Average 3 i Average y First Order 1 g Op i First Order Lag Operation 1 Broken
173. 120 1 Broken line Approximation 1 nin Ar JESUS FO01 1 Broken line Approximation 1 Output 1 1 999 9 999 1 FO20 1 Broken line t Approximation 1 Output 20 HESS USE zi K LI Straight line Approximation Input 1 Straight line Approximation Input 2 Straight line Approximation Output 1 Straight line Approximation Output 2 1 or 2 a Setting 8 10 Approximation Setting Level L E 2 Lex w s gur e Me V 4 Ya Ya Lt X Xx x Lt 9 t Straight line approximation is enabled Use these parameters to configure straight line approximation 1 and 2 e Use these parameter to set the values for straight line approxi mation Specify two points straight line approximations 1 and 2 Use normalized data for the values f Input 1 Input 2 the setting will not be effective and will be regarded as straight line approximation with input data output data Output value 2 Output value 1 Input value 1 Input value 2 Setting range Unit Default value Straight line Approximation 1 999 to 0 000 Input 1 9 999 Straight line Approximation 1 999 to 1 000 Input 2 9 999 Straight line Approximation 1 999 to 0 000 Output 1 9 999 Straight line Approximation 1 999 to 1 000 Output 2 9 999 Related Parameters Straight line Approximation 1 Enabled Straight line Approxim
174. 19 ul Scaling Input Value 1 DSP1 Scaling Display Value 1 19999 Scaling Display value 2 1 INP 2 Scaling Input Value 2 1DU Input 1 emperature Units 12 T Input 2 Type DSP 2 I2DU Input 2 Temperature Units Scaling Display Value 2 oC F Scaling Display Value 1 1 99999 13 T Input 3 Type DP Decimal Point Position 05207 04 I3DU Input 3 Temperature Units e a RSPH Remote SP Upper Limit il RSPL Remote SP Lower Limit zl 4DU Input 4 Temperature Units PVDP PV Decimal cz Point Display OFF 0 ON 1 SNC Sensor Induction Noise reduction 50Hz 60Hz 1 Temperature Lower limit of sensor setting range to upper limit of sensor setting range Analog Larger of 19999 and a display value equivalent to input lower limit to smaller of 99999 and display value equivalent to input upper limit AMOV Move to Advanced Function Setting Level 1999 9999 8 49 I Section 8 Parameters 9 4 nm Input Type 1 to 4 e These parameters are used to set the sensor types e f these parameters are changed the SP limit settings are returned to the Initial settings Reset the SP Upper Limit and SP Lower Limit parameters as necessary e Refer to the following table to
175. 2 2 T The response for a normal end is shown above For information on error responses refer to 7 7 Operation Commands P 7 15 M SP Mode Slave Function Write start Operation Related Command address code address code information CRC 16 2 1 1 2 2 Related information Program SP Remote SP Fixed SP Program SP Remote SP Close Cascade Remote SP Open Cascade Remote SP Fixed SP 7 32 7 9 Commands and Responses I B Hold Hesponse Related Description 5 4 F1 m Remote SP F2 Fixed SP Use this command to select the SP Mode Refer to SP Modes in 5 7 Program Operation Functions P 5 31 for details on the SP Mode This command can be used in both setting area O and setting area 1 If AT is being run in the specified channel an operation error will occur To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command Slave Function Write start Operation Related address code address code information CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 The response for a normal end is shown above For information on error responses refer to 7 7 Operation Commands P 7 15 Slave Function Write start Operation Related address code address code information CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 Related Description daca O Hold Cancel Hold Cancel 11 Hold 21 Hold 30 i Hold Cancel All This command starts or cancels the hold operation This command
176. 2 2 2 The response for a normal end is shown above For information on error responses refer to Z 6 Write to Variable Area P 7 13 7 22 7 9 Commands and Responses I B Writing Set Values Slave Function Write start Number of Byte Write data Command address code address elements count Data 1 Data 1 LU 5 s 1 1 2 2 1 Number of elements x 2 bytes Data n Data n CRC 16 Most significant Least significant 5 2 Address Set values in setting area 0 H 0600 to 061C Operation Level H 0700 to 074A Adjustment Level H 0800 to 0818 Adjustment 2 Level H 0900 to 096E Alarm Set Setting Level H OAO0 to OA9E PID Setting Level H OBOO to OB6E Approximation Setting Level H 1800 to 183A Program Setting Level H 1900 to 196C Time Signal Setting Level Set values in setting area 1 H OCOO to 0C20 Input Initial Setting Level H ODOO to 0D36 Control Initial Setting Level H OEO0 to OE76 Control Initial Setting 2 Level H OFO0 to OF2C Alarm Setting Level H 1000 to 100E Display Adjustment Level H 1100 to 110C Communications Setting Level H 1200 to 1218 Advanced Function Setting Level H 1300 to 133A Expansion Control Setting Level H 4000 added to above 2 Same set values as channel 1 addresses H 8000 added to above 3 Same set values as channel 1 addresses H C000 added to above 4 Same set values as channel 1 addresses 7 23 I Section 7 Modbus Communications Hesponse This command is used to write set values The number of elem
177. 27 AT Execute CompoWay F communications 6 27 Modbus communications 7 26 AT Execute Cancel 8 23 AT Hysteresis 8 102 Auto Manual 4 43 4 49 5 42 8 15 CompoWay F communications 6 31 Modbus communications 7 30 Automatic Selection Range Upper Limit 5 10 8 42 auto tuning 4 33 8 23 Auxiliary Output Assignment 8 67 Auxiliary Output Open in Alarm 5 27 8 79 Auxiliary Output Assignments 1 12 4 37 auxiliary outputs terminals 2 12 Back 8 11 CompoWay F communications 6 36 backing program operations 5 31 Bar Graph Display Item 8 81 broken line approximation 5 6 8 48 Broken line Approximation 1 Enabled 8 72 Bumpless at RUN 8 103 calibration data registering 9 4 cascade heating cooling control 1 10 4 17 cascade open cascade close control 8 24 cascade standard control 1 10 4 17 CH2 operation indicator 1 6 changing channels 4 50 channel indicator 1 5 close in alarm open in alarm 5 26 closed control 4 18 Closed Floating 4 18 8 59 CMW operation indicator 1 6 cold junction compensator connecting 9 5 commands and responses CompoWay F communications 6 17 Modbus communications 7 20 communications monitor settings A 7 program status A 10 status A 8 terminals 2 16 Communications Data Length 8 86 Communications Monitor A 12 Communications Parity 8 86 Communications Protocol Selection 8 85 Communications Setting Level 8 84 A 34 Communications Speed 8 85 Communications Stop Bits 8 86 Commun
178. 3 ca 23 d Lr E EM r3 E3 c3 r3 lt bs d 22 25 c3 25 1 less than 4 AL 1 Alarm Set 4 Alarm Value 1 19999 to 99999 4 AL1H Alarm Set 4 Alarm Upper Limit 1 19999 to 99999 4 AL1L Alarm Set 4 4 AL4L Alarm Set 4 Alarm Lower Limit 4 I 19999 to 99999 8 Setting Level less than 1 second TSG1 6 Time Signal 6 Set 5 Segment 1 n 0 to Number of Segments TON1 6 Time Signal 6 ON Time 1 0 00 to 99 59 or TOF1 6 Time Signal 6 OFF Time 1 00 to 99 59 or 0 00 0 to 99 59 9 00 0 to 99 59 9 0 0 TOF3 6 Time Signal 6 OFF Time 3 0 00 to 99 59 or 0 00 0 to 99 59 9 12 1 Straight line n Approximation 1 Input 2 1 999 to 9 999 01 1 Straight line Approximation 1 Output 1 1 999 to 9 999 SO2 1 Straight line oe 4 Approximation 1 Output 2 1 999 to 9 999 11 2 Straight line Approximation 2 Input 1 1 999 to 9 999 12 2 Straight line Approximation 2 Input 2 ml 2991951999 01 2 Straight line n Approximation 2 Output 1 1 999 to 9 999 S022 Straight line ann Approximation 2 Output 2 1 999 to 9 999 FIO1 1 Broken line Approximation 1 Input 1 1 999 to 9 999 FI20 1 Brok
179. 4 Move Average Count 1 2 4 8 16 32 Level 12 ke Novel EW x r QO Control in progress SQRP 1 Extraction of Square Root 1 Low cut point 0 000 9 999 SQRP2 Extraction of Square Root 2 Low cut point 0 000 9 999 SQRP 3 Extraction of Square Root 3 Low cut point 0 000 9 999 SQRPA Extraction of Square Root 4 Low cut point 0 000 9 999 AP 1 Analog Parameter Control Rate 1 999 9 999 8 33 I Section 8 Parameters First Order Lag Operation Time Constant 1 to 4 First Order Lag Operation Function is enabled e These parameters are used to set the time constant of the first order filter of each input Data resulting from the first order lag filter is shown below The filter is used to filter out noise elements in the input PV before filter N PV after filter 0 63A Time Time constant Setting range Unit Default value Related Information First Order Lag Operation in 5 1 Input Adjustment Functions P 5 5 Related Parameters First Order Lag Operation Enabled Control Initial Setting 2 Level P 8 70 Setting Move Average Move Average Count munu 1 to 4 Movement Average Function is enabled These parameters set the move average count for move averaging for each input Data resulting from the move
180. 40 440 00000000 H 0011 01 0070 79000000 H 91 00000000 H poul y 1ndino enuen 8121 2000 BupioeiL Ad 9161 8000 o 10000000 00000000 uonesueduJo uonounf ploO Indul 10000000 00000000 uolesuedwoy uonounf 0 e ndul 0000000 H 00000000 10000000 5 440 00000000 H uonesueduJo uonounf pjoo z 1ndu uonesueduio5 uonounf pjoo 1ndu edA indul o Buipio55v r 2 66666 0 26981000 H 01 00000000 pueg pead Ad 4 6666 01 0170 40 20000 01 V0000000 H siseJejs H 10129 9 omeuloiny 18S did 4 dS 20000000 L AG L0000000 H 0 Ad 00000000 ejeq uonoejeg otjeuioiny 18S Cid 1 NO NO 10000000 H 0 440 440 00000000 Bupjoedl dS penuguoo 1ndino NO 170 0 OL O L 0 79000000 H O 444444434 H wIL NO pug wesbold L dSL dS 186 21 0000000 0 454 1104 19S 1ueseJg 00000000 H L TIY Wem S eM V L0000000 H 0 4439 pug 1ueudBes e eM 00000000 Z dSA 8POW dS 1 20000000 1 LNOO nunuo2 1 0000000 LSY 2 S H 00000000 MEM dS wiely HEM 9661 4100 en eA 19S v 844 oeg dwey 70000000 H 6 snieis dwey 20000000 2 ANVIN POHN enuen 20000000 1 LSH snieis 1eseH L0000000 H 0 LNOO enunuo2 00000000 H uonisod Sum s urod jeuuoeg neoa Ke dsiq 10jyuou 6umes suoneoiunuJuuoo
181. 5 47 l Section 5 Functions and Operations Transfer Output Scaling of the output value can be performed using Transfer Output Scaling Upper Limit and Transfer Output Lower Limit parameters The upper limit can be set to a smaller value than the lower limit to perform reverse scaling The scale can be enlarged using the width between the upper and lower limits specified in the parameters The following diagram shows an example of scaling the heating MV Transfer output Transfer output mA mA Reverse scaling Scaling enlargement MV 22 d NEU 100 Upper limit O Lower limit 100 Lower limit 10 Upper limit 80 e f the Input Type Scaling Input Value 1 or 2 SP Upper and Lower Limit or Temperature Unit parameter is changed the Transfer Output Upper Limit and Transfer Output Lower Limit parameters will be returned to the upper and lower limits of the setting range e f an input error occurs when the transfer output assignment is set to PV the transfer output changes to the upper limit and it changes to the lower limit for reverse scaling SP limit Transfer scaling range Before change AY s SP Upper limit changed from A to B SP After changing upper limit B V Upper and lower limits v Upper and lower limits of transfer scaling Displa Parameter p ay Display No 3 Control Initial Specify Control Setting 2 L Transfer Output Control Transfer Output 1 to 4
182. 5AR T ER T has the following features B inputs High speed e Sampling period 50 ms Sampling High Accuracy and Indication accuracy High Resolution Thermocouple Larger of 0 1 PV or 1 C 1 digit max Platinum resistance thermometer Larger of 0 1 PV or 0 5 C 1 digit max Analog input 0 1 FS 1 digit max For non standard specifications refer to Appendix Specifications P A 2 e Input resolution 1 100 C Pt100 A range of 150 00 to 150 00 C with a resolution of 0 01 C is provided e High speed sampling is achieved simultaneously with high accuracy and high resolution This provides high accuracy high speed control to match your application e Multi input A wide range of temperature inputs and analog inputs is supported Function Temperature inputs Thermocouples K J T E L U N R S B W Platinum resistance thermometers Pt100 Analog inputs Current inputs 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA Voltage inputs 1 to 5 V 0to 5 V or 0to 10 V Multiple Inputs e The E5AR T is available with either 2 input or 4 input channels The E5ER T comes with 2 inputs B Controller Programs Up to 32 programs can be created containing set points times PID set numbers alarm set numbers wait upper lower limits segment outputs program repetitions and program links The set point times wait function and segment outputs can be set for each segment Outputs can be set for each segment or outpu
183. 6une H AW 10000000 00000000 uonoojes e dsiq AW A 33 so uoul um s ed ejqeue 1ueuusn py ejdsiq nI PA 19 IU ss ome Ke dsi ns Hun julod euuroeq ynejeq lesia SuomneoiunuuuJo9 BIA Buuojuoui pue Huas JO ue Ha Aq pexyasd sen eA Joyuouu 6unes Appendix D l s l aye AI199JJ9 euiooeq s Um s suomneoiunuuuloo ui s B5ueuo 66 01 0 9000000 H 01 00000000 H UILL HEM UOISSIUSUEIL DOLL 9000 z GGO PPO 20000000 H 1 N3A3 ue 3 L0000000 H 0 INON 99N 00000000 H Aeg suomneoiunuiuo2 2000 10000000 00000000 Sig dois suoneolunululoo 000 0000000 H 00000000 H ul65u 1 Leeq suoneoiunuuo2 20000000 H 1 261 10000000 0 9 6 00000000 H p ds suoneoiunujuo2 66 01 0 9000000 H 01 00000000 H ON Hun SUO PESIUNWWOD mmm 1 GOW snqpoN 10000000 H AMO 4 AeMOdwod 00000000 H uonoeJes 0o9010Jg uonisod xal ain sseuppy sseJppv adh e qeueA uod jewioeq ynejaq Ke dsiq eGues 1ojyuouj Dumes Keyds q ES Snapo SuomeoiunuuuJoo9 BIA Buuojuoui pue Huas JO ue Ha Aq sen eA Joyuouu Bunes G 9 6um s suomneoiunuJuJo A 34 Setting Lists 2 m 22 al al v nd m ic r T ri nad Pr 2 2 P Rr m s Ya kn al d
184. 7 Setting Sets the alarm type Type L a L Alarm 1 to 4 sar Setting Alarm output latch Latch ALA 277777 Nar Setting Alarm output hysteresis Hysteresis L 3 Standby sar Setting Sets standby sequence Sequence Reset 5 3 reset conditions Auxiliary Output faa Setting 1 to 10 Open in Alarm Close in Alarm or Open in Alarm x 1 to 4 or 1 to 10 5 27 I Section 5 Functions and Operations 5 7 Program Operation Functions M Rate of Rise Programming Operation at Reset Parameter Set to Stop Control 5 28 SP Time Unit of Ramp Rate x N 1 x Ramp segment Soak segment Time With rate of rise programming the program is set using 3 element SP rate of rise and time If selecting rate of rise programming set the Step Time Rate of Rise Programming parameter to Rate of Rise Programming The Segment Time parameter can be set to between 0 00 and 99 59 hours minutes or minutes seconds or between 0 00 0 and 99 59 9 minutes seconds tenths of seconds The default is 0 00 or 0 00 0 The Time Unit of Ramp Rate parameter can be set to 10 hours hours minutes or seconds The default is minutes If the Segment Rate of Rise parameter is set to 0 the ramp segment is skipped and the soak segment is continued In ramp segments the SP of the previous segment is used as the starting point and the rate of rise for the current segment is continued in a straight line The point reached when the time for
185. 9 Limit Cycle MV Amplitude 5 0 to 50 0 20 0 Temporary ar Execution 0 0 to 100 0 FS 10 0 Judgement Deviation Related Information 4 10 Determining the PID Constants AT or Manual Settings P 4 33 Related Parameters AT Execute Cancel Adjustment Level P 8 23 Operation at Reset parameter set to Stop Control w esi c jw e When the Bumpless at RUN parameter is enabled an integral MV correction bumpless is performed to prevent abrupt changes in the MV when switching from reset to run e Even when the setting is disabled the bumpless correction is performed when PID constants change including changing the PID set and when AT ends or is stopped Setting range Unit Default value FF Disabled Enabled ma arr Disabled Related Parameters Operation at Reset Control Initial Setting Level P 8 62 8 103 I Section 8 Parameters CH Operation at Potentiometer Input Error j rm Position proportional Control Model Closed control J e This parameter is used to select whether control is stopped or changed to floating control when a potentiometer error occurs during closed position proportional control I Continue Setting Related Parameters Closed Floating Control Initial Setting Level P 8 59 CH Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment Function da nm e This parameter is used to
186. 9566 666 18 p xii si g 19S qid JO ebues uonoejes oneuiojne y JO yw Jeddn eu S 66666 O 6666 4 S unuuixeu eu p UipiM Bue1 Bui eos Jo 9501 01 960 L indui Bojeuy indui 40sues jo uipiM eBueij p l ds ndui eunjejeduje 7 p 66666 01 6666 1 S unuuixeu eu p indui juu jeddn peyioeds g TINH u pe ejdsip JON Z JequinwN 18S did pases Anu ldin L ed indui S dS hur s ddn ebuey o Buipioo5v 66666 O 66661 16981000H 01 3 94444 H l uonoejes oneuloiny 8 Ald 36vO 4700 ed Indu G AQ ywn s ddn ebuey o Buipioo5v 66666 O 66661 16981000H 141 4 1 1 1 1H l uonoejes JewWony 8 did 38V0 2700 ed Indu S Ad iur s ddn Huey o Buipioo5v 66666 O 6666 1 16981000H 01 1414 1 1 1 1H UOl 99 S oneuloiny 8 did 98V0 9700 pueg jeuonjodoid 8 did azvo 4600 dS qur s ddn ebuey uonoejes oreuioiny did NP AQ 1017 s dd ebueH uonoejes oreuioiny did OZVO mu E j vo pueg jeuoniodoJd 7 did 29vO 9600 dS ywn s ddn ebuey uonoejes oneuoiny 9 did AQ Huy s dd ebuey uonoejes IJEwony 9 did jv som pueg jeuoniodoJd 9 did VSVO azoo 49 4edd ebuey uonoejes oneuioiny S did em seni AQ xw s dd Bueti uono l s oneuioiny S did pueg leuonuodold S Ald 49 uu s dd ebuey uonoesjeg I EWOINY did AQ xur s ddn ebuey uonoesjeg I EWOINY y did pueg leuorodold y dild 9EVO 8100
187. AC Model 50 A max 24 VAC VDC Model 30 A max O Approx 450 g Controller only Fittings Approx 60 g E5AR T Terminal cover Approx 30 g Weight Approx 330 g Controller only Fittings Approx 60 g E5ER T i Terminal cover Approx 16 g Degree of protection Front NEMA4X indoor rear case IP20 terminal plate IP00 i Memory protection EEPROM Write count 100 000 times Note 1 K T N at 100 C max 2 C 1 digit max U and L 2 C 1 digit max B at 400 C max is not specified R and S at 200 C max 3 C 1 max W Larger of 0 3 PV and 3 C 1 digit max 2 U and L 1 C 1 digit R and S at 200 C max 1 5 C 1 digit 3 Ambient temperature 10 C to 23 C to 55 C Voltage range 15 to 10 of rated voltage 4 EU stands for Engineering Unit and is the unit after scaling For a temperature sensor it is C or F A Co l Appendix Sensor Input Setting Ranges and Display Control Ranges 5 Specifica nput setting range Display control range Input type EE Wa u resistance 1680 0 sensor 150 00 300 00 180 00 350 00 A A Thermocou ple Zz cir miu Miclc 4 to 20 mA One of following ranges depending on 10 to 110 of setting range O to 20 mA scaling Maximum range 19 999 to 99 999 1to5V 19 999 to 99 999 Analog Oto 5V 1 999 9 to 9 999 9 Oto 10 V 199 99 to 999 99 19 999 to 99 999 1 9999 to 9 9999 Applicable input type s
188. Assignment Transfer Output 1 to 4 Upper Limit and Transfer Output 1 to 4 Lower Limit Control Initial Transfer Output Setting 2 t 2 Scaling 5 48 5 10 Using Communications l 5 10 Using Communications E Setting Communications Parameters Communications parameters are set in the Communications Setting Level The parameters and settings are listed in the following table Protocol Selection CompoWay F or Modbus Communications Unit No 0 110999 0 to 99 Communications Speed 9 6 19 2 38 4 9 6 19 2 or 38 4 kbits s Communications Stop Bit 1 2 bits Transmission Wait Time Oto 20 to 99 0 to 99 ms Default settings are highlighted IE Communications Data Length 7 8 bit 7 8 bits Parameter Protocol Selection 252 Descriptions The communications protocol can be set to CompoWay F OMRON S unified protocol for general purpose serial communica tions or Modbus based on RTU Mode of Modbus Protocol specifi cations PI MBUS 300 Rev l of Modicon Inc Communications Unit No L a When performing communications with a host computer a unit number must be set for each Controller to allow the host computer to recognize it Any number from O to 99 can be set The unit number is set to 1 by default When using multiple Controllers make sure that no Controllers have the same unit number or communica tions will not take place correctly After setting a unit number turn OFF the power and then turn it ON
189. B AT Execute 7 26 Response Slave Function Writestart Operation Related address code address code information CRC 16 im im Tim 2 2 1 1 2 Related EN 00 Current PID set number x 01 to 08 PID set number 1 to 8 i 10 Current PID set number PELOTO 1G 11 to 18 PID set number 1 to 8 30 Current PID set number 31 to 38 PID set number 1 to 8 FO Current PID set number F1 to F8 PID set number 1 to 8 H 30 to 38 H FO to F8 This command executes AT On the E5AR T ER T the PID set number must be specified when executing AT To specify the current PID set number the PID set currently used for operation set the lower byte of the related information to O This command is used in setting area O An operation error will occur if it is used in setting area 1 An operation error will also occur in the following cases e f the Run Reset parameter is set to Reset for the specified channel e f the Auto Manual parameter is set to Manual for the specified channel To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command Slave Function Write start Operation Related address code address code information CRC 16 H00 00 H 03 1 1 2 2 2 The response for a normal end is shown above For information on error responses refer to 7 7 Operation Commands P 7 15 7 9 Commands and Responses I B AT Cancel Slave
190. CH2 when using cascade control the PID set number selected for channel 1 will be used for the other channels For example if the channel 1 PID set number is set to O the PID set for each channel i e channels 2 to 4 will be selected automatically Setting range Unit Default value 008008 07 09 Related Information PID Sets in 5 2 Control Functions P 5 10 8 19 I Section 8 Parameters CH Alarm Set Number CH Setting Wait Band Upper Limit Wait Band Lower Limit 8 20 n Setting ali pow Alarm function enabled This parameter is used to set the alarm set number for each program If this parameter is set to 0 for channels 2 to 4 when using coordi nated operation or for the secondary side channel 2 when using cascade control the alarm set number selected for channel 1 will be used for the other channels Setting range Unit Default value 1104 See note 5 l fSeonoe Note The setting range is O to 4 for channels 2 to 4 when using coordi nated operation and for the secondary side channel 2 when using cascade control The default is O Related Information 8 7 Alarm Set Setting Level P 8 36 yu 1 or CH 2 for independent operation nm n He yu ya nm x These parameters are used to set the wait operation e The Wait Band Upper Limi
191. CTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STHICT LIABILITY In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY REPAIR OR OTHER CLAIMS HEGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED STORED INSTALLED AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION ABUSE MISUSE OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR Application Considerations SUITABILITY FOR USE OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards codes or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer s application or use of the products At the customer s request OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product machine system or other application or use The following are some examples of applications for which pa
192. CompoWay F Communications E Composite Read Registration 6 24 Response Variable MRC SRC Variable type Read address Bit position type Read address Bit position Variable type Read address Bit position Parameters 0000 to 0008 0100 to 0108 2 C4 EN Monitor values 0200 to 0208 0300 to 0308 0000 to 004F C5 to CB 0100 to 014F Tapa 44 rion Parameters in setting area O 77077 0300 to O34F CC to D3 Parameters in setting area 1 This command is used to store the addresses of multiple monitor values or set values that you wish to read The stored monitor values or set values can be read by sending a single Composite Read from Variable Area command Up to 20 items can be stored even if the addresses are not consecutive To specify variable types and addresses refer to Appendix Setting Lists P A 6 The upper limit of an address depends on the variable type This command can be used in both setting area O and setting area 1 MRC SRC Response code Response Codes The response for a normal end is shown above For the response codes refer to 6 5 Read from Variable Area P 6 10 6 9 Commands and Responses I E Composite Read Registration Confirmation Command MRC SRC This command is used to check the contents that were stored using the Composite Read Registration command Response SRC r code Variable type Read address Variable type Read address Bit p
193. Default value m ar Stop control m m m Stop control r Fixed control If the Operation at Reset parameter is set to Fixed Control control during reset is executed using the value set for the Fixed SP parameter Control does not stop mp C Lt Coordinated operation hm This parameter is used to select whether coordinated operation is executed using the channel 1 present SP or the PV Setting range Default value F m Present value nu n Present set point rere I n Present set point Related Information Operating Programs Using Multiple Channels in 5 2 Control Functions P 5 11 Related Parameters Set Point Offset Adjustment Level P 8 32 Independent Operation Coordinated Operation Control Initial Setting Level P 8 59 8 13 Control Initial Setting 2 Level i 2 8 13 Control Initial Setting 2 Level This level contains Initial setting parameters for processing functions including control transfer output assignments event input assignments auxiliary output assignments and first order lag operation enable disable settings Level Changes at Startup Up To Control Initial Setting 2 Level Power on Program Adjustment Alarm Set Setting Level Setting I Level J Level key less L key less L key less key less key less I than 1 s than 1 s t
194. E vvv id 6 9 DOE VAISS va a aaa R aaa Dad na 6 9 6 5 Head rom Variable Alea e iv Ae ate EE d l 6 10 6 6 Write to Variable Area s nnne nennen nennen 6 11 6 7 Operation Commands 2 uu 6 13 06 8 ASC MUNG ATOSS u uuu S R Ea pU Rua eee RUP tay esas khu neto Ea naman 6 15 6 9 Commands and Responses 6 17 Reading Monitor Values 6 17 Reading Set Vales ers s LA ADU ou cients 6 18 Composite Read from Variable Area 6 19 Writing Set Values in Protect Level 6 21 Writing Set Value a da a 6 21 oet Value Compound WING mas 6 23 Composite Read Registration 6 24 Composite Read Registration Confirmation 6 25 Composite Registration Read 6 25 Communications Writing 6 26 miS RESET arerin OO ST 6 26 AT TKO CUMS i is n 6 27 AL Cancalu rc 6 28 NUH Moda Bo Aa fund 6 28 Save RAM Data 6 30 Sollware MOSEL ea a x div 6 30 Move to Setinig Area T sy
195. FF timing is set using the Time Signal 1 ON Time 1 to Time Signal 6 ON Time 3 and Time Signal 1 OFF Time 1 to Time Signal 6 OFF Time 3 parameters The default setting is 0 00 or 0 00 0 Set the interval between the switch ON time and switch OFF time to at least 100 ms Unexpected operation may result if the interval is less than 100 ms ON Conditions e f the switch OFF time is shorter than the switch ON time the output remains ON from when the switch ON time has elapsed until reset or the next program starts e f an advance operation is executed during a segment where a time signal is set a time equivalent to the segment will be considered to have elapsed In the above diagram for example outputs remain ON from the start of the next segment until the switch OFF time has elapsed The time signal is turned OFF under the following conditions e During a reset When one program has been completed when a program repeat or program link operation has been set The time signal timer stops during hold wait and AT operations One of following functions can be selected Segment Output Time Signal or Segment No Output described later Up to 10 outputs can be set for each program if using segment outputs is selected Segment outputs can be set to ON or OFF for each segment Outputs are turned ON if the Segment Output parameter for that segment is set to ON 5 7 Program Operation Functions I Time parameter setting
196. H Position proportional Control Model n Travel Time e Set the time from when the valve is completely open to when the valve is completely closed e This parameter is automatically set when the Motor Calibration parameter is executed Setting range Unit Default value a s Setting Related Parameters Motor Calibration Control Initial Setting 2 Level P 8 72 8 73 Section 8 Parameters 8 14 Alarm Setting Level 1 3 This level contains parameters for the type and output operation of alarms including alarm types close in alarm open in alarm settings and latch settings Level Changes at Startup Up To Alarm Setting Level Power on d Level F level _ key less than 1 s 1s 3s or more or more Program Setting Adjustment key less _ key less than 1 s than 1 s Control stops Alarm Set Setting Level e ren key less key less than 1 s than 1 s Alarm Setting Level Time Signal Setting Level _ key less __ key less than 1 s than 1 s Setting i ntrol Initial ntrol Initial Displ M r 7 Alarm Setting Adjustment I Level key T Leve ey Lene o WE less than 1 s less than 1 s less
197. H O H 0 ting Area 1 H Move to Pro H 0 H O tect Level H Auto Manual H O to 3 F H O Auto Mode H 1 Manual Mode AT Cancel HO to 3 F H O Cancel 0 Parameter H 0 H Initialization 7 15 2 2 2 2 04 1 05 1 06 1 07 1 08 1 09 1 I Section 7 Modbus Communications Operation Description Related information code Upper Byte Lower Byte H OC Alarm Latch H O to 3 F 2 HO Cancel SP Mode H 0 to 3 F 2 H 0 PSP H1 RSP H2 FSP H 12 Hold H O to 3 F 2 H O Hold Cancel H 1 Hold 1 Executed for all channels 2 Specify the channel 0 CH1 1 CH2 2 CH3 3 CH4 F All channels Note When all channels is specified only enabled channels will respond and processing will begin from channel 1 If an error is detected on any one channel an operation error will occur If all channels end normally a normal end will occur Response Frame Slave Function Write start address code address Write data CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 Data name Description Slave address The value from the command frame appears here This is the received function code In an error response frame H 80 is added to the received function code to indicate that it is an error Function code response Example Received function code H 06 Function code in error response frame H 86 Beginning Beginning address of write that was received address of write Written data Received operation command data This is the check
198. L Communications Protocol Selection CWF or MOD U NO Communications Unit No 0 to 99 BPS Communications Speed 19 6 19 2 or 38 4 LEN Communications Data Length 7 0r8 Communications Stop Bit 10r2 PRTY Communications Parity NONE EVEN or ODD SDWT Transmission Wait Time 10 to 99 8 84 8 16 Communications Setting Level L 5 Communications Protocol Selection PEL e This parameter is used to select the communications protocol Selections are CompoWay F OMRON s unified protocol for general purpose serial communications or Modbus Modicon Inc s protocol based on RTU Mode of Modbus Protocol Specifications PI MBUS 300 Rev J A Setting range Unit Default value Es LYF CompoWay F rur nad Modbus mE ESSO BOUE Setting Communications Unit No Li e After changing the communications unit number setting execute a software reset or turn the power OFF and ON to make the change effective Setting range Unit Default value be E hi Setting mp 4 mp Lx Communications Speed ju software reset or turn the power OFF and ON to make the change effective pe e After changing the communications speed setting execute a A Setting range Unit Default value e Setting Bo mm 8 85 l Section 8 Parameters nx Protocol is Com
199. Level is described in 5 5 Protecting Settings P 5 23 This command is used in setting area 0 An operating error will occur if it is used in setting area 1 To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command MRC SRC Response code Hesponse Codes The response for a normal end is shown above For the response codes refer to 6 7 Operation Commands P 6 13 Instruction Related code information Related Description information Operation mode Auto 6 31 I Section 6 CompoWay F Communications Hesponse Related Description Operation mode 40 Auto 11 Manual 20 Auto 3 217 Manual 30 Auto 31 FO Auto F1 Manual Use this command to select automatic or manual operation This command is used in setting area 0 An operating error vvill occur if it is used in setting area 1 To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications VVriting operation command MRC SRC Response code Response Codes The response for a normal end is shown above For the response codes refer to 6 7 Operation Commands P 6 13 M Parameter Initialization 6 32 Hesponse Instruction Related MRC SRC code information iyl lv lv This command returns all settings to the default settings This command is used in setting area 1 An operating error will occur if
200. M 6 output 2 EMT 4 to 20 mA 500 Q max EV2 Ha o 2 2 D 0 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max 6 I Switched by output E 7 I r I i type setting 4 1 4 ZH Ie OUT3 i ig Pi t c T dm iz a el We PT TC urrent output n daa 1 i i i D 4 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max 1 mul NN l 0 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max G eee t K L T Switched by output type setting V PT TC Input 1 i I lt _ Current Voltage Thermocouple p IT Platinum resistance thermometer 7 Em PT Tc Current Voltage Thermocouple Platinum resistance thermometer N Note With the the power supply voltage must be 100 to 120 V for UL compliance With the E5AR T the power supply voltage must be 100 to 240 V for CE marking compliance Section 2 Preparations E5AR TC43DW FLK 2 loop Controller E5AR TQQE3MW FLK 2 loop Controller
201. M Preparations E5AR T ER T Input power supply Cold junction compensator 0 C 32 F Compensating leads e Use a cold junction compensator for calibration of internal thermo couples and set it to O C The internal thermocouple should be disabled end open e STV in the diagram is a DC reference current voltage generator Prepare compensating leads appropriate for the selected thermo couple A cold junction compensator and compensating leads for a K thermocouple can be used for thermocouples R S E B and W Connecting the cold A correct input value cannot be obtained if the compensation wire connector is junction compensator touched during thermocouple calibration Therefore to connect or disconnect the cold junction compensator short circuit enable or open circuit disable the tip of the thermocouple inside the cold junction compensator while keeping the compensation wire connected as shown in the diagram Cold junction compensator Cold junction compensator E5AR ER T Compensating wire Compensating wire 9 5 I Section 9 User Calibration Input types 2 4 7 8 10 14 r 9 6 Follow these steps to perform calibration when thermocouple input is selected Connect the pow
202. N Enabled Broken line Approximation 1 Input 1 to 1 999 to 9 999 Broken line Approximation 1 Input 20 Broken line Approximation 1 Output 1 to 1 999 to 9 999 Broken line Approximation 1 Output 20 5 6 5 1 Input Adjustment Functions I E Extraction of Square Root Extraction of Square Root e An extraction of square root operation is supported for each input to 1 Enabled allow direct input of the signal from a pressure differential flow meter To use the extraction of square root operation set the Extraction of Square Root Enabled parameter to ON the default setting is OFF e The extraction of square root function includes an Extraction of Square Root Low cut Point parameter that will set the result to O Extraction of Square Root 1 Low cut Point when the result of the operation is below the low cut point The lovv cut point is set for each input using normalized data so that the lower limit of the input setting range is 0 000 and the upper limit is 1 000 Operation result Lovv cut point Input data Default Setting range Vale OFF Disabled 0 000 to 9 999 0 000 E Other Input Adjustments The following input adjustment functions are also available These functions are explained in Section 8 Parameters P 8 1 e Sensor Ind
203. OFF ON SET ON OFF Segment output j L PL e Segment outputs are turned OFF during a reset 5 35 I Section 5 Functions and Operations ll Program Status Outputs The following two types of program status outputs can be used Program End 5 36 Output Segment No Output Program End Output Output at the end of the program Segment No Output The number of the segment for which the program is being executed is output The program end output occurs at the end of the last segment The program end output occurs at the end of the last segment of the last program if a program repeat or program link operation is set The pulse width for the program end output can be set using the Program End ON Time parameter SP Last segment Time Program Ld Lo End Output Program End ON Time The setting range for the Program End ON Time parameter is 0 0 to 10 0 s The default setting is 0 0 The program end output is forced OFF if the Run Reset parameter is changed to Run during a reset If the Program End ON Time parameter is set to ON the output also remains ON during reset status i e until the Run Reset parameter changes to Run One out of following functions can be selected Segment No Output Time Signal or Segment Output The number of the segment for which the program is currently being executed is output in binary coded hexadecimal Segment N
204. Okey VisetT Okey LEIJ Okey Level EEA t less than 1 s less than 1 s less than 1 s Control in progress Parameter Changes within PID Setting Level PID Setting Level Prd P PID8 Proportional Band 00 999 99 Standard See note 1 8 1 PID8 Integral Time 0 0 3999 99 Standard Position Proportional closed control See note 2 8 D PID8 Derivative Time 0 0 3999 9 8 OL H PID8 MV Upper Limit MV Lower Limit 0 1 105 0 Standard Position Proportional closed control See note 3 8 OL L PID8 MV Lower Limit 5 0 MV Upper Limit 0 1 Standard Position Proportional closed control See note 4 8 AUT PID8 Automatic Selection Range Upper Limit 19999 to 99999 Note 1 Position proportional Control Model 0 01 999 99 2 Position proportional Control Model with Floating Control 0 1 3999 9 3 Heating Cooling 0 0 105 0 4 Heating Cooling 105 0 0 0 8 39 Section 8 Parameters CH Display PID Selection m n CH Setting PID Proportional Band PID Integral Time PID Derivative Time 1 to 8 8 40 f m Setting 4 1 Use this parameter to select the PID set that you wish to display n Fa n
205. P Segment 2 Segment 3 Segment 4 1 1 I 1 I Program 1 I 1 I 0 0 77777 r 4 7 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control Power ON Operation Level Present Value PV SP Program No or Segment No Hold down for at least 3 seconds Control stops Display No 3 will show Input Initial Setting Level Input Initial Setting Level Input type is Input 1 Type displayed e K 1 200 0 to 1300 0 C Input Initial Level 11 Change the input input Tube 1 Refer to input type setting gl Pt100 1 200 0 to 850 0 C list and keys P 4 10 Press less than 1 second P Display No 3 will show L Control Initial Setting Level Control Initial Setting Level e 2 Refer to output Check the output Output 1 Type type list type Pulse voltage output P 4 21 Dotted arrow Y indicates that the key Check the control Come 77 is pressed several mod u Standard control times to switch to desired parameter m Press twice less than 1 second Display No 3 will show 3 Alarm Setting Level Alarm Setting Level Change the alarm Alarm 1 Type e 3 Refer to alarm type with the c8 Absolute Value type list and keys Upper Limit Alarm P 4 38
206. Programmable Digital Controller USER S MANUAL Introduction OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual This manual describes the functions performance and application methods needed for optimum use of the E5AR T ER T Programmable Digital Controllers Please observe the following items when using the ESAR T ER T Programmable Digital Controllers e This product is designed for use by qualified personnel with a knowledge of electrical systems e Read this manual carefully and make sure you understand it well to ensure that you are using the E5AR T ER T Programmable Digital Controllers correctly e Keep this manual in a safe location so that it is available for reference when required Precautions on Using the Product Before using the Controller under the following conditions make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the Controller are sufficient for the systems machines and equipment and be sure to provide the systems machines and equipment with double safety mechanisms and also consult your OMRON representative e Using the Controller under conditions which are not described in the manual e Applying the Controller to nuclear control systems railroad systems aviation systems vehicles combustion systems medical equipment amusement machines safety equipment and other systems machines and equipm
207. QE se ewes bumes 244 2021 L000 Puras uonisod UN LL n al Daag al In af Du Du eu x ToU m al a v L X C Ki DN 2 On c 4 4 md 2 al Val i al XJ Ond LT al LLL 2 x D Lt at Ci A Q 5 LLI W TET TE Lu cu w 222 2 1 HO 1L000000 H 91 dG4d 01000000 H GL Oud 40000000 L IN V 30000000 L 1 40000000 CL 8 20000000 H LL 8 80000000 H 01 AGVV V0000000 H 6 ACV 60000000 OHY 80000000 H OHY 0000000 9 90000000 H 8 4 Z N 9 S r F0000000 H H H 0000000 H 2 LSH 20000000 1 NAY 10000000 H 0 440 00000000H L 6 E 1ojyuou 6umes suoneoiunuJuioo BIA Buuojuoui pue Dunes JO de H Aq pexijeJd sen eA 4o uoul um s tdd 0021 0000 voneayemuseueied 7 ea um S uonoun i peoueApy A 35 Appendix uoneunBiuoo y jo enjeA WINWIXeW eui si pue japow eui uo spuedep sjeuueuo pejqeue Jo aqnu y JO Hues eu eu Z sjeuueuo indui p 10 Z UMA sjepoui 10 H2 pue jeuueuo ndul euo YUM sjepoui JO Hd S 1nejep v by JOA uoneJqi e2 01 AOLN is
208. Reset operation command The default setting is Communications Writing Disabled This command can be used in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 MRC SRC Response code Hesponse Codes The response for a normal end is shown above For the response codes refer to 6 7 Operation Commands P 6 13 Instruction Related MRC SRC code information Related Description information Control state o wo 1 un 2 n 21 U 30 All 4 6 9 Commands and Responses I Hesponse B AT Execute This command is used to start or reset control This command can be used in setting area O If All is selected for the channel only the channels that are enabled will be affected by this command To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command MRC SRC Response code Hesponse Codes The response for a normal end is shown above For the response codes refer to 6 7 Operation Commands P 6 13 Instruction Related MRC SRC code information Related Description EE iL 00 Current PID set number 01 to 08 PID set number 1 to 8 10 to 18 20 to 28 30 to 38 FO to F8 This command executes AT On the E5AR T ER T the PID set number must be specified when executing AT To specify the current PID set number the PID set currently being used for operation set the lower byte of the related informatio
209. Section 8 Parameters CH SP Mode SPA Operation at Reset parameter set to Stop Control or Control Mode parameter set to Remote SP or Proportional Control e Use this parameter to select the SP mode I In Program SP Mode the SP corresponding to the set program will be used for control In Remote SP Mode the remote SP specified by an external input e g 4 to 20 mA will be the SP In Fixed SP Mode the value set for the Fixed SP parameter will be used as the SP The default setting for this parameter is Program SP Mode For coordination operation CH2 to CH4 and the cascade control secondary side CH2 the default is Remote SP Mode Furthermore if the Operation at Reset parameter is set to Fixed Control all control will be in Fixed SP Mode except for the cascade control secondary side CH2 Use the A and M Keys to select 57 Program SP for Program SP Mode Select 5 Remote SP for Remote SP Mode When Fixed SP Mode is selected the RSP indicator lights Select 252 Fixed Operation SP for Fixed SP Mode When Fixed SP Mode is selected the FSP indicator lights e When cascade control is used cascade open secondary loop independent control takes place when the SP mode of channel 2 is Fixed SP Mode and cascade closed cascade control takes place when the SP mode is Remote SP Mode e For coordinated operation channels 2 to 4 will be in Remote SP Mode Related In
210. Setting Level Time Signal Setting Level Approxi mation Setting Level or Monitor Item Level The display will also not flash to indicate the move e Setting Change Protection Prevents use of the IA and Keys Set Changing set values 5 value using key operations Setting e All parameters in Protect Level e Move to Advanced Function Set ting Level Move to Calibration Level e Program Editing e Segment Editing e Display Set Setting Level e Display PID Selection Prohibited e The Setting Change Protection parameter is set to OFF by default e PF Key Protection Prevents use of the PF1 and PF2 Keys 7 d Changing set values using key operations Setting OFF PF1 PF2 Keys are enabled PF1 PF2 Keys are disabled operation as a function key and ON qu channel key is disabled e The PF Key Protection parameter is set to OFF by default 8 5 Section 8 Parameters 8 3 Operation Level Display this level to operate the control system The SP can be set and the PV monitored in this level Level Changes at Startup Up To Operation Level lar Cd M cc cce 707 Adiustment Adiustment 2 Level Level Level LL ey Vseif 7 14 key 142 key less less than 1 s less than 1 s less than 1 s key less than 1 s than 1 s Approximation Y f Time Signal Alarm Set Setting Set
211. Switched by output l type setting 5 C te tn 6 OUT1 1 pe TUN n 6 to m max F v PT TCK 9 v s MA DC 500 Q max Current Voltage Thermocouple Switched by output Platinum resistance thermometer type setting ZN J Note With the E5AR T the power supply voltage must be 100 to 120 V for UL compliance With the E5AR T the power supply voltage must be 100 to 240 V for CE marking compliance 2 4 2 2 Using the Terminals E5AR TQE3MB FLK E5AR TCE3MB FLK Auxiliary outputs Auxiliary outputs Transistor outputs Transistor outputs U 100 to 240 VAC PM Fe 4 o s A SUB1 B SUB6 C 100 to 240 VAC B SUB1 B SUB6 C lt 2 Q SUB2 B SUB7 C 3 N J SUB2 B SUB7 C 4 A SUB3 B SuBs C Q 7 SUB3 B SUB8 C QO SUB4 B SUB9 C 6 SUBA B SUBe C 5 5 p SUB5 B SUB10 C i 6 I T SUB10 C 4 6 7 g P IN Event inputs Event inputs EV3 E EV7 D x EV4 E EV8 D Ho s EV5 E EV9 D H om EV3 E EV7 D EV4 E EV8 D H o gt EV5 E EV9 D OI OO N O O1 AION C 1 5 EV6 E EV10 D 1
212. Variable Area Variable Variable type Address Bit position type Address Bit position _ Variable type Address Bit position Variable Address iiit 0000 to 0008 1 0100 to 0108 CA Monitor values 0200 to 0208 0300 to 0308 6 19 I Section 6 CompoWay F Communications 6 20 Hesponse Parameters Variable Address 0000 to 004F to CB 0100 to 014F Parameters in setting area O D8 to D9 9200 to 024 0300 to 034F CC to D3 Parameters in setting area 1 0300 to 033B Multiple monitor values or set values can be read by sending a single command Up to 20 items can be read even if the addresses are not consecutive To specify variable types and addresses refer to Appendix Setting Lists P A 6 The upper limit of an address depends on the variable type This command can be used in both setting area O and setting area 1 If an area type error or a set value error occurs in any of the data being read no data will be read SRC Response code Variable type Data 0000 Monitor value Set value Variable type Data Monitor value Set value Response Codes The response for a normal end is shown above For the response codes refer to 6 5 Read from Variable Area P 6 10 6 9 Commands and Responses I B Writing Set Values in Protect Level Response B Writing Set Values Variable Number of MRC SRC type Address Bit position elemen
213. X Unit Default value T E setting of Number of Segments parame Related Information 4 8 Program Settings P 4 23 I Section 8 Parameters CH Segment Editing Segment Set Point Segment Rate of Rise Segment Time CH Wait 8 18 f m Setting Seung f a Setting Reference nx X e uu CH1 or CH2 for independent operation Segment Rate of Rise during Rate of Rise programming only Li LO w nm a These parameters are used to make segment settings The Segment Editing parameter is used to set the segment number of the segment to be set e The Segment Set Point parameter is used to set the set point for each segment During rate of rise programming the Segment Set Point parameter is used to set the destination set point The Segment Rate of Rise parameter is used to set the amount of change per rate of rise programming time unit The Segment Time parameter is used to set the segment time For rate of rise programming the Segment Time parameter is used to set the soak segment time value Segment Editing Emad 1 to setting of Number EU of Segments Used parameter Segment Rate of O to 99 999 EU Hise Segment Time 0 00 to 99 59 or 0 00 0 to Program 99 59 9 time unit Related Information 4 8 Program Settings P 4 23 Segment Set Point SP lower limit to SP upper li
214. a eo te PP wm gw Variable type Address Bit position Data er xo i Parameters 1 0000 to 004F C5 to CB 0100 to 014F 08 to D9 9200 to 024F Parameters in setting area O 0300 to 034F 0000 to 0100 to 013B CC to D3 Parameters in setting area 1 0200 to 023B 0300 to Multiple set values can be written by sending a single command Up to 12 items can be written even if the addresses are not consecutive To specify variable types and addresses refer to Appendix Setting Lists P A 6 Parameters in setting area 1 is written in setting area 1 An operation error will occur if parameters are written in setting area 0 To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command To store the set values for Operation Program Setting Adjustment Adjustment 2 Alarm Set Setting PID Setting Time Signal Setting or Approximation Setting Level in EEPROM select Backup Mode and execute the RAM Write Mode command If Backup Mode is not selected the set values will not remain in memory when the power is turned OFF For more information on the above levels refer to 4 1 Setting Levels and Key Operations P 4 2 MRC SRC Response code Response Codes The response for a normal end is shown above For the response codes refer to 6 6 Write to Variable Area P 6 11 6 23 Section 6
215. a function key set as a channel key is pressed the channel will change and the first parameter in Operation Level of the new channel will be displayed e f the other function key is pressed and it is also set to Monitor Setting Items the first monitor setting item set for that key will be displayed f the other function key is pressed and it is set to a function other than Monitor Setting Items the set function will be activated Display No 3 operates as follows while displaying Monitor Setting Items f the PV SP or MV is displayed Display No 3 monitors shows the MV e Otherwise the display goes OFF Other Display and Key Adjustment Functions Other display and key adjustment functions are available These functions are explained in Section 8 Parameters Bar Graph Display Item E5AR T only Display Adjustment Level Automatic Display Return Time Display Adjustment Level Display Refresh Period Display Adjustment Level Monitor Item Level Setting Display Adjustment Level PV Decimal Point Display Initial Setting Level 5 22 5 5 Protecting Settings 5 5 Protecting Settings B Protection Operation Adjustment Protection Operation Adjustment Protection Protection is used to restrict access to settings in order to prevent accidental changes to the settings The following protection can be set Operation Adjustment Protection Initial Setting Prot
216. able Area 6 11 Operation Comlmarids c 6 13 6 15 Commands and Responses 6 17 Program Example 6 40 CompoWay F g Less p 5 9 l I Section 6 CompoWay F Communications 6 1 Communications Method E CompoWay F Communications CompoWay F is an OMRON protocol for general purpose serial communications CompoWay F features a unified frame format and FINS compliant commands which have a long record of successful use with OMRON Programmable Controllers CompoWay F simplifies communications between multiple components and between compo nents and a computer FINS Factory Interface Network Service FINS is a protocol for message communications between Controllers on an OMRON factory automation network Communications are implemented by creating a program on the host computer The descriptions in this section are therefore from the perspective of the host computer For example reading and writing refer to the host computer reading from and writing to the Te E Communications Specifications ae Transfer connection Communications method RS 485 2 wire half duplex Synchronization method Error detection Vertical parity None even or odd BCC Block Check Character Communications buffer Communications 0 to 99 ms response send wa
217. adjustment Disturbance overshoot adjustment Time value Disturbance Overshoot OFF Disabled OFF Adjustment Function ON Enabled Disturbance Gain 1 00 to 1 00 065 Disturbance Time Constant 0 01 to 99 99 10 Disturbance Rectification 0 000 to 9 999 FS 0 000 Band Disturbance Judgement 2 5 3 Output Adjustment Functions I 5 3 Output Adjustment Functions B MV Limits MV Upper Limit Upper and lower limits can be applied to the output of the calculated MV e When using ON OFF control the MV will be the value set for the MV Upper Limit parameter when the output is ON and the value set for the MV Lower Limit parameter when the output is OFF e The MV limit function does not operate when floating control is selected on a Position proportional Control Model he following MVs take precedence over the MV limit function Manual MV MV at Reset MV at PV Error MV Upper Limit and MV Lower Limit parameters can also be set in PID sets Output MV Upper Limit MV Lower Limit e For heating cooling control overall upper and lower limits are set for heating and cooling Separate limits cannot be set Output Heating MV Cooling MV MV Upper Limit MV Lower Limit Default value Standard control MV lower limit 0 1 to 105 0 100 0 MV Upper Limit Paramet
218. again to enable the new unit number Communications Speed 575 Set the baud rate for communications with a host computer The following speeds are possible 9 6 9 600 bit s 19 2 19 200 bit s or 38 4 38 400 bit s After setting the baud rate turn OFF the power and then turn it ON again to enable the new baud rate Communications Data Length L 4 The communications data length can be set to 7 bits or 8 bits Communications Stop Bit 55 The number of communications stop bits can be set to 1 or 2 bits Communications Parity P 5 The communications parity can be set to none nan even EuEn or odd add Transmission Wait Time 55 After changing the transmission wait time perform a software reset or turn the power OFF and then ON to enable the new setting 5 49 I Section 5 Functions and Operations For information on communications procedures refer to Section 6 CompoWay F Communications P 6 1 or Sec tion 7 Modbus Communications P 7 1 depending on the communications protocol you are using 6 Prodecdure Before performing communications perform the following steps to set the communications unit number communications speed and other communications parameters 1 Hold down the Key for 3 seconds to move from the Operation Level to the Input Initial Setting Level Protocol Selection c Communications Unit No Communications Speed ce Communications Data Length
219. ain a set proportional relationship between two variables Proportional control is set in the Analog Parameter 1 control rate parameter If the input type set for input 1 and input 2 are different the units for input 1 and input 2 must be adjusted Settings must be made for the following first the Straight line Approximation 1 parameters must be used to convert input 2 from normalized data to industrial units and then the Straight line Approximation 2 parameters must be used to convert the industrial units back to normalized data for input 1 Set all numeric values for straight line or broken line approximation for the ESAR T ER T to normalized data For example set 0 0200 for 2096 Also when input 1 is set to a K type thermocouple from 200 0 to 1300 00 200 0 C is 0 or 0 000 and 1300 C is 100 or 1 000 4 6 Selecting the Control Mode M Cascade Standard Control e Cascade control can be performed using standard control heating control or cooling control e Input 1 is for the primary loop channel 1 and input 2 is for the secondary loop channel 2 AT with Cascade 1 Execute AT for the secondary side to find the suitable PID Control constants IN2 Set the PV on the secondary side during stable control near the primary side SP as the fixed SP for the secondary side Set the channel 2 SP mode to Fixed SP Mode cascade open set the secondary side to independent control and execute AT Once AT has been com
220. ake sure that the setting is 5 SP Start Press the Key for less than 1 second to move from the Control Initial Setting Level to the Input Initial Setting Level and then press the el Key repeated to select Anau Move to Advanced Function Setting Level Press the Is Key and set the password to 169 to move to Advanced Function Setting Level Press the Key or less than 1 second to move from the Advanced Function Setting Level to the Expansion Control Setting Level Press the kel to select 2526 End Condition Press the Key to select the setting fant Continue Press the _ Key twice for at least 1 second to return to the Operation Level and then press the Key for less than 1 second to move from the Operation Level to the Adiustment Level n Press the el Key repeatedly to select 22 Control Period Heating and then press the Key to select 2 3 1 Standard Control MH Program Settings The following program is used in this example Temperature x Segment i Segment 2 Segment Segment a x Segment 6 End Condition Continue Setting Procedure 1 Press the Key for less than 1 second to move to the Program Setting Level Prin Program Editing will be displayed Set the program number to 1 Program Setting Level
221. al Setting Level P 8 50 Input Temperature Units Input Initial Setting Level P 8 51 Scaling Input Value 1 Scaling Display Value 1 Scaling Input Value 2 Scaling Display Value 2 and Decimal Point Position Input Initial Setting Level P 8 51 Hemote SP Upper Limit and Remote SP Lower Limit Input Initial Setting Level P 8 52 PV Decimal Point Display Input Initial Setting Level P 8 53 SP Upper Limit and SP Lower Limit Control Initial Setting Level P 8 57 SP Mode Adjustment Level P 8 24 8 9 I Section 8 Parameters CH Program No CH Hold 8 10 p n Setting 1 Operation w ju w rn un This parameter sets the number of the program to be executed This parameter can be set only during a reset Setting or monitor range Unit Default value Note The range depends on the values set for the Independent Operation Coordinated Operation parameter and Number of Segments parameter Related Parameters Independent Operation Coordinated Operation Control Initial Setting Level P 8 59 Number of Segments Control Initial Setting Level P 8 60 P LOL EI Running e This parameter is used to hold the timer for program operation e The hold is cleared by executing a reset or executing a clear hold command e The hold is enabled when this parameter is set to un e The default is 622 Clear Hold Related Information 5 7 P
222. alve opening 0 100 If the PV is within the PV dead band control is performed as if the PV is the same as the SP The PV dead band is set in the PV Dead Band parameter This function is useful to prevent unnecessary outputs when the PV approaches the SP 4 6 Selecting the Control Mode 6 Operation at Potentiometer Input Error The Operation at Potentiometer Input Error parameter is used to select the operation to perform if an error occurs with the potentiometer during closed control The selections are to stop control or switch to floating control and continue Potentiometer errors are not detected if the O or C lines are disconnected on the potentiometer This function i e the option of stopping control or switching to float ing control is not supported in such cases 4 19 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 4 7 Setting Output Parameters M Control Period The output period control period must be set A shorter control period improves controllability however when a relay is used to control a heater a control period of at least 20 seconds is recom mended to preserve product life After setting the control period in the initial settings readjust it as necessary using trial operation Set the values in 22 Control Period Heating and Control Period Cooli
223. ameter is a AT is executed by pressing the Key to select the PID set number AT cannot be executed while control is stopped e Select 0 to specify the PID set currently being used for control Select a number from 1 to 8 to specify a PID set number e The AT Execute Cancel parameter automatically returns to a when finished e The SP flashes if the Present Value PV Preset Set Point parameter is monitored during AT e The channel cannot be changed during AT Related Information 4 10 Determining the PID Constants AT or Manual Settings P 4 33 Related Parameters PID Proportional Band PID Integral Time and PID Derivative Time PID Setting Level P 8 40 SE Models that support communications e This parameter enables or disables the writing of set values from a host computer to the Controller e The default setting is 622 Disabled Select a to enable or a to disable writing set values via communi cations Related Parameters Communications Protocol Selection Communications Setting Level P 8 85 Communications Unit No Communications Setting Level P 8 85 Communications Speed Communications Setting Level P 8 85 Communications Data Length Communications Setting Level P 8 86 Communications Stop Bit Communications Setting Level P 8 86 Communications Parity Communications Setting Level P 8 86 Transmission Wait Time Communications Setting Level P 8 87 8 23 I
224. ameters Linear Current Output Type Control Initial Setting Level P 8 56 Output 1 Type and Output 3 Type Control Initial Setting Level P 8 56 8 65 I Section 8 Parameters mx mf I Event Input Assignment 1 to 10 pes e Use these parameters to assign event input functions Setting range Default n Disable 0 Setting dca M Writing OFF ON 1 Channel 1 Program No bit O weight 1 Channel 1 Program No bit 1 weight 2 Channel 1 Program No bit 2 weight 4 Channel 1 Program No bit 3 weight 8 Channel 1 Program No bit 4 weight 1 Channel 1 Program No bit 5 weight 32 Channel 1 Program No bit O weight 10 Channel 1 Program No bit 2 weight 20 Channel 1 Run ON Reset OFF 10 Channel 1 Run OFF Reset ON 11 Channel 1 Auto OFF Manual ON 12 Channel 1 Program SP OFF Remote SP ON Channel 1 Remote SP OFF Fixed SP ON 14 Channel 1 Program SP OFF Fixed SP ON 15 Channel 1 Program SP 16 Channel 1 Remote SP 17 Channel 1 Fixed SP 18 Channel 1 Hold ON Hold clear OFF 19 Channel 1 Advance 20 Channel 1 Back 21 Similarly Channel 2 22 to 41 Channel 3 42 to 61 Channel 4 62 to 81 e If the same setting is selected for different Event Input Assignment parameters the event input for which ON OFF is determined last will be effective When the power is turned ON and the same program number assignment is repeated the event input with the high
225. ameters for communications such as parameters for the protocol selection communications unit number and communications speed Level Changes at Startup Up To Communications Setting Level Operation Ead Adjustment Adjustment 2 7 Set PID Setting 2777 777 ee W J evel ee pag evel Level T Erg devel Level TEED I key less _ key less key less key less key less key less key less I I than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s i 4 key less than 1 s key key 1s 3s Control stops ee n 1 Input Initial Control Initial Control Initial Display Communications Setting Setting Setting uU Adiustment Setting 1 I X Level Level 2Levellt c eve Level evel _ key I less than 1 s less than 1 s less than 1 s less than 1 s less than 1 s 1 key less than 1 s L dmm x mm t s ss to es 5 5 anm 5 e rd 1 amm EE mE CO Control in progress Gs Control stopped Parameter Changes within Communications Setting Level Communications Setting Level PSE
226. and 16 7 Press the Key cel The display at the left will appear u Set the STV as follows e Input types 15 and 16 1 mA e Input types 17 and 18 1V Input type 19 1V 8 Wait until the count on Display No 2 is sufficiently stable and then press the sz Key This tentatively registers the calibration data at this point 9 Press the Key The display at the left will appear This display will not appear if all of the required data has not been tentatively registered Press the Key Display No 2 will show 4 amp 5 Two seconds after the Key is released or when the el Key is pressed the tentatively registered calibration data will be stored in EEPROM If you do not wish to save the data in EEPROM press the kel Key instead of the A Key For a Controller with more than one input connect as explained in step 2 and repeat steps 5 to 9 e f linear current output is selected continue with the procedure in 9 6 Output Calibration P 9 12 10 Turn OFF the power to leave Calibration Mode 9 9 Section 9 User Calibration 9 5 Resistance Thermometer Calibration EBAR T ER T nput povver supply 6 dial resistance
227. anual Operation Level P 8 15 PF1 Setting and PF2 Setting Advanced Function Setting Level P 8 89 Manual Output Method and Manual MV Initial Value Expansion Control Setting Level P 8 101 8 3 Operation Level CH maaa a ss gt x a av rr r rr rr r rx Present Value PV Present Set Point PRG SEG e Setting e Display No 1 shows the PV and Display No 2 shows the present set point e The Program SP Fixed SP or the Remote SP is shown depending on the selected SP mode For a Remote SP the value can only be monitored P SP or R te SP Mod Fixed SP Mode rogram SF or Hemote oce FSP indicator flashes Present value PV Present value PV g c na m e c Monitor only Fixed SP Program No N Program No Segment No Segment No H E5AR E5AR e The decimal point position is determined by the selected sensor for a temperature input and by scaling for an analog input If the PV Decimal Point Display parameter is set to OFF for a temperature input digits below the decimal point are not shown Refer to Appendix Sensor Input Set ting Ranges and Display Control Ranges P A 4 Setting or monitor range Unit Default value Program SP or Fixed SP SP lower EU limit to SP upper limit Present Set Point Remote SP Remote SP lower limit to remote SP upper limit EU The SP limits are in effect Related Parameters Input Type Input Initi
228. appear on the display owitching between auto and manual is possible a maximum of 100 000 times If switching is performed more than 100 000 times the auto manual settings will not be written to EEPROM e During cascade control if the primary loop is switched to manual control when the secondary loop is in any of the following conditions the manual MV is disabled e The secondary loop is in Local SP Mode cascade open e The secondary loop is in Manual Mode e The operation set for an error is being performed for the secondary loop Position e When a potentiometer is connected MANU operation indicator proportional lights in Manual Mode The PV is displayed on Display No 1 the Control Models valve opening is displayed on Display No 2 and n is displayed on Display No 3 When a potentiometer is not connected Display No 2 shows E e To turn ON the open output press the Key To turn ON the close output press the is Key The MV is updated every 50 ms e When switching between Manual Mode and Auto Mode the action of the MV is balance less bumpless Other setting levels can be moved to in Manual Mode However the AT Execute Cancel parameter cannot be selected and does not appear on the display 4 47 l Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control e Switching between auto and manual is possible a maximum of 100 000 times e f switching is performed more than 100 000 times the auto manual settings w
229. ation 2 Enabled Control Initial Setting 2 Level P 8 71 8 47 I Section 8 Parameters Broken line Approximation 1 Input 1 to to Fred Broken line Approximation 1 Input 20 Broken line Approximation 1 Output 1 to to 2606 i Broken line Approximation 1 Broken line Approximation 1 Output 20 8 48 f e Setting is enabled Use these parameters to set values for broken line approximation 1 e Use these parameters to set the values for broken line approxi mation Up to 20 points can be specified for one broken line approxi mation Use normalized data for the values If Input n gt Input n 1 the setting of point n 1 will not be effective P5 disabled because P5 Input 5 lt Input 4 3 Operation result Outputo Te cos Output 2 6 point broken line approximation characteristics Output 1 ga P7 to 20 nput 1 Input2 Input3 Argument 1 Input data Disabled Broken line Approximation Input 1 to 1 999 to 0 000 Broken line Approximation 9 999 Input 20 Broken line Approximation Output 1 to 1 999 to 0 000 Broken line Approximation 9 999 Output 20 Related Information Broken line Approximation in 5 1 Input Adjustment Functions P 5 6 Related Parameters Broken line Approximation 1 Enabled Control Initial Setting 2 Level P 8 72 8 11 Input Initial Setting Level 27 8 11 Input Initial Setting Le
230. ations 7 23 writing in Protect Level CompoWay F communications 6 21 Modbus communications 7 22 setting and changing the SP 4 23 setting areas 6 15 Setting Change Protection 5 24 8 4 setting communications parameters 5 49 setting examples initial settings 4 7 setting levels 4 2 settings list A 6 saving 4 6 Software Reset CompoWay F communications 6 30 Modbus communications 7 29 SP limits 5 9 8 57 SP Mode 8 24 CompoWay F communications 6 33 Modbus communications 7 32 SP mode 5 43 SP modes 5 31 SP Tracking 5 32 8 98 specifications A 2 U V standard control 1 10 3 2 4 15 Write Mode standard control with remote SP 1 10 4 16 CompoWay F communications 6 28 standby 5 38 Modbus communications 7 27 standby sequence 5 25 Write via communication 5 50 Standby Sequence Reset 5 25 8 78 writing Standby Time 8 28 set values Start Display Scan after Power ON 8 83 CompoWay F communications 6 21 status Modbus communications 7 23 communications A 8 writing in Protect Level Step Time Rate of Rise Programming 8 60 set values straight line approximation 8 47 CompoWay F communications 6 21 Straight line Approximation Enabled 8 71 Modbus communications 7 22 SUB1 operation indicator 1 6 SUB2 operation indicator 1 6 SUB3 operation indicator 1 6 SUB4 operation indicator 1 6 temperature unit 4 14 Temporary AT Execution Judgement Deviation 8 102 terminal arrangements 2 4 thermocouple cal
231. ault value Data range Unit 0 1 to 20 0 Related Parameters Position proportional Dead Band Adjustment Level P 8 27 wa Lt nm 1 3 x This parameter is used to set the time from when the run command s executed until the program starts operation Setting parameter Unit Default value 0 00 to 99 59 Related Information Operation at Program Start in 5 7 Program Operation Functions P 5 37 CH MV at PV Error 8 5 Adjustment Level L Ag MV at Reset Standard Heating Cooling unr 9 the MV to output when operation is stopped On a Position propor tional Control Model the MV at Reset parameter is set to the position when operation is stopped Closed Hold Open If the Operation at Reset parameter is set to Fixed Control the MV cannot be used Pe On a Standard Control Model the MV at Reset parameter is set to On a Standard Control Model the MV at PV Error parameter is set to the MV to output when an error occurs On a Position proportional Control Model the MV at Reset parameter is set to the position when an error occurs Closed Hold Open e Standard Control Model Control method Setting range Unit Default value standard 5 0 to 105 0 o Heating Cooling 105 0 to 105 0 1000 A negative value is set for the cooling MV for heating cooling control Setting e Position proportional Control Model Control method Setting
232. band is centered on the SP Changing P Proportional Band A slow rise and a longer rec tification time will occur but there will be no overshoot When P is increased Overshoot and hunting will When P is occur but the SP will be decreased reached quickly and stabi lize Changing Integral Time A longer time will be required to reach the SP When P is m The rectification time will be increased longer but there is less hunt ing overshooting and under shooting Overshooting and under When P is 1 shooting will occur decreased Hunting will occur A quick rise will occur Less rectification time for When P is overshooting and under increased shooting but fine hunting will occur spontaneously Overshooting and under When P is shooting will be larger and decreased more time will be required to return to the SP 4 36 4 11 Using Auxiliary Outputs I 4 11 Using Auxiliary Outputs The Auxiliary Output Assignment Alarm Type Alarm Value Alarm Upper Limit Alarm Lower Limit and Alarm Set Number parameters are described in this section B Auxiliary Output Assignments The type of data that is output from each auxiliary output can be assigned On Controller models with more than one output data assignments can also be set for channels 2 and higher for the number of supported channels Auxiliary Output Auxiliary outputs Assignments was U ALM Output
233. ca 0200 to O24F Alarm Set Setting Level PID Setting Level CB 25 Dg Approximation Setting Level Do 0300 to 034F Program Setting Level Time Signal Setting Level 6 18 6 9 Commands and Responses I Response i Parameters Variable Agges Parameters T 0000 to 003 1 Parameters in Setting Area 1 CC CD Input Initial Setting Level i R Control Initial Setting Level cc eee 2 Control Initial Setting 2 Level CF Do Alarm Setting Level D 0200 to 023B 3 Display Adjustment Level Do Communications Setting Level D3 Advanced Function Setting Level 0300 to 033B Expansion Control Setting Level This command is used to read set values The number of elements can be set from 0002 to 0019 to allow reading 2 to 25 set values in consecutive addresses To specify variable types and addresses refer to Appendix Setting Lists P A 6 The upper limit of an address depends on the variable type This command can be used in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 When used in setting area 1 the response for the remote SP monitor ramp SP monitor and valve opening monitor will be 0 and the response for the status is as indicated in the notes in 5 1 Status P A 8 SRC respon code Data Pe De owe Response Codes The response for a normal end is shown above For the response codes refer to 6 5 Read from Variable Area P 6 10 Composite Read from
234. can also be set to create an overlap band e Set an area centered on the SP where the control amount is O during heating cooling control Setting range Unit Default value 19 99 to 99 99 8 25 I Section 8 Parameters CH 9 t Manual Reset Value y 2 PID control Proportional band z 0 00 Integral time 0 e This parameter is used to set an MV for rectification during P and PD control to eliminate an offset This parameter is displayed only when the proportional band z 0 00 and the integral time O Setting range Unit Default value e 0 0 to 100 0 50 0 Setting Related Parameters PID Proportional Band and PID Integral time PID Setting Level m P 8 40 CH Hysteresis Heating j 5 Hysteresis Cooling LH 3 5 ON OFF Control P 0 0 These parameters set the hystereses to enable stable operation when control is switched ON OFF e For standard control the Hysteresis Heating parameter is used The Hysteresis Cooling parameter cannot be used For heating cooling control the hysteresis can be set separately for heating and cooling Use the Hysteresis Heating parameter for heating and the Hysteresis Cooling parameter for cooling e These parameters are displayed when the Proportional Band parameter is set to 0 00 Setting range Unit Default value Setting Related Parameters PID Proportional Band PID Setting Lev
235. ccur if the interval is set to less than 100 ms Setting range Default value 0 00 to 99 59 or 0 00 0 to 99 59 9 Program time unit 0 00 Related Information Time Signal in 5 7 Program Operation Functions P 5 33 Related Parameters Auxiliary Output Assignment Control Initial Setting 2 Level P 8 67 Program Output Selection Control Initial Setting 2 Level P 8 68 Time Signal Set Segment Time Signal Setting Level P 8 44 Time Signal OFF Time Time Signal Setting Level P 8 45 r m Pr rn kup Fa a xt ae lt lt ae em k ee 5 t CH1 or CH2 during independent control with time signal enabled These parameters are used to set the OFF time for time signals Set the interval between the time signal ON and OFF times to 100 ms minimum Unexpected operation may occur if the interval is set to less than 100 ms Setting range U Default value 0 00 to 99 59 or 0 00 0 to 99 59 9 Program time unit 0 00 Related Information Time Signal in 5 7 Program Operation Functions P 5 33 Related Parameters Auxiliary Output Assignment Control Initial Setting 2 Level P 8 67 Program Output Selection Control Initial Setting 2 Level P 8 68 Time Signal Set Segment Time Signal Setting Level P 8 44 Time Signal OFF Time Time Signal Setting Level P 8 45 8 45 Section 8 Parameters 8 10 Approximation Setting Level
236. ced Function Setting Level 8 54 Move to Calibration Level 8 93 Move to Protect Level CompoWay F communications 6 31 Modbus communications 7 30 Move to Setting Area 1 CompoWay F communications 6 30 Modbus communications 7 29 Movement Average Enabled 8 70 moving average 5 5 MV at Error 5 17 MV at PV Error 5 17 8 29 MV at Reset 5 17 8 29 MV change rate limit 5 16 MV Change Rate Limit Cooling 8 MV Change Rate Limit Heating 8 MV Change Rate Limit Mode 8 102 MV Display Selection 8 81 oo 3 3 MV limits 5 15 MV Lower Limit 8 41 MV Monitor Cooling 8 14 MV Monitor Heating 8 13 MV Upper Limit 8 41 Number of Enabled Channels 8 92 Number of Segments 4 23 8 60 Number of Segments Used 4 24 8 17 obtaining input shift values 5 3 ON OFF control 4 31 Open Close Hysteresis 4 18 8 28 Operation Adjustment Protection 5 23 8 4 Operation at Potentiometer Error 8 104 Operation at Potentiometer Input Error 4 19 Operation at Power ON 4 42 8 95 Operation at Reset 4 41 8 62 operation commands CompoWay F communications 6 13 Modbus communications 7 15 operation indicators 1 6 Operation Level 8 6 A 13 OUT 1 operation indicator 1 6 OUT2 operation indicator 1 6 OUT3 operation indicator 1 6 OUTA operation indicator 1 6 Output Type 8 56 Output Assignments 4 21 output calibration 9 12 output state at error 10 3 output type 4 21 overlap band 4 15 8 25 10 7 panel cutout dimensions
237. cel toggle Auto Manual toggle Program Selection Monitor Setting Item Key Controllers with One Input Fri Program selec tion Controllers with More Than One Input LH Key pem 2 E a 8 90 Ie 8 17 Advanced Function Setting Level L ar CH PF1 Monitor settingltem1to PE ii to PF iS PF1 Monitor setting Item 5 Pred to PF 25 PF2 Monitor setting Item 1 to PF2 Monitor setting Item 5 PF Key set to monitor setting item e When one or both PF Keys are set to Monitor setting item the Monitor Setting Item 1 to Monitor Setting Item 5 parameters for each key must be set according to the following table e Each time a PF Key is pressed the display scrolls to the next monitor setting item in order from the item set for the Monitor Setting Item 1 parameter to the item set for the Monitor Setting Item 5 parameter Setting range i mem PF1 Monitor Disabled Setting Setting Item 1 PV Present Set Point MV PF1 Monitor settable Fixed SP Setting Item 2 PV DV monitor only PFT Moni S Remaining Segment Time u Mun s Proportional Band P om w e pr co PV Present Set Point MV set table Fixed SP PF1 Monitor settable Setting Item 4 z Integral Time I settable 4 Derivative Time D settable Alarm 1 settable Alarm Upper Limit 1 settable Alarm Lower Limit 1 settable Alarm 2 settabl
238. channel 1 can be specified for controllers with only one input channel Channel identifier This address is allocated a parameter in the variable areas Addresses are assigned in order beginning from the first parameter For more information on addresses refer to Appendix Setting Lists P A 6 The addresses indicated in the setting list are the addresses for channel 1 To specify an address of channel 2 for example add H 4000 to the address in the setting list For channel 3 add H 8000 and for channel 4 add H C000 The number of elements is expressed as a 2 byte hexadecimal number For example if the number of elements is 0010 the first 8 elements of data H 10 from the address are specified The specification range for the number of elements depends on the command Refer to 7 9 Commands and Responses P 7 20 for more information In the Modbus protocol one element is two bytes of data however set values in the EBAR T ER T are four bytes each 7 9 l Section 7 Modbus Communications B Set Values 7 10 Values read and written to the variable area are expressed in hexadecimal and disregard the decimal point position Negative values are expressed as a two s complements Example D 105 0 H 0000041A This variable is an 8 digit number in hexadecimal Negative values are expressed as a two s complement The decimal is disregarded If the PV of the EBAR T ER T is 105 0 it will be read as H 0000041A 105 0
239. cimal Addresses are allocated according to access size Each address consists of a channel identifier and the address in the area Address 2 bytes o foto ojo ols 0 me ms A Ao Ae As Ao V Y I Channel Address in area 00 to 7F identifier O to 3 128 variables Bits other than those for the channel identifier and the address in the area are used for variable types DA to F9 6 4 Variable Areas Channel Identifier Address in Area B Number of Elements B Set Values To specify channels 2 to 4 for Controllers with more than one input channel specify a channel identifier between 1 and 3 to identify the channel Only 0 channel 1 can be specified for Controllers with only one input channel This address is allocated a parameter in the variable areas Addresses are assigned in order beginning from the first parameter For more information on addresses refer to Appendix Setting Lists P A 6 The addresses indicated in the setting list are the addresses for channel 1 To specify an address of channel 2 for example add 0100 to the address in the setting list For channel 3 add 0200 and for channel 4 add 0300 The number of elements is expressed as a 2 byte hexadecimal number For example if the number of elements is 0010 the first 16 elements of data H 10 from the address are specified The specification range for the number of elements depends on the command
240. ction keys are as follows PF1 Setting Run Reset PF2 Setting 2 6 Program The default setting is Key for models with more than one input channel With the exception of the Select Program Monitor Setting Item and ci Key settings the function keys are effective only in the following levels Operation Program Setting Adjustment Adjustment 2 Alarm Set Setting PID Setting Time Signal Setting Approximation Setting Monitor Item and Protect Levels A key set for Program is effective only in Operation Level A key set for Monitor Setting Item is effective only in Protect Level A key set for Key is effective in all levels The keys are effective only when the PF Key Protection parameter is set to OFF Operation Adjustment Protection and Setting Change Protection do not apply to the function keys Parameter settings can be changed and saved using function keys if the key is set to the corresponding function e Monitor Setting The PF1 Setting or PF2 Setting parameter can be set to PF dP Item Monitor Setting Item to display monitor settings using a function key The content to be displayed is set for each channel in the Monitor Setting Item 1 to Monitor Setting Item 5 parameters of the corre sponding function key The selections are shown in the following table Refer to the descrip tions of individual parameters for the setting or monitor ranges setvalue Descripti
241. d Information Rate of Rise Programming in 5 7 Program Operation Functions P 5 28 Related Parameters Segment Rate of Rise Program Setting Level P 8 18 Step Time Rate of Rise Programming Control Initial Setting Level P 8 60 This parameter is used to set the method for starting the program e The following table outlines the start SP and the start point for each method Start method Stat Operation start point of operation SP Start Segment SP Program operates in order from SP of for segment 1 segment 1 PV Start PV at start of Operation starts at the first present SP slope priority operation that matches the PV at the start of opera tion PV Start time PV at start of Operation starts with the PV at the start priority operation of program operation used as the SP The operation start point is the beginning of segment 1 Setting range Unit Default value SP SP Start Fu 7r PV Start slope priority SP SP Start n 8 7E PV Start time priority See note Note This selection is not possible for rate of rise programming Related nformation Operation at Program Start in 5 7 Program Operation Functions P 5 37 8 61 I Section 8 Parameters Operation at Reset Set Point Selection 8 62 Setting n Setting m ya 44 see Vu Lx ue This parameter is used to set the operation at reset Setting range Unit
242. dard Control This section introduces an example of program control of an electric oven as a basic control example E Application Connection The following connections are used to control an electric oven using Configuration the E5AR T Here the E5AR TQ4B is used Cur 0072 OUT OUTS RET REP HOLD pr en o E 3 A Olaa Cc ESAR RUN RSI SEG Programmed Operation Example Temperature C 3 2 3 1 Standard Control B Wiring A type R thermocouple is connected to the IN1 terminal and an SSR is connected to the OUT1 terminal The wiring for the ESAR TQ4B is shown in the following diagram E5AR T M Settings Set the parameters as follows EN BRE nu Input Type s th TC PT deaut 11 R 0 0 to 1700 0 C 0 Pulse Voltage Output default Control Mode 0 Standard Control default Direct Reverse Operation ar r Reverse Operation default SP SP Start default End Condition nt Continue default Control Period Heating vo no Fr o DORT Setting Procedure Input 1 Input Type Switch 1 Before turning ON the power be sure that the input 1 type switch is set to TC PT 2 Turn ON the power and then hold down the _ Key for at least 3 seconds to Input 1 move from the Operation Level to the Input Initial Setting Level 1 6 NPHL TYPE Input 1 Input Type will b
243. ddress The value from the command frame is returned here The received function code is returned here In an error response frame H 80 is added to the received function code to indicate that it is an error Function code response Example Received function code H 03 Function code in error response frame H 83 Byte count Number of bytes of data that were read Read data The set value that was read This is the check code calculated from the slave address through the end of the data For the calculation method refer to Example of CRC 16 Calculation in 7 2 Frames P 7 4 CRC 16 Section 7 Modbus Communications Response Codes Function Error Cause code code H O2 Variable address Error in the read start address error Variable data The number of elements H O3 H 83 error exceeds the specified range Operation error Unit error unit change display unit error or EEPROM error H 04 does not occur when number of elements is 0 NM Normal end No error Reading Non display Data Set values can be read even if the parameters are set not to be displayed or are not displayed due to the model Command Response Example Heading the PV of Channel 1 Slave address H 01 PV of channel 1 read only data Address H 0404 Data read H 000003E8 100 0 C Command CRC 16 CRC 16 7 6 Write to Variable Area 7 6 Write to Variable Area Write to a variable area by setting the required data
244. de to indicate that this is an error response Example Received function code H 03 Function code in error response frame H 83 An end code that indicates the error Cyclical Redundancy Check CRC 16 These two bytes are a check code calculated from the slave address through the end of the data in hexadeci mal 7 5 7 6 Section 7 Modbus Communications Error Codes End Error Description detection code ee priority H O1 Function Heceived an unsupported function code 1 code error Variable The variable area number specified in the address variable address is out of range error The number of elements does not agree with the number of data items Number of elements times 2 does not agree with the byte count The response length exceeds the communi cations buffer size The operation code or related information in an operation command is not correct The written data exceeds the setting range Variable data error The setting in the write data is not permitted in the current operating mode e The communications writing function is disabled e Attempted to write to set values insetting area 1 from setting area 0 e Attempted to write to Protect Level set Operation values from another level error AT is being executed The program number was changed during programmed operation User calibration is in progress The operation command cannot be processed Unit error unit change display unit erro
245. e A code that indicates the beginning of a communi SIX cations frame 02H Be sure to set this code in the leading byte The node number specifies the destination Node No Specify the unit number of the EBAR T ER T j When broadcasting to all nodes specify XX Responses are not returned for broadcasts Sub address Not used on the E5AR T ER T Always set to 00 Bytes SID Not used on the E5AR T ER T Always set to 0 Service ID FSS neh The text of the command command text A code that indicates the end of the text 03H Block Check Character This byte stores the result of the BCC calculation from the node number through EXT FINS mini STX Node No Sub address SID command text ETX BCC 02 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 35H 30H 30H BCC 30H 30H 30H e 30H e 30H 30H 35H e 30H e 30H amp 03H 36H amp XOR exclusive OR operation 6 4 6 2 Frames I M Response Frames End FINS mini STX Node No Sub address Code response text ETX BCC Bytes 1 2 2 2 1 1 A code that indicates the beginning of the commu nications frame 02H This code is always set in the leading byte The unit number that was specified in the com mand frame is returned here This is the unit num ber of the responding E5AR T ER T Sub address Not used on the E5AR T ER T Always set to 00 Returns the result of execution for the command End code frame FINS mini Text of the response response text A code
246. e Alarm Upper Limit 2 settable Alarm Lower Limit 2 settable Alarm 3 settable Alarm Upper Limit 3 settable Alarm Lower Limit 3 settable Alarm 4 settable Alarm Upper Limit 4 settable Alarm Lower Limit 4 settable ar y aa PF1 Monitor Setting Item 5 PF2 Monitor Setting Item 1 PF2 Monitor Setting Item 2 PF2 Monitor Setting Item 3 PF2 Monitor Setting Item 4 PF2 Monitor Setting Item 5 4 x lt y gt w y m aa iw pur Va a p gt 4 x lt ju Yw 4 alt p lt pe tl Le P w p M ku ku Le Le 6 Pog u w aa ru PR m 4 l a y ER ye Related Parameters My PF1 Setting and PF2 Setting Advanced Function Setting Level nz P 8 89 8 91 I Section 8 Parameters Number of Enabled Channels H a Controller with more than one input e This parameter is used to set the number of enabled channels when using multiple channels on a Controller with more than one input 1 1104 b Setting The default value and setting range depend on the control mode setting of the Controller with more than one input 2 input model Proportional control standard control with remote SP heating cooling con
247. e temperature units scaling display value SP upper and lower limits or applicable control transfer output assignment is changed Related Information 5 9 Using a Transfer Output P 5 47 Related Parameters Input Type Input Initial Setting Level P 8 50 Control Transfer Output Assignment Control Initial Setting 2 Level P 8 64 8 69 I Section 8 Parameters First Order Lag Operation Enabled L HL 1 to 4 Use these parameters to enable or disable first order lag operation for each input e Setting Related Information 5 1 Input Adjustment Functions P 5 2 Related Parameters First Order Lag Operation Time Constant Adjustment 2 Level P 8 34 x Movement Average Enabled 1 to 4 Use these parameters to enable or disable the movement average for each input 1 Move Average Move Average Count Adjustment 2 Level 8 34 Setting Related Parameters 8 70 8 13 Control Initial Setting 2 Level i Extraction of Square Root Enabled S7 1 to 4 Use these parameters to enable or disable the extraction of square root operation for each input e Setting Related Parameters m Extraction of Square Root Lovv cut Point Adjustment 2 Level LS P 8 35 Straight line Approximation Enabled BL L 1 or 2 Proportional control e Use these parameters to enable or disable straight
248. e Conditions A At the start of operation including after turning ON power When the alarm value alarm upper or lower limit is changed When the input correction Input Value 1 for Input Correction Input Correction 1 Input Value 2 for Input Correction or Input Correction 2 parameter is changed When the SP of the current segment is changed including changing the fixed SP in Fixed SP Mode When program is started including when the program is started for program repetitions or program links or When the segment is changed including when an advance is executed 5 25 I Section 5 Functions and Operations B Alarm Latch Alarm 1 Latch e Conditions B When power is turned ON The Standby Sequence Reset parameter is used for all of Alarms 1 to 4 e The default setting is O Conditions A e The alarm latch is used to make an alarm output that has turned ON remain ON until the power is turned OFF regardless of the temper ature e The alarm latch can be canceled by turning the power OFF or by using a communications command e An alarm latch can be set separately for each alarm in the Alarm 1 to 4 Latch parameters e The default setting is 0 OFF B Close in Alarm Open in Alarm Auxiliary Output 1 Open in Alarm en la Am r Pn
249. e Operation Level Scaling can be set separately for each channel For scaling inputs 1 to 4 of a Controller with more than one input correspond to channels 1 to 4 Select the channel with the CH Key and then set the scaling Scaling Parameters Scaling Input Value 1 See table below See table L Scaling Display Value 1 EH NEN 19999 to 19999 to scaling display value 2 1 display 19999 to scaling display value 2 1 2 1 Scaling Input Value 2 See table below table Scaling Display Value 2 Display Scaling Display Value 2 2 dSPZ Scaling display value 1 110 99999 display Scaling display value 1 1 to 99999 1 1 to 99999 Setting Range and Unit for Each Input Type ee MEN 4 to 4to20mA mA 4 to 4020 The operation of EBAR T ER T control functions and alarms is based on the input value If a value greater than 22 2 Scaling Input Value 2 is set for 47 Scaling Input Value 1 operation will be as follows for the display value Direct Reverse Operation When direct operation is set the manipulated variable will increase when the display value decreases When reverse operation is set the manipulated variable will increase when the display value increases Display value Display value Larger Larger Smaller Smaller Input value Input value Smaller Larger Smaller Larger Input value 0 Input value 0 100 100 Manipulated variable Manipulated variable Direct O
250. e Read Reads the model O6 O1 Controller Status Read Reads the operating status O8 O1 Echoback Test Performs an echoback test Executes operation commands such as Run 30 05 Operation Commands Reset AT Execute Cancel and Move to Setting Area 1 6 6 6 4 Variable Areas 6 4 Variable Areas The areas used for data exchange when communicating with the are called the variable areas Present values can be read and set values can be read and written using the variable areas of the E5AR T ER T Operation commands and reading Controller attributes do not use the variable areas M Variable Types Operation E5AR ER T commands and Microprocessor responses Read write Personal computer A variable areas is accessed by specifying the position of a variable within a variable area using the variable type and address The following table lists the variable types in the variable area Ku ype Operation in os D Time Signal Setting Level M Alarm Setting Level Setting area 1 Control Initial Setting 2 Level Display Adjustment Level Operation stopped Communications Setting Level Advanced Function Setting Level D3 Expansion Control Setting Level 6 7 I Section 6 CompoWay F Communications B Addresses 6 8 Addresses are allocated within each variable type Addresses are two bytes long and written in hexade
251. e displayed Press the IA Key to select the setting 7 11 R 0 0 to 1700 0 C 3 3 I Section 3 Typical Control Examples Control Initial Setting Level 3 Output 1 Type 4 Control Mode Direct Reverse Operation 6 PV Start df Move to Advanced Function Setting Level 120 8 9 End Condition r gt _ L Ec 10 11 Control Period Heating a 9I Y d r 3 4 Press the Key for less than 1 second to move from the Input Initial Setting Level to the Control Initial Setting Level Output 1 Type will be displayed Make sure that the set value is O Pulse Voltage Output Press the cel Key repeatedly to select ad E Control Mode Make sure that the setting is O Standard Control Press the ce Key to select ar Fu Direct Reverse Operation Make sure that the setting is a Reverse Operation Press the kel Key repeatedly to select Put PV Start M
252. e specifications of the products may be changed without any notice When in doubt special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes even when tolerances are shown PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of OMRON s test conditions and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability ERRORS AND OMISSIONS The information in this document has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions Precautions Definition of Safety Notices and Information The following notation is used in this manual to provide precautions required to ensure safe usage of the product The safety precautions that are provided are extremely important to safety Always read and heed the information provided in all safety precautions The following notation is used Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not A Cauti
253. e waveform can be adjusted using the Disturbance Gain and Disturbance Time Constant parameters Disturbance Gain Disturbance Gain e The Disturbance Gain parameter can be increased to reduce overshooting when disturbance occurs wu e The Disturbance Gain parameter can be decreased to increase overshooting when disturbance occurs Lr l f e When the Disturbance Gain parameter is set to 0 the disturbance overshoot adjustment function does not operate When disturbance gain is 1 oN Temperature When disturbance gain is 0 5 1 Av Time 6 Disturbance Time The reset time after disturbance can be lengthened by increasing Constant the disturbance time constant The default value of 1 is normally used for the disturbance time constant If adjustment of the distur Disturbance Time Constant a bance gain alone is not sufficient this value can be adjusted for fine tuning Temperature When disturbance time constant is 1 When disturbance time constant is 2 SP Time e The waveform may vary from that in the diagram depending on differences in the object of control and differences in PID constants 5 13 I Section 5 Functions and Operations Conditions for Activating Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment e f the deviation is greater than the va
254. econd Approximation Setting Level Level Setting Level Level LEET 2221 LAGP 1 First Order Lag rtr L Operation 1 Time Constant 0 0 to 999 9 11 1 Straight line Approximation 1 Input 1 1 999 to 9 999 D ALM Display Alarm Set Selection PRG N Program Editing Alarm Set 1 Program 1 LAGP 2 First Order Lag Y LAUP Operation 2 Time Constant z 0 0 to 999 9 LAGP 3 First Order Lag z Operation 3 Time Constant 0 0 to 999 9 LAGP 4 First Order Lag Operation 4 Time Constant 0 0 to 999 9 c Be g m p a N Vie MAVP 1 Move Average 1 Move Average Count 1 2 4 8 16 32 MAVP 2 Move Average 2 Move average count 1 2 4 8 16 32 MAVP 3 Move Average 3 Move Average Count 1 2 4 8 16 32 MAVP 4 Move Average 4 Move Average Count 1 2 4 8 16 32 7 SQRP 1 Extraction of amah Square Root 1 Low cut Point 0 000 to 9 999 SQRP 2 Extraction of Square Root 2 Low cut point SQRP 3 Extraction of Square Root 3 Low cut Point 0 000 to 9 999 SQRP 4 Extraction of Square Root 4 Low cut Point 0 000 to 9 999 AP 1 Analog Parameter Control Rate 1 999 to 9 999 na 20 lt 3 nuh us m IS 26 2 Ze lt C lt 3 Li a E a Lr T le V 2 r3 ea PET E3 4 d Lr RC E Lt E3 E
255. ection Setting Change Protection and PF Key Protection Operation Adjustment Protection restricts key operations in Operation Level Program Setting Level Adjustment Level Adjustment 2 Level Alarm Set Setting Level PID Setting Level Time Signal Setting Level Approximation Setting Level and Monitor Item Level Setting Level Program PID Setting Setting Level Level Time PV Fixed Adjustment Signal Setting SP or Level and Level Program Adjustment 2 Approximation Number Level Monitor Item Level 2 Enabled Enabled Prohibited Prohibited Enabled Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited The Program Number parameter is prohibited Enabled No restrictions Parameters can be displayed or changed and the level can be entered Restrictions Some restrictions apply Parameters can be displayed but not changed Prohibited The parameters are completely protected Parameters cannot be displayed and the level can be entered The default setting is 5 23 I Section 5 Functions and Operations Initial Setting Protection Initial Setting Protection Setting Change Protection Setting Change Protection PF Key Protection PF Key Protection xa T R 5 24 Initial Setting Protection
256. ed Setting range Unit Default value Monitor Item Level disabled Input Initial Setting Level Control Initial Setting Level Control Initial Setting 2 Level Alarm Setting Level Display Adjustment Level Communications Setting Level c Advanced Function Setting Level 4L Expansion Control Setting Level e n Un I 6 2 K a cal nd M 8 L9 yu Li ur Start Display Scan after Power ON Display Scan Period n 8 15 Display Adjustment Level 1 4 Controller with more than one input Lt 3x w na hm P nm The display scan automatically switches through channels on the display when multiple channels are used on a Controller with more than one input The display scan shows only channels that are enabled using the Number of Enabled Channels parameter The display scan can be started automatically after the power is turned ON or by pressing the Key To have display scan start automatically after the power is turned ON set the Start Display Scan after Power ON parameter to ON The display scan period is set in the Display Scan Period parameter If the period is set to O the display scan is disabled Start Display Scan 22 Disable after Power ON an Enable Setting 150 O 0 Display scan disabled 8 83 I Section 8 Parameters 8 16 Communications Setting Level 4 5 This level contains Initial setting par
257. egment Output GUA Segment Output Segment No Output Time Signal Related Information Time Signalin 5 7 Program Operation Functions P 5 33 Segment Output in 5 7 Program Operation Functions P 5 34 Program Status Outputs in 5 7 Program Operation Functions P 5 36 Related Parameters Auxiliary Output Assignment Control Initial Setting 2 Level P 8 67 8 13 Control Initial Setting 2 Level i Transfer Output Upper Limit k f Transfer Output Lower Limit amp ri 1 to 4 Transfer output using output assignment e These parameters can only be used for outputs selected for transfer output using the output assignment parameters Default value Control n Transfer output upper limit Decimal RAT Setting range lower limit of point Setting A transfer position output SP lower limit to Depends Present set point SP upper limit 74 on input type Lower limit of sensor setting Upper and range to upper lower limit of limit of Sensor sensor setting setting range range Depends on input type temperature 19999 to 99999 Scaling Depends analog display value2 on input and 1 type Standard 5 0 to Control output 105 0 Heatina heating or ean 1000andOO 1 open cooling 0 0 to 105 0 Control output cooling or 0 0 to 105 0 100 0 and 0 0 close Valve opening 10 0 to 110 0 100 0 and 0 0 The parameters will be initialized if the input typ
258. el P 8 40 8 26 CH Control Period Heating Control Period Cooling CH Setting Position proportional Dead Band pU n Setting EM 8 5 Adjustment Level L Ag um w r These parameters set the output periods When setting these parameters take controllability and product life if the connected device is a relay into consideration e The Control Period Heating parameter is used for standard control e For heating cooling control control periods can be set separately for heating and cooling Setting range Default value Control Period 0 2 to 99 0 20 0 Heating 09 Control Period 0 2 to 99 0 o Cooling Related Parameters PID Proportional Band PID Setting Level P 8 40 Position proportional Control Model e This parameter sets the output hold interval the interval between switching the open output and close output ON and OFF during position proportional control Related Parameters Open Close Hysteresis Adjustment Level P 8 28 I Section 8 Parameters CH Open Close Hysteresis CH Standby Time 8 28 E Setting n Setting yu Position proportional Control Model V3 a P i e This parameter is used to add hysteresis when switching the open output and close output ON and OFF during position proportional control Def
259. el 1 Auto Manual Channel 1 Run Operation Channel 1 Segment No Output Channel 1 Segment Output Time Signal Channel 1 Program End Models with more than one input have the same setting data for channels 2 to 4 depending on the number of input points 1 8 1 3 I O and Main Functions I B Main Functions Inputs Event Input Assignments First set the input type switch for each input to specify using either a temperature input thermocouple TC or resistance thermometer PT or an analog input current input or voltage input and then set the Input Type parameter If the input type switch is set to a temperature input resistance thermometer or thermocouple the temperature unit can be set If the input type switch is set to an analog input current input or voltage input scaling and the decimal point position can be set Input type switch Input type Temperature inputs Resistance thermometers Pt 100 Temperature unit Thermocouples K J T E L U N R S B W Analog inputs Sci Current inputs 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Voltage inputs 1 to 5 V 0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V Decimal point position 1 d Yeu Z Input type switches on the bottom An operation command can be assigned to each event input If event inputs are to be used use an E5AR ER L 111 Controller For models with more than one input assignments can be made for channels 2 and higher as needed depending on the
260. en line Approximation 1 Input 20 1 999 to 9 999 Ln Va 23 lg i i 2 Va E SAN t3 L K Cre ley oes ula Lh Ou e Pu c 2 FO01 1 Broken line Approximation 1 Output 1 1 999 to 9 999 FO20 1 Broken line Approximation 1 Output 20 1 999 to 9 999 A Key 1 second or more Control starts 8 P PID8 Proportional Band 0 00 to 999 99 Standard 1 8 I PID8 Integral Time 0 0 to 3999 9 Standard Position proportional closed control 2 cH 8 D PID8 Derivative Time 0 0 to 3999 9 8 OL H PID8 MV Upper Limit MV Lower Limit 0 1 to 105 0 Standard Position proportional closed control 3 8 OL L PID8 MV Lower Limit 5 0 to MV Lower Limit MV Upper Limit 0 1 Standard Position proportional closed control 4 8 AUT PID8 Automatic Selection Range Upper Limit 19999 to 99999 1 Position proportional Control Model 0 01 to 999 99 2 Position proportional Control Model floating 0 1 to 3999 9 3 Heating Cooling 0 0 to 105 0 4 Heating Cooling 105 0 to 0 0 x 2 o lt A 49 Appendix v Key 3 seconds or more Control stops
261. ent Applying the Controller to systems machines and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly and especially require safety Notice 1 All rights reserved No part of this manual may be reprinted or copied without the prior written permission of OMRON 2 The specifications and other information in this manual are subject to change without notice for purposes of improvement 3 Considerable care has been taken in the preparation of this manual however OMRON assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear In the event that a problem is discovered please contact one of the OMRON offices or agents listed at the end of the manual and provide the catalogue number shown on the cover of the manual Read and Understand this Manual Please read and understand this manual before using the product Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments Warranty and Limitations of Liability WARRANTY OMRON s exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year or other period if specified from date of sale by OMRON OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODU
262. ent Set Point and Segment Time Setting of Number of Segments parameter g rang 12 32 e The Number of Segments Used parameter is used to set the number of segments used for a specified program e The default is 8 The following table shows the setting ranges Setting of Number of Segments parameter Setting range Once the program has been executed for the number of segments set for the Number of Segments Used parameter the program will be in operation completed status If the setting of the Number of Segments Used parameter is changed to a value smaller than the segment currently being executed in the program the program will immediately change to operation completed status The Segment Set Point and Segment Time parameters are used to set one segment of a program The present SP is determined by using the SP of the previous segment as the start point and the SP of the current segment as the end point A straight line is drawn between these two points and the present SP is the point on that line where the current segment time has elapsed The Segment Time parameter can be set to between 0 00 and 99 59 hours minutes or minutes seconds or between 0 00 0 and 99 59 9 minutes seconds tenths of seconds The default is 0 00 or 0 00 0 The first segment is a soak segment To start from a ramp set the Segment Time parameter for segment 1 to O to create a program that starts from segment 2 when the Operation at R
263. ents can be set from H 0004 to 0068 4 to 104 to write from 2 to 52 set values at consecutive addresses To specify the variable type and address refer to Appendix Setting Lists P A 6 Parameters in setting area 1 can be written from setting area 1 An operation error will occur if parameters are written from setting area O To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command To store the set values for Operation or Adjustment Level in EEPROM select Backup Mode and execute the RAM Write Mode command If Backup Mode is not selected the set values will not remain in memory when the power is turned OFF For more information on the above levels refer to 4 1 Setting Levels and Key Operations P 4 2 Slave Function Write start Number of address code address elements CRC 16 ul G 1 1 2 2 2 The response for a normal end is shown above For information on error responses refer to Z 6 Write to Variable Area P 7 13 E Communications Writing 7 24 Response Slave Function Write start Operation Related address code address code information CRC 16 1 2 1 2 2 Related AE Description information H OO Communications Writing Disabled H O1 Communications Writing Enabled This command is used to enable or disable the communications writing function It changes the setting of the Communications Writing parameter When the commu
264. er Heating cooling control 4 0 0 to 105 0 In Standard control 5 0 to MV upper limit O 1 MV Lower Limit Heating cooling control 105 0 to 0 0 5 15 I Section 5 Functions and Operations E MV Change Rate Limit e The MV Change Rate Limit parameter is used to restrict the rate of change in the MV as a percentage per second or in the opening of a valve for a Position proportional Controller Model If a change occurs in the MV that exceeds this setting the MV is changed by the set limit each second until the required value is attained When the limit is set to 0 0 the function is disabled MV Change Rate Limit Heating For standard control use the MV Change Rate Limit Heating parameter The MV Change Rate Limit Cooling parameter cannot be used e For heating cooling control separate limits can be set for heating and cooling The MV Change Rate Limit Heating parameter is used for heating and the MV Change Rate Limit Cooling parameter is used for cooling e The MV Change Rate Limit parameters cannot be used in the following conditions e Manual Mode e During AT e During ON OFF control P 0 00 e When control is stopped MV Output at Stop e During MV Output at PV error e f you wish only to l
265. er number is given priority When the control mode is set to cascade control assign the following channel operation commands CH2 Run Reset 31 e CH2 Auto Manual 32 e CH2 SP Mode Remote SP Fixed SP 34 cascade open close Related Information My 5 8 Using Event Inputs P 5 39 8 66 Auxiliary Output Assignment 1 to 10 f 1 Setting 8 13 Control Initial Setting 2 Level i n e Use these parameters to assign output content to auxiliary outputs Setting range Unit Default value Disable 0 CH1 Alarm 1 CH1 Alarm 2 CH1 Alarm 3 CH1 Alarm 4 CH1 Input error 5 CH1RSP Input error 6 Disabled 7 CH1 Run output 8 CH1 Program end output CH1 Program output 1 CH1 Program output 2 CH1 Program output 3 CH1 Program output 4 CH1 Program output 5 CH1 Program output 6 CH1 Program output 7 CH1 Program output 8 CH1 Program output 9 CH1 Program output 10 19 U ALM 20 1 Alarm 1 OR output of all channels 21 Alarm 2 OR output of all channels 22 Alarm 3 OR output of all channels 23 Alarm 4 OR output of all channels 24 Input error OR output of all channels 25 RSP Input error OR output of all channels 26 Disable 27 CH2 Alarm 1 28 CH2 Alarm 2 29 CH2 Alarm 3 80 CH2 Alarm 4 31 CH2 Input error 32 CH2 RSP Input error 33 Disable 34 CH2 Run output 35 CH3 Program end output 36 CH2 Program output 1 37 1
266. er supply 2 Connect the DC reference current voltage generator STV below precision digital meter DMM below and cold junction compensator a ZERO CON is used as an example below to the input terminals of the thermocouple as shown below Leave open Lrero con OUTPUT INPUT consensi leads of selected thermocouple However compensating leads for a K thermocouple can be used for E R S B and W thermocouples Turn ON the power Move to Calibration Level A 30 minute aging timer will begin Perform aging using this timer as a guideline When 30 minutes has elapsed Display No 2 will show O You can proceed to the next stop before the display shows O Press the cel Key The display at the left will appear The count value that was input will be displayed on Display No 2 in hexadecimal Set the STV as follows For input types 2 4 7 8 10 and 14 53 mV For input types 3 5 6 11 12 and 13 22 mV Wait until the count on Display No 2 is sufficiently stable and then press the Key This tentatively registers the calibration data at this point Press the cel Key The display at the left will appear Set the STV to 6 mV Wait until the count on Display No 2 is sufficiently stable and then press the X Key This tentatively registers the calibration data at this point 9 3 Thermocouple Input Calibration I 7 Press the Key The display at the left will appear
267. er to 6 7 Operation Commands P 6 13 Instruction Related MRC SRC code information Related E Description information RAM Write Mode Response 6 9 Commands and Responses This command is used to select the Backup Mode or RAM Write Mode The default setting is Backup Mode This command can be used in both setting area O and setting area 1 To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command When communications are used to write set values in the Operation Program Setting Adjustment Adjust Backup Mode ment 2 Alarm Set Setting PID Setting Time Signal Setting or Approximation Setting Level the data is also written to EEPROM When communications are used to write set values in the Operation Program Setting Adjustment Adjust ment 2 Alarm Set Setting PID Setting Time Signal Setting or Approximation Setting Level the data is not written to EEPROM When SP tracking or PV tracking is ON and the mode is changed to Remote SP Mode or Manual Mode the SP is not written to EEPROM When a change is made to a parameter setting using a key operation the data is written to EEPROM RAM Write Mode When the write mode is changed from RAM Write Mode to Backup Mode the set values in the Operation Level Program Setting Level Adjustment Level Adjustment 2 Level Alarm Set Setting Level PID Setting Level Time Signal Sett
268. eset parameter is set to Control Stop 4 8 Program Settings I E Program Setting Example In this example the following program will be created as program 2 SP Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 Segment 4 100 0 SUD I ay r x 7770070000 0079 icem tae Time h min The following table shows the settings required for the Number of Segments Number of Segments Used and Program No parameters Number of Segments 8 No of programs 32 Number of Segments Used 4 Program No 2 The Segment Set Point and Segment Time parameter settings for program 2 are given in the following table 7 2 3 Segment Set 50 0 100 0 100 0 50 0 Point Segment 5 00 8 00 10 00 Time h min 4 25 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control Number of Segments Number of Segments Used 4 26 Use the following procedure to set the Number of Segments parameter to 8 thus setting the number of programs to 32 1 Hold down the Key for at least 3 seconds to move from the Operation Level to the Input Initial Setting Level 2 In the Input Initial Setting Level Display No 3 will show 4 Press the Key for less than 1 second to move to the Control Initial Setting Level 3 In the Input Initial Setting Level Display No 3 will show i Press the ce K
269. et for channel 2 Any change in the Run Reset parameter selection for channel 1 will also be changed for channel 2 The channel 2 Run Reset parameter can however be set independently Advance hold and back segment operations will be executed for both channels Point or PV Offset can be set for channels 2 to 4 Coordinated operation based on channel 1 is possible The program will be the same therefore for all channels As shown in the diagram on the right coordinated operation is enabled when the channel program pattern is input to the A SP for channels 2 to 4 The present SP or the PV can be set as the program pattern from channel 1 If the PV is set and channel 1 has an input error an RSP input error will occur for channels 2 to 4 Present Set RSP Any change in the Run Reset parameter selection for channel 1 will also be changed for channels 2 to 4 Each Run Reset parameter for channels 2 to 4 can however be set independently Advance hold and back segment operations will be executed for all channels 5 2 Control Functions I E Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment Balama Overdhoot e The disturbance overshoot adjustment function adjusts the control Adjustment Function waveform when disturbance occurs e To use this function set the Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment Function parameter to ON the default setting is OFF e The disturbance respons
270. ettings Required for Basic Control 4 14 Changing Channels E Changing Channels Present value PV SP IL V1 CH K 412 LL He S oon onc PFT lt gt l CO VY R C4 C H key 6 Level after Changing Channels Displayed Parameter after Changing Channels 4 50 e On Controllers with more than one input the channel number increases by 1 each time the Key is pressed and the displayed channel changes accordingly Only channels that are enabled with the Number of Enabled Channels parameter can be displayed If the Number of Enabled Channels parameter is set to 2 on a 4 point input type the display will switch through the channels as follows each time the Key is pressed Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 When changing channels the level will remain the same as the level currently being displayed When a Manual Mode channel is selected the display will show the manual operation display in the Operation Level The displayed parameter after changing channels is as follows 1 If the parameter that is currently being displayed will continue to be displayed if it is enabled for the new channel 2 If the parameter that is currently being displayed is not enabled for the new channel because the control method is different or for any other
271. ey e The default setting is OFF 5 6 Alarm Adjustment Functions I 5 6 Alarm Adjustment Functions E Alarm Hysteresis Alarm 1 Hysteresis e Hysteresis can be applied when alarm outputs turn ON and OFF as shown below Upper limit alarm Lower limit alarm pm hysteresis Alarm hysteresis ON x OFF OF Alarm value Alarm value e Alarm hysteresis can be set separately for each alarm in the Alarm 1 to 4 Hysteresis parameters All default values are 0 02 FS M Standby Sequence Standby Sequence Reset e A standby sequence is used to delay alarm output until the PV leaves the alarm range once and then subsequently enters it again 21 LL For example for a lower limit alarm the PV is normally smaller than the SP when the power is turned ON and thus is within the alarm range which would cause the alarm output to turn ON However if a Lower Limit Alarm with Standby Sequence is selected the alarm output will not turn ON until the PV rises above the alarm set value and out of the alarm range and then falls below the alarm value w ali wa Y 2 7 Lt e Standby Sequence The standby sequence is canceled when an alarm output occurs Reset and then restarts based on conditions specified in the Standby sequence Reset parameter
272. ey repeatedly less than 1 second each time to select the Number of Segments parameter 4 Press the to set the Number of Segments parameter to 8 Use the following procedure to set the Number of Segments Used parameter to 4 1 Hold down the Key for less than 1 second to move from the Operation Level to the Program Setting Level 2 The Program Editing parameter will be displayed in the Program Setting Level Select the number of the program to be edited For example to change the Number of Segments Used parameter for program 2 use the X Key to select 2 4 8 Program Settings I 3 Press the el Key to display the Number of Segments Used parameter for program 2 Use the and Keys to set the value to 4 d 4 4 Hold down the Key for less than 1 second to return to the Operation Level 4 27 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control Use the following procedure to set the program to be executed to 2 in the Operation Level Program No 1 Press the el Key several times to select the Program No parameter to enable specifying the number of the program to execute 2 Use the A and Rz Keys to set the program number to 2 Use the following procedure to set the Segment Set Point and Segment Time parameters for segments 1 to 4 for program No 2 Segment Set Point 1
273. f China Tower 200 Yin Cheng Road M Shanghai 200120 China Tel 86 21 5037 2222 Fax 86 21 5037 2200 Authorized Distributor Cat No H201 E1 01 Note Specifications subject to change without notice PrintedinJapan 0906 0 5M 0906 B
274. f an input error occurs when power is restored the program moves to the next segment The program timer value is held until the program returns to the status before the power was interrupted e Power Interrupted in Fixed SP or Remote SP Mode Ramp operation is not executed for a fixed SP or remote SP if the power is interrupted in Fixed SP Mode or Remote SP Mode e The timer continues when the mode is changed to Manual Mode during program operation e The timer continues if an input error occurs during program operation e n setting area 1 the time signal segment output program end output and segment number output are all OFF e The program operation is also reset if the Run Reset parameter for the secondary side channel 2 is set to Reset when using cascade control 4 45 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control M Settings The following procedure is used to stop program operation Run Reset Selected for the PF1 Setting or PF2 Setting Parameter 1 Press the PF Key for which Run Reset has been specified for at least 1 second The RST indicator will light and the program will stop To start operation again press the same PF Key for at least 1 second again The RST indicator will turn OFF and the program will start operation Run Reset Not Selected for the PF1 Setting or PF2 Setting Parameter 1 Press the kel Key several times to select r r Run Reset
275. fied torque Loose screws may occasionally cause fire resulting in minor or moderate injury or damage to the equipment Terminal block screws 0 40 to 0 56 N m Perform correct setting of the product according to the application Failure to do so may occasionally cause unexpected operation resulting in minor or moderate injury or damage to the equipment A malfunction in the Product may occasionally make control oper ations impossible or prevent alarm outputs occasionally resulting in property damage to the system or equipment connected to the Product To maintain safety in the event of malfunction of the Product take appropriate safety measures such as installing a monitoring device in a separate system Do not use the equipment for measurements within measurement categories Il III or IV according to IEC61010 1 Doing so may occasionally cause unexpected operation resulting in minor or moderate injury or damage to the equipment Use the equipment for measurements only within the measurement categories for which the product is designed The service life of the output relays depends on the switching capacity and switching conditions Consider the actual application conditions and use the product within the rated load and electrical service life Using the product beyond its service life may occa sionally result in contact welding or burning Precautions for Safe Use 1 9 Use and store the Digital Controller in the
276. formation sims SP Modes in 5 7 Program Operation Functions P 5 31 Related Parameters Control Mode Control Initial Setting Level P 8 58 CH Fixed SP m L e This parameter is used to set the SP used in Fixed SP Mode r Setting range Unit Default value e Set Point Lower Limit to Set Point Upper Limit 0 Setting Related Information siiis SP Modes in 5 7 Program Operation Functions P 5 31 cua Related Parameters SP Mode Adjustment Level P 8 24 8 24 CH Cooling Coefficient CH Dead Band n Setting A Setting 8 5 Adjustment Level L Ag L ala Heating cooling control Advanced PID control Proportional band z 0 00 If there is a large difference in the heating and cooling characteristics of the object and satisfactory control is not possible using the same PID constants the heating P proportional band can be multiplied by a coefficient for use in cooling control e The cooling P in heating cooling control is obtained using the following equation and the coefficient is set accordingly Cooling P Cooling coefficient x P heating proportional band Setting range Unit Default value 0 01 to 99 99 1 00 Related Parameters PID Proportional Band PID Setting Level P 8 40 K UL Heating cooling control This parameter sets an output dead band for heating cooling control A negative value
277. g 2 777 Level P 8 64 8 56 8 12 Control Initial Setting Level L CH Ee IILII III W lt T III IIII IYI IIII IIIII IIIIIN I I WII I I IIIII IUTS lt III II IIIII I I I I K lt II amp IIIZII I II ZI IIIIII II I BII I I I II I C III II WAI I WI I YIW lt III WIIIOIO IIIZII I lt II I I KQW W IWI II IIII I I I IIIII Q I I IKI I I lt II lt II ZIIQII I IWII IXI I II I II lt II NIO lt I III II I lt I I III IKI I Q I I IIWEHU IK m SP Upper Limit SL H SP Lower Limit SL L e Use these parameters to set upper and lower limits for the SP setting The SP can be set only between these limits If the limits are changed and a previously set SP falls outside of the limits due to the change the SP will automatically change to the upper or lower limit e f the input type and temperature unit are changed the SP upper and lower limits will change to the upper and lower limits of the sensor e The decimal point position depends on the selected sensor For analog input the decimal point position is determined by the Decimal Point Position parameter Setting range Unit Default value 1 Temperature SP lower limit 1 to upper limit of input range Setting ead Analog SP lower limit 1 to EU 1300 0 smaller of 99999 and display value equivalen
278. g Level 4 1 Setting Levels and Key Operations I Adjustment 2 Level Settings that can be adjusted during processing func tion control operations During Alarm Set Setting Level Settings for each alarm set operation PID Setting Level PID constants and limit settings for each PID set Time Signal Setting Level Settings for time signals Approximation Setting Level Broken line approximation and straight line approxi mation settings Monitor Item Level Monitor displays for set values Input Initial Setting Level Initial settings related to inputs Control Initial Setting Level Initial settings for output types and control modes Display Adjustment Level When Communications Setting Communications speed communications data length operation Initialization of settings and PF Key settings Level Expansion Control Setting Advanced control settings and position proportional Level control settings Calibration Level Calibration by the user To move to the Advanced Function Setting Level set the Initial Setting Protection parameter in the Protect Level to O Alarm Setting Level Alarm type and output settings Control Initial Setting 2 Initial settings for processing functions Level 4 3 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control E Changing Parameters CE Parameter changes forvvard after key After pressing Within each level
279. g cooling control the primary loop is 0 and the secondary loop is 10096 All programs and segment parameters will be initialized All programs and segment parameters will be initialized when the Number of Segments parameter is changed The following segments will be initialized when the Step Time Rate of Rise Programming parameter is set to rate of rise programming Nothing will be initialized when this parameter is set to step time When Operation at Reset parameter is set to Control Stop All odd segments When Operation at Reset parameter is set to Fixed Control All even segments The following segments will be initialized when the Step Time Rate of Rise Programming parameter is set to rate of rise programming All segments will be initialized when this parameter is set to step time When Operation at Reset parameter is set to Control Stop All odd segments When Operation at Reset parameter is set to Fixed Control All even segments Initialized only when the Program Output Selection parameter is set for segment outputs Initialized only when the Program Output Selection parameter is set for time signals Setting Lists AG OL indino wesboOld 440 nd no webo NO 6 1nqlnO d 440 8 nd no wesbold Z 1ndinO weibold 9 1ndinQ 4 G ndino wesbold r indino wesbold g 1indino ure46ojg c indino wesbold L indino wesbold oul L
280. g is reached the set value will flash and cannot be decreased any further 3 Follow steps 1 and 2 to change the set value to the desired value The setting is saved 2 seconds after it is changed or when a key other A or X Key is pressed When setting the Manual MV parameter the set value is output every 50 ms The set value is saved as described above 4 6 4 3 Initial Setting Example I 4 3 Initial Setting Example This section describes how to make the initial settings for the sensor input type alarm type control period and other parameters Use the Key and Key to move through the displays The parameter that is displayed next depends on how long the key is held down Interpreting the Example Changing the Parameter The dotted line arrow shown on the left indicates that more parameters follow Press the mode key several times to switch to the desired parameter Changing numeric values The numeric value or selection can be changed with the A and S keys Typical Example EBAR T Q 4B Control object i E sensor Control mode Control output Alarm value 1 PID Pulse voltage output 12 V DC S
281. ge within the specified range Input Type Switch e s the switch set to the correct setting for the sensor you are using Wiring Are the terminal connections correct e Are the polarities correct e Are any wires loose e Are any wires or cables broken or not making contact Communications Settings e Do the communications settings match those of the host system If you are unable to identify the problem from the above or cannot solve the problem investigate in more detail Check parameters Are the parameters set correctly e Check for restrictions on the function you are using oee if the cause of the problem lies in your settings Infer from conditions If you were not able to identify the cause of the problem by checking the above refer to the tables starting in 10 2 Error Messages P 10 3 10 2 Error Messages 10 2 Error Messages When an error occurs Displays No 1 and 2 show error messages Refer to the following table to check the meaning of the message and troubleshoot the problem i i Output state at error Display Display m No 1 No 2 Control outputs Alarm output Unc Uniteror The unit requires servicing Hace CHG Unitchange Contact your OMRON dc5P 1 Display unit error representative EEPROM error Hold down the L Key for at least 5 seconds in the error display to OFF OFF initialize See Caution MV output according to MV at PV Error parame
282. greater 1 digit max Voltage variation K thermocouple at 100 C max 10 C max influence See note 3 Platinum resistance thermometer u X196 of PV or 2 C whichever is greater 1 digit max Analog input 196 FS 1 digit max Standard Control Heating Control or Cooling Control Heating cooling Control Standard Control with Remote SP Models with 2 Input Channels only Heating Cooling Control with Remote SP Models with 2 Input Channels only Control mode Cascade Standard Control Models with 2 Input Channels only Cascade Heating Cooling Control Models with 2 Input Channels only Proportional Control Models with 2 Input Channels only Position proportional Control Position proportional Control Model only 0 2 to 99 0 s increments of 0 1 seconds During time divided proportional control output 0 0095 to 999 9995 FS increments of 0 0195 FS 0 096 to 3999 9 s increments of 0 1 second 0 096 to 3999 9 s increments of 0 1 second 0 01 to 99 99 FS increments of 0 01 FS 0 to 100 0 increments of 0 1 FS 4 Alarm setting range gies 7 l l Decimal point position depends on input type and decimal point position setting Input sampling period 50 ms 2 000 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 min charged terminals of different polarity Vibration frequency 10 to 55 Hz Vibration resistance Acceleration 20 m s Shadi focictance 150 m s relay contacts 100 m s 3 times each on 3 axes and in 6 20 us Guren 100 to 240 V
283. han 1 s than 1 s than 1 s E key less than 1 s 1s 3s or more or more Control stops Alarm Setting Level Time Signal Setting I Level i _ key less key less l than 1 s than 1 s i 1 s n F nput Initial gt Control Initial Control Initial Display n Setting Setting Setting un Adiustment I I VLevel ia key Level key Levele J _ key eve ili Level m i i less than 1 s less than 1 s less than 1 s less than 1 s less than 1 s I II key less than 1 s i L b co ds ea Gumi SSS SS SS SS SS a isa Sa SS o a Si CD Control in progress CO Control stopped Parameter Changes within Control Initial Setting Level Control Initial Setting 2 Level OUT 1 Control Transfer TRL 1 Transf tput 1 Output 1 Assignment su Lovver Limit 1 TRH 2 Transfer Output 2 Upper Limit Control Transfer Output 4 Assignment 0 to 32 TRL 2 Transfer Output 2 EV 1 Event Input 1 Assignment Lower Limit 0 to 81 TRH 3 Transfer Output 3 Upper Limit EV 10 Event Input 10 Assignment MRES Transfer Output 3 Lower Limit SBO 1 Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment TRH 4 Transfer Output 4 Upper Limit
284. he communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command When communications are used to write set values in the Operation Program Setting Adjustment Adjust Backup Mode ment 2 Alarm Set Setting PID Setting Time Signal Setting or Approximation Setting Level the data is also written to EEPROM When communications are used to write set values in the Operation Program Setting Adjustment Adjust ment 2 Alarm Set Setting PID Setting Time Signal Setting or Approximation Setting Level the data is not written to EEPROM When SP tracking or PV tracking is ON and the mode is changed to Remote SP Mode or Manual Mode the SP is not written to EEPROM When a change is made to a parameter setting using a key operation the data is written to EEPROM RAM Write Mode When the write mode is changed from RAM Write Mode to Backup Mode the set values in the Operation Program Setting Adjustment Adjustment 2 Alarm Set Setting PID Setting Time Signal Setting and Approximation Setting Levels are written to EEPROM Each level is described in 4 1 Setting Levels and Key Operations P 4 2 The time required for RAM backup depends on the num ber of settings that were changed in RAM Backup Mode The more settings that were changed the longer the time required For example if all settings in Operation Pro gram Setting Adjustment Adjustment 2 Alarm Set Set ting PID Setting Time
285. he operation is 0 63 times the input data First Order Lag Operation 1 Time Constant Input data N 0 63A Operation result Time constant value First Order Lag Operation OFF Disabled OFF 1 to 4 Enabled ON Enabled First Order Lag Operation 1 to 4 Time Constants s fo E Moving Average Movement Average e The moving average operation reduces sudden changes in the input due to noise and other factors and can be enabled separately for gt I each input To use the moving average operation set the Movement Average Enabled parameter to ON the default setting is OFF e A count must also be selected in the Move Average 1 to 4 Move Average Count parameter Selections are 1 2 4 8 16 and 32 Move Average 1 times Move Average Count Input data Operation result Time value Movement Average OFF Disabled ON OFF 1 to 4 Enabled Enabled Move Average 1 to 4 Times Move Average Count 5 5 I Section 5 Functions and Operations M Broken line Approximation Broken line approximation is used to correct non linearity in the input Twenty broken line approximation points can be set for input 1 To use broken line approximation set
286. hows the MV CH ri mu Present value PV 4 e Lr Z ULLA Manipulated variable MV S Jg zu Eri ELL aS ca r co cc MANU indicator lights When changed with the Al and Keys the MV is output once every 50 ms yu e When a potentiometer is connected to a Position proportional Control Model Display No 1 shows the PV and Display No 2 shows the valve opening When a potentiometer is not connected to a Position proportional Control Model Display No 2 shows With potentiometer Without potentiometer LL LL LL r oo Lr I zm I 1 l K mp 4 mp 4 x r Hn r Present value lt E 7 Valve opening 2 Valve opening m 7 nil ca ca oe LI MANU lights up MANU lights up mut F ca ca LL LE e In Manual Mode operation is performed manually and the MANU indicator lights e The Manual Output Method parameter is used to select the MV that is used when entering Manual Mode The MV prior to entering Manual Mode can be held or the Manual MV Initial Value parameter can be used Switching between Manual Mode and Auto Mode is accomplished using the PF Key or with the Auto Manual parameter in Operation Level If either the PF1 Setting parameter or PF2 Setting parameter is set to A M the Auto Manual parameter will not appear in Opera
287. ibrati e 1 Temperature SP lower limit 1 to upper limit of J Transfer Output 3 Upper h H Calibration sensor Setting range 3 1 4 input Standard 0 heating or cooling 1 Limit riz p DU t DSB 1 Scaling Display Value 1 19999 to Scaling Display Value 2 1 SP lower limit 1 to smaller of 99999 and display value equivalent to input upper limit Lovver limit of sensor Setting range to SP upper limit 1 Larger of 19999 and display value equivalent to input lower limit to SP upper limit 1 Analog en V Tipi sx Transfer Output 3 Lower Limit 2 input Standard 0 heating or cooling 1 Standard with remote SP 2 Heating or cooling 3 with remote SP Proportional 4 Cascade standard 5 Cascade heating or cooling 6 11 MOT Travel Time 1 to 999 4 2 Temperature INP 2 Scaling Input Value 2 222 en Analog 4 E L n Lit DSP2 Scaling Display Value 2 Scaling Display Value 1 1 to 99999 23 cu 4 DP Decimal Point Position 0104 D Yles RSPH Upper Limit of Sensor Setting Range 1 less than 1 second Advanced function Setting Level 4 gt Expansion control Setting Level RSPL Lower Limit of Sensor Setting Range 1 less than 1 second al PVDP PV Decimal Point Display OFF ON LAE _ INIT 1 iL C Parameter Initialization
288. ibration 9 5 three position control 4 31 Time Signal 5 33 Time Signal OFF Times 8 45 Time Signal ON Times 8 45 Time Signal Set Segments 8 44 Time Signal Setting Level 8 43 A 21 Time Unit of Ramp Rate 8 61 transfer output 5 47 scaling 5 48 using 5 47 Transfer Output Lower Limit 8 69 Transfer Output Upper Limit 8 69 transfer protocol CompoWay F communications 6 3 Modbus communications 7 3 Transmission Wait Time 8 87 Travel Time 8 73 troubleshooting 10 1 Up Key 1 7 user calibration 9 1 9 4 completion information 9 3 using auxiliary outputs 4 37 Valve Opening Monitor 8 14 variable areas 6 7 variable types 6 7 W Wait 8 18 Wait Band Lower Limit 8 20 Wait Band Upper Limit 8 20 Wait Mode 8 96 wait operation 5 32 wiring 2 10 OMRON OMRON Corporation Industrial Automation Company Control Devices Division H Q Analog Controller Division Shiokoji Horikawa Shimogyo ku Kyoto 600 8530 Japan Tel 81 75 344 7080 Fax 81 75 344 7189 Regional Headquarters OMRON EUROPE B V Wegalaan 67 69 NL 2132 JD Hoofddorp The Netherlands Tel 31 2356 81 300 Fax 31 2356 81 388 OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC 1 East Commerce Drive Schaumburg IL 60173 U S A Tel 1 847 843 7900 Fax 1 847 843 8568 OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE LTD 83 Clemenceau Avenue 11 01 UE Square 239920 Singapore Tel 65 6835 301 1 Fax 65 6835 271 1 OMRON CHINA CO LTD Room 2211 Bank o
289. ications Unit No 8 85 Communications Writing 5 50 8 23 CompoWay F communications 6 26 Modbus communications 7 24 Communications Writing OFF ON 5 39 Composite Read from Variable Area CompoWay F communications 6 19 Composite Read Registration CompoWay F communications 6 24 Composite Read Registration Confirmation CompoWay F communications 6 25 Composite Registration Read CompoWay F communications 6 25 CompoWay F communications 6 2 Control Initial Setting 2 Level 8 63 A 26 Control Initial Setting Level 8 55 A 24 Control Mode 8 58 control modes 4 15 Control Period 4 20 Control Period Cooling 8 27 Control Period Heating 8 27 control ranges A 4 Control Transfer Output Assignments 1 11 4 21 8 64 control transfer outputs terminals 2 11 Controller Attribute Read CompoWay F communications 6 36 Controller Status Read CompoWay F communications 6 38 Cooling Coefficient 8 25 cooling coefficient 4 16 coordinated operation 3 7 5 12 correction two point 5 3 Dead Band 8 25 dead band 4 15 4 18 Decimal Point Position 8 51 Derivative Time 8 40 dimensions 2 2 direct operation 4 20 direct operation cooling 1 10 Direct Reverse Operation 8 58 Display Adjustment Level 8 80 A 33 Display Alarm Setting Level 8 37 Display Auto return Time 8 82 display No 1 1 5 display No 2 1 5 display No 3 1 5 4 5 Display PID Selection 8 40 display ranges A 4 Display Refresh Period 8 82 disp
290. ifications and load The polarity of the load power supply connected to Wire correctly the transistor output is incorrect Operation stops after the power is turned ON e Send the Run command after turning ON the power e Set operation to continue at startup number the inputs are not held ON or OFF program number An attempt was made to use communications to set The latest specification takes priority regardless of the program number when using event inputs were the program number specification method being used to set the program number The alarm mode is set to O No Alarm Set the correct alarm mode An alarm with a standby sequence is specified Specify an alarm without a standby sequence A deviation alarm is mistakenly set for an absolute Set the correct alarm mode value alarm or vice versa Settings 10 9 l Section 10 Troubleshooting 10 6 Inferring Causes from Conditions Communications Problems E Cannot Communicate or No Response The baud rate differs from the host system Make sure that the baud rates are the same The communications settings are different from the Make sure that the communications settings are host system the same conditions o C 9 c 5 O O The number of parallel connections exceeds the Do not exceed the specifications specifications e For RS 485 a maximum of 31 nodes can be connected The length of the transmission path exceeds the Do not
291. ifted 1 bit to the right and O is placed in the MSB 4 If the bit shifted from the LSB is O step 3 is repeated If the bit shifted from the LSB is 1 an XOR is taken of the contents of the CRC register and H AO01 and the result is returned to the CRC register 7 2 Frames I b Steps 3 and 4 are repeated until the contents of the register have been shifted 8 bits to the right 6 If the end of the message has not been reached an XOR is taken of the next byte of the CRC register and the message the result is returned to the CRC register and the procedure is repeated from step 3 7 The result the value in the CRC register is placed in the lower byte of the message Example of Appending the Result If the calculated CRC value is H 1234 this is appended as follows to the command frame Slave Function address code Data CRC 16 d Low High E ES Bytes 1 1 2 CRC 16 calculation range M Response Frames Normal Response Frames Slave Function address code Data CRC 16 Bytes 1 fo 2 CRC 16 calculation range Error Response Frames Slave Function Error address code code CRC 16 Bytes 1 1 i 2 CRC 16 calculation range The unit number that was specified in the command Slave address frame is returned here This is the unit number of the responding E5AR T ER T The function code that was received is returned here In an error response frame H 80 is added to the value Function co
292. ill not be written to EEPROM 4 48 4 13 Manual Operation b The procedure for switching to Manual Mode during control and changing the MV is given below 6 Auto Manual Set for PF1 or PF2 Setting 1 Hold down the PF Key set to switch between auto and manual at least 1 second The MANU indicator will light and the mode will change to Manual To return to Auto Mode hold down the PF Key for at least 1 second The MANU indicator will go OFF and the mode will change to Auto Mode 6 Auto Manual Not Set for PF1 or PF2 Setting 1 Press the ce Key repeatedly to select A Auto Manual 2 Press the Al Key to switch to Manual The MANU indicator will light and the mode will change to Manual To resume control follow the same procedure to switch back to Alita Auto The MANU indicator will go OFF and the mode will change to Auto Mode Switching between Auto and Manual Mode is also possi ble using an event input or communications For event inputs refer to 5 8 Using Event Inputs P 5 39 For communications refer to 5 10 Using Communications P 5 49 4 49 I Section 4 S
293. ill prevent a function from achieving the expected result Set the input type before setting the scaling value If the input type is changed after setting the scaling value the scal ing value will be automatically initialized 2 Hint Hint gives useful hints advice and other supplemental information Overshooting can be adjusted using the external interference over shoot adjustment function when there is excessive overshooting in temperature control i e in response to external interference 3 Notation used to indicate various information on parameters Function Setting Monitor and Reference are explained in Section 8 Parameters Abbreviations Abbreviations used in the parameters illustrations and text are listed in the following table PV se Data after scaling is shown in engineering units such as C m and g EU is used to indicate the minimum increment of such a quantity For example the minimum increment of 50 02 m is 0 01 m and thus 1 EU would be equal to 0 01 m Notation Used for Settings Letters numbers and abbreviations in settings that appear on the E5AR T ER T display are as follows R amp CjdjE F G Hv 7 F L ia B C DJ E F G H LI U K IL M a P q 5 trt lu Y 6 475 N o T U V W X Y Z 1 Most signif icant digit Revision History The revision code of this manual is given at the end of the catalog number at the bott
294. imit the rate of increase in the MV set the MV Change Rate Limit Mode parameter to 1 value my Change nate Lint 6 046 4000 s Heating MV Change Rate Limit 0 0 to 100 0 s Cooling MV Change Rate Limit 0 Increase decrease Mode 1 Increase only 5 16 5 3 Output Adjustment Functions I M MV at Reset MV at Reset B MV at PV Error MV at PV Error e This parameter specifies the value of the MV when control is stopped In heating cooling control a negative value is used for the cooling MV Thus when the MV at Reset parameter is positive the MV will be sent to the heating output and when negative the MV will be sent to the cooling output The default setting is 0 0 which means there is no output at a reset for either standard or heating cooling control value 5 0 to 105 0 Standard control 105 0 to 105 0 Heating cooling control MV at Reset Note The order of priority of the MV parameter settings is Manual MV MV at Reset MV at PV Error This parameter is used to output a fixed MV when an input error or remote SP input error occurs When position proportional control is selected the MV at PV Error parameter also functions when a potentiometer input error occurs when the Operation at Potentiometer Input Error parameter is set to Stop or Close VVhen control is stopped
295. in Alarm Close in alarm N O Open in alarm N C Level DSL MV Display Selection V heating O MV cooing C O BART Bar Graph Display Item 1 RET Display Auto return Time 0 to 99 0 Display auto return disabled D REF Display Refresh Period OFF 0 5 1 2 4 MONL Monitor Item Level Setting 2 SC M Start Display Scan at Power ON OFF ON 1 1 SC T Display Scan Period 0 to 99 1 OFF Elapsed program time percentage PRG T Elapsed segment time percentage SEG T Deviation 1 EU Deviation 10 EU Deviation 20 EU Deviation 100 EU MV Heating Valve opening O MV Cooling C O 2 Disabled OFF Input Initial Setting Level Control Initial Setting Level Control Initial Setting 2 Level Alarm Setting Level Display Adjustment Level Communication Setting Level Advanced Function Setting Level Expansion Control Setting Level 1 second less than less than less than p Display Adjustment Communications Setting Level 2 51 PSEL Protocol Selection CWF MOD U NO Communications Unit No 0 to 99 BPS Communications Speed 9 6 19 2 38 4 LEN Communications Data Length 7 8 SBIT Communications Stop Bit PRTY Communications Parity NONE EVEN ODD SDWT Transmission Wait Time 0 to 99 m Operation Program Adjustment Adjustment Alarm Set PID Setting Time Signal Approxi
296. in alarm N C SB7N Auxiliary Output 7 Open in Alarm Close in alarm N O or Open in alarm N C SB8N Auxiliary Output 8 Open in Alarm Close in alarm N O or Open in alarm N C SB9N Auxiliary Output 9 Open in Alarm Close in alarm N O or Open in alarm N C SB10N Auxiliary Output 10 Open in Alarm Close in alarm N O or Open in alarm N C CO Control in progress CO Control stopped Approximation Level PEEL J Alarm Type 1 to 4 f e Setting y 8 14 Alarm Setting Level L 3 Alarm set for Auxiliary Output Setting range No alarm function Upper and lower limit alarm Upper limit alarm Lower limit alarm Upper and lower limit range alarm Upper and lower limit alarm with standby sequence Upper limit alarm with standby sequence Lower limit alarm with standby sequence Absolute value upper limit alarm Absolute value lower limit alarm Absolute value upper limit alarm with standby sequence Absolute value lower limit alarm with standby sequence Related Parameters Alarm Set Alarm Value Alarm Set Setting Level P 8 37 Alarm Set Alarm Upper limit Alarm Set Setting Level P 8 38 Auxiliary Output Assignment Control Initial Setting 2 Level P 8 67 Alarm Latch Alarm Setting Level P 8 76 Alarm Hysteresis Alarm Setting Level P 8 77 Standby Sequence Reset Alarm Setting Level P 8 78 A
297. in the following command frame Command Frame Slave Function Write start Number of Byte Write data address code address elements count Data 1 Data 1 1 1 2 2 1 Number of elements x 2 bytes m m Data n Data n CRC 16 s pin pron Data name Description Specify the unit number of the Set in hexadecimal from H 01 to H 63 1 to 99 The function code for the Write to Variable Area com Function code mand is H 10 Specify the address of the set value to write For more information on addresses refer to Appendix First address of write Setting Lists P A 6 Specify the number of set values to write times 2 for the number of elements The setting range is H 0002 to H 0068 2 to 104 Example When the number of set values is 2 specify 0004 Byte count Specify the number of bytes of data to write Response Frame Slave Function Write start Number of address code address elements CRC 16 o de TL 1 1 2 2 2 Slave address The value from the command frame is returned here The received function code is returned here In an error response frame H 80 is added to the received function code to indicate that it is an error Function code response Example Received function code H 10 Function code in error response frame H 90 Number of elements Write start The write start address that was received is returned address here Number of The received number of e
298. ing AT enabling disabling writing parameters with communications changing the SP mode adjusting hysteresis and input correction settings Level Changes at Startup Up To Adjustment Level Povver ON 0 755 Adiustment Adjustment 2 77 key evel key ey Vm Lage F key less less than 1 s less than 1 s key less than 1 s than 1 s Approximation Time Signal PID Setti Alarm Set Setting Setting d ng Setting Level 122 level L J key 12 4 key Level EAA 1 less than 1 s less than 1 s less than 1 s Control in progress Parameter Changes within Adjustment Level Adjustment Level La me arr Mux 0 Zt Z1 nin Note Position proportional Control Model Completely Open Hold Completely Closed 1 0 1 8 22 AT AT Execute Cancel OFF 0 8 CMWT Communications Writing SPMD SP Mode PSP RSP FSP FSP Fixed SP Set Point Lower Limit to Set Point Upper Limit C SC Cooling Coefficient C DB Dead band 199 99 999 99 OF R Manual Reset Value 0 0 100 0 HYS Hysteresis Heating 0 01 99 99 CHYS Hysteresis Cooling 0 01 99 99
299. ing Level c l Key repeatedly to select the Alarm Set 1 Alarm Value 1 parameter Press the Key to change the set value to 10 0 4 12 Starting and Stopping Operation b 4 12 Starting and Stopping Operation M Starting Operation Run and Stopping Operation Reset Operation at Reset To start program operation set the Run Reset parameter to Run To stop program operation set the Run Reset parameter to Reset Program execution will stop if the Hold parameter is set to ON The operation status when the Run Reset parameter is set to Reset can be selected The two operation statuses outlined below can be selected by using the Operation at Reset parameter e Operation at Reset Parameter Set to Control Stop The following diagram shows the status transition when the Operation at Reset parameter is set to control stop Fixed control See note 3 See note 1 RESET control stop See note 2 Note1 Program operation starts from the segment 1 SP 2 Control is stopped while resetting 3 The status switches to fixed control in SP mode Control stop is held when the mode is shifted to fixed control Fixed SP Mode or Remote SP Mode during the reset e When using Standard Models set the MV at Reset parameter to between 5 0 and 105 0 to output during reset The default is 0 0 For heating cooling control set the MV at Reset parameter to between 105 0 and 1
300. ing Level l Section 6 CompoWay F Communications 6 16 NE NENNEN Description type Input Initial Setting Level Control Initial Setting Level Control Initial Setting 2 Level Alarm Setting Level Setting area 1 Operation D Display Adjustment Level stopped Communications Setting Level Advanced Function Setting Level Expansion Control Setting Level 6 9 Commands and Responses I 6 9 Commands and Responses The EBAR T ER T provides a set of commands that read from variable areas write to variable areas execute operation commands and execute other services provided by the CompoWay F communications protocol The commands supported by the EBAR T ER T are described below M Reading Monitor Values Variable Command MRC SRC type Address Bit position Number of elements Monitor value Monitor value Address ing 3 Variable 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 CO 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 0105 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 C1 0103 0104 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 C None MV Monitor Heating MV Monitor Cooling PV MV Monitor Heating MV Monitor Cooling Present Set Point Alarm Set 1 Alarm Value 1 Alarm Set 1 Alarm Value Upper Limit 1 Alarm Set 1 Alarm Value Lower Limit 1 Alarm Set 1 Alarm Value Lower Limit 1 0206 Alarm Set 1 Alarm Value 2 0207 Alarm Set 1 Alarm Value Upper Limit 2 0208 Alarm Se
301. ing Level CF Control Initial Setting 2 Level Alarm Setting Level 0200 to 023B 3 Display Adjustment Level T Communications Setting Level Ad dF ion Setting Level 0300 to 033B 4 vance unction etting eve Expansion Control Setting Level This command is used to write set values The number of elements can be set from 2 to 24 to write set values at consecutive addresses To specify an address refer to Appendix Setting Lists P A 6 Parameters in setting area 1 can be written from setting area 1 An operation error will occur if parameters are written from setting area 0 To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command To store the set values for Operation Program Setting Adjustment Adjustment 2 Alarm Set Setting PID Setting Time Signal Setting or Approximation Setting Level in EEPROM select Backup Mode and execute the RAM Write Mode command If Backup Mode is not selected the set values will not remain in memory when the power is turned OFF For more information on the above levels refer to 4 1 Setting Levels and Key Operations P 4 2 MRC SRC Response code Hesponse Codes The response for a normal end is shown above For the response codes refer to 6 6 Write to Variable Area P 6 11 6 9 Commands and Responses I E Set Value Compound Write Response MRC SRC Variable type Address Bit position Dat
302. ing Level and Approximation Setting Level are written to EEPROM Each level is described in 4 1 Setting Levels and Key Operations P 4 2 The time required for RAM backup depends on the num ber of settings that were changed in RAM Backup Mode The more settings that were changed the longer the time required For example if all settings in the Operation Pro gram Setting Adjustment Adjustment 2 Alarm Set Set ting PID Setting Time Signal Setting and Approximation Levels were changed the most time would be required which is about 5 seconds MRC SRC Response code Hesponse Codes The response for a normal end is shown above For the response codes refer to 6 7 Operation Commands P 6 13 6 29 I Section 6 CompoWay F Communications E Save RAM Data Response B Software Reset Response Instruction Related MRC SRC code information This command writes the set values in the Operation Level Program Setting Level Adjustment Level Adjustment 2 Level Alarm Set Setting Level PID Setting Level Time Signal Setting Level and Approximation Setting Level to EEPROM For information on these levels refer to 4 1 Setting Levels and Key Operations P 4 2 This command can be used in both setting area O and setting area 1 To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command MRC SRC Response code Hesponse Codes The response for
303. ing ON control using after Power ON Period power Key OFF Disabled R Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled e If the PF1 Setting or PF2 Setting parameter is set to CH CH Key the PF1 or PF2 Key can be used as a CH Key If the CH Key is not set for a function key automatic starting of the display scan after turning ON the power is also disabled e When the display scan is enabled use the Key to start or stop the display scan To start the display scan hold down the Key in the Operation Level Program Setting Level Adjustment Level Adjustment 2 Level Alarm Set Setting Level PID Setting Level Time Signal Setting Level Approximation Setting Level or Monitor Item Level Display No 1 will start to flash after the key is held down for 1 second and after the key is held down for another 2 seconds the display will stop flashing and the display scan will begin e f the Key is held down for more than 1 second during the display scan the display scan will stop During the display scan only the Key is enabled To use any other keys the display scan must first be stopped with the Key e The Channel Indicator in Manual Mode shows the manual operation display 5 4 Display and Key Adjustment Functions I Example of Display Scan Operation Power ON PV Present Set Point Initial state Normal operation 9 a
304. ing and function of the parameter Indicates the setting range and initial setting of the parameter Indicates parameters used for monitor values Indicates the description of a procedure for operating the T Indicates where a parameter is described and notes related to param eters Conditions for Displaying Parameters run stop A parameter will only appear on the display of the E5AR T ER T when the conditions for use of the parameter are satisfied Conditions for use are indicated to the right of the parameter name Protected parameters however are not displayed regardless of the conditions for use although they are in effect For parameters that can be set separately for each channel on a Controller with more than one input appears to upper left of the parameter in this section a mu UR m LL K FUE 5 During control using advanced PID control Setting data name Conditions for use Display text Display No 1 Indicates a parameter that can Level indication be set separately for each channel Display No 3 Order of Parameters 8 2 Parameter are described by level 8 2 Protect Level L Prt 8 2 Protect Level Lr Protect Level consists of four types of protection Operation Adjustment Protection Initial Setting Protection Setting Change Protection and PF Key Protection Each is used to protect the corresponding
305. input input EVI EV1 EV2 5 Using contact 7 input Using non contact input EV3 EV4 EV5 EV6 Using contact Using non contact input input e The input ratings of each input are as follows ON residual voltage of 1 5 V max OFF leakage current of 0 1 mA max 2 15 I Section 2 Preparations Communications e To communicate with a host system connect the communications Terminals line between terminals F1 and F2 on the E5AR T or between C1 EBAR T and C2 on the EBER T E5AR T E5ER T K BH O BG 2 2 AO C RS 485 e The connection type is 1 1 or 1 N With a 1 N installation up to 32 Controllers including the host computer can be connected The maximum total cable length is 500 m Use a shielded twisted pair cable AWG28 min Cable Reference Diagram LE AWG28 min conductor 7 cross sectional area 0 081 mm min e Use a resistance of 100 to 125 Q 1 2 W for the terminators Install terminators at both ends of the transmission path including the host computer ope 5 e v ei elv e To connect to an RS 232C port on a computer use an RS 232C 485 converter Example converter K3SC RS 232C RS 485 Interface Converter K32 23209 Adapter K3SC 10 50 RS 232C RS 485 Converte
306. int Press the Key to set Segment the set point to EG Set Point 9 Press the ce Key to select aE Segment Time Press the A Key to set Segment Time the time to 1 30 10 Press the cel Key to select R b Wait Make sure the setting is aFF Wait 11 Press the ke Key to return to E A Segment Editing The segment s Lt J Segment Editing number will automatically change to 3 3 ni MANU 21 0 1 41 Note Continue repeating the above procedure to set segments 3 to 6 When finished press the _ Key for less than 1 second to move to the Operation Level MN Adjustment To adjust the PID constants execute autotuning For more information see 4 10 Determining the PID Constants AT or Manual Settings P 4 33 3 6 3 2 Coordinated Electric Oven Operation 3 2 Coordinated Electric Oven Operation With Models with Four Input Channels coordinated operation can be performed based on channel 1 Operation is programmed using the same program for all channels Offsets can be set for channels 2 to 4 M
307. inue e 5t Reset Status Fixed SP Mode juo M l E Lr l r L Z j Related Information End Condition in 5 7 Program Operation Functions P 5 38 8 95 I Section 8 Parameters CH Wait Mode 8 96 e Setting al 2 l This parameter is used to specify the Wait operating mode Wait at Segment End When this set value is selected the program will not move to the next segment when one segment is completed unless the difference deviation between the PV and SP are within the wait band The program will move to the next segment as soon as the deviation is within the wait band Always Wait The difference deviation between the PV and SP are constantly compared during program operation If the deviation is not within the wait band the SP is held at the point that the deviation went outside the wait band and the program does not move on The program moves on as soon as the deviation enters the wait band Setting range Unit Default value 22 PE 277v End nd Wait at Segment End Le Related Information Wait in 5 7 Program Operation Functions P 5 32 Related Parameters Wait Band Upper Limit and Wait Band Lower Limit Program Setting Level P 8 20 y 8 18 Expansion Control Setting Level L Eu CH Alarm SP Selection n Setting Program End ON Time n Setting
308. ion 9 8 Analog inputs are calibrated in the following groups according to the analog input type current input group 15 16 voltage input group 1 17 18 and voltage input group 2 19 E5AR T ER T Input power supply LE STV o NEM DMM 1 Connect the power supply 2 Connect the STV and DMM to the input terminals of the analog input as shown above Different input terminals are used for current input and voltage input Make sure the connections are correct 3 Turn ON the power 4 Move to Calibration Level A 30 minute aging timer will begin Perform aging using this timer as a guideline When 30 minutes has elapsed Display No 2 will show O You can proceed to the next stop before the display shows O 5 Press the ce Key The display at left will appear The count value that was input will be displayed on Display No 2 in hexadecimal Set the STV as follows For input types 15 and 16 20 mA For input types 17 and 18 5 V e For input type 19 10V r 6 Wait until the count on Display No 2 is sufficiently stable and then press the Key This tentatively registers the calibration data at this point 9 4 Analog Input Calibration I Input types 15
309. is response before sending the next command too short Mistake in host system program Correct the program e Check the command in a line monitor Try executing a sample program o The unit number setting is different from the unit Make sure the unit numbers match number specified in the command d 10 10 10 7 Inferring Causes from Conditions Reset Operation 10 7 Inferring Causes from Conditions Reset Operation Bl Outputs Are Made While Resetting Operation Will Not Stop Possibiecause Sol o The MV at Reset parameter Adjustment Level is Set the MV at Reset parameter to 0 0 set to a value greater than 0 Manual Mode is in effect Set the manual output to 0 or switch to Auto Mode The Operation at Reset parameter Control Initial Set the Operation at Reset parameter to Stop Setting Mode is set to Fixed Control Control o o 02 10 11 l Section 10 Troubleshooting lt o i a m 2 10 12 Appendix SDC CIICATONS nuy ustuna mi mu kuu abdulla A 2 Sensor Input Setting Ranges and Display Control Ranges A 4 le MEC IP A 5 ngog w A 6 Parameter Charlesa uu a A 48 X c o o lt Appendix Specifications E Unit Ratings Lu 100 to 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 24 VAC 50 60 Hz or 24 VDC marking See note 1 100 to 120 VAC 50 60 Hz 24 VAC 50 60 Hz or 24 VDC certification See note 1
310. is set to a value other than No alarm Upper and lower limit alarm Upper and lower limit of range alarm and Upper and lower limit alarm with standby sequence Setting range Unit Default value 19899 to 89999 F 19999 to 99999 Related Parameters Alarm Type Alarm Setting Level P 8 75 Alarm Latch Alarm Setting Level P 8 76 Alarm Hysteresis Alarm Setting Level P 8 77 Standby Sequence Reset Alarm Setting Level P 8 78 Auxiliary Output Open in Alarm Alarm Setting Level P 8 79 Alarm SP Selection Expansion Control Setting Level P 8 97 8 CO N I Section 8 Parameters CH Alarm Set Alarm Upper Limit 1 Alarm Set Alarm Upper Limit 2 Alarm Set Alarm Upper Limit 3 Alarm Set Alarm Upper Limit 4 Alarm Set Alarm Lower Limit 1 Alarm Set Alarm Lower Limit 2 Alarm Set Alarm Lower Limit 3 Alarm Set Alarm Lower Limit 4 1 to 4 8 38 e Setting 1 na la and a w x ope rs r pe F p pe md pang 4 ku Lec w oe pa ing e x x ya a 4 lt x mrs x bos qe go og u x ee Alarm Type parameter set to upper and lower limit of range alarm These parameters are used to set the alarm upper limits and alarm lower limits for A
311. it time Default 20 ms Note Default settings are shaded 6 2 6 1 Communications Method I M Transfer Protocol The host computer sends a command frame and the E5AR T ER T returns a response frame based on the contents of the command frame One response frame is sent in response to one command frame Host computer E5AR ER T The exchange of the command frame and response frame is described below After receiving a response from the Controller have the host computer wait at least 5 ms before sending the next command When writing multiple sets of parameters in a row such as when writing to the variable area or performing a compound write control characteristics may be affected Observe the following points Write a maximum of three parameters at at time 5 ms min 6 3 I Section 6 CompoWay F Communications 6 2 Frames Commands from the host computer and responses from the take the form of frames that conform to the CompoWay F protocol The data included in command frames and response frames is described in this section In the following descriptions an H following a numeric value for example 02H indicates that the value is a hexadecimal number Numbers or letters enclosed in quotation marks for example 00 are ASCII data E Command Frames FINS mini STX Node No Sub address SID command text ETX BCC el w fv 1 2 2 1 BCC calculation rang
312. itial Setting Level P 8 50 8 99 l Section 8 Parameters CH CH PV Tracking 8 100 f a Setting f e Setting yum L m ar UK e This parameter is normally used at the default value This parameter sets the 2 PID constant o Setting range Unit Default value w 42 pr E y e This parameter is used so have the fixed SP track the PV when in Manual Mode The setting prevents abrupt changes in the MV when switching from Manual Mode to Auto Mode Auto mode Manual mode Auto mode Time Setting range Unit Default value FF Disabled TENN in Enabled m arr Disabled If an input error occurs during PV tracking the fixed SP will change to the upper limit of the sensor setting range y 8 18 Expansion Control Setting Level L E L CH m X X X Manual Output Method Manual MV Initial Value nhac Standard Control Model These parameters are used to specify how the MV is output when switching from Auto Mode to Manual Mode e When Hold MV is selected the MV at the time of switching is held after which it can be changed using the Manual MV parameter O
313. jequunu wnwxew u Z A 25 gq ddn z enjeA Aejdsiq Suleos ui iSAo enjeA Aejdsiq Burpeog 6ojeuy indui JOSUAS JO siluui 13M0 pue Jeddn jeg indui eynyejedujo SAMO O Se pezi eniui ase s um s peDueuo sen eA ejdsip Bui jeos yun eunje1eduue d i 3ndui v uSuM L luloq 19S juesalg dois O1JU0D m dS Iu nu VOS 2 L Ad iuoug WIL HES Ad 1 H Ad do S HES Ad Z QSSININ puooesioeq puooes 1 SSININ puooes anui L Ad enjeA 1ueseJd 0 dSd 3Ulod 19S 1ueseJg 1 49 0402 pexi4 dOLS dois jouju0D dS 1815 dS g S puooes Z IN einuiN L H 4noH HOL sinoH 01 1 ud BulmwesBold estH 10 eyed 10000000 H 00000000 20000000 10000000 00000000 0 SWIL uui 1 deis 0 ININHH mnuliy noH 10000000 00000000 10000000 00000000 00000000 10000000 00000000 H UOW Wop uow _WOD UOW Wop uow Wop uonog eg 11104 199 9640 195 ye uonejedO vedo 100 HEIS Ad 0600 6100 dwey yun awit 0640 8100 Jo deis 3200 2100 yur euirp ureiboid 240 9100 HBEHH u uonisod 6umes v ze slu uu6 s z g sjuawBes 02 c 91 syu wb s 94 1 ZL slu uB s Z 0 8 S1ueuiBesg 8 eGues 1ojyuouj Bumes YOO00000 H
314. juowubissy e 1ndino Ayeyixny p230 2100 jueujuBissy z 1ndino Aieilixny Et al x x Wal q AOQE S aures D AOQE SE ulES AOQE SE ulES AOQE SE ulES AOQE SE AOQE SE AOQE SE AOQE SE ulES AOQE SE AOQE SE AOQE SE AOQE SE 78 01 99 PHO FS000000 H 01 27000000 G9 01 ZY SHO 17000000 Ol 42000000 Aeus 9v OL 1ndino weiboid ZHO 32000000 6 1ndino ue1604d ZHO 42000000 AOQE se owes AOQE se owes AOQE se owes m Ai yu Lg LPS LU yum KF DIG Appendix uonisod julod euuroeq z AOQE S aues L zy 8 1ndino ZHO 4 1ndino ZHO zy 9 1ndino weiboid ZHO Lp S ndino WesHOlg ZHO p IndinO wesBold ZH 6 1ndino ZHO z IndinO wesBold ZH 4 1ndino ZHO 9 indino pug wesbold ZHO Ge nd no uny ZHO pe paiqesiq HO e 4019 1ndu dSH ZHO zg s n Indul LHO Le p wely ZHO 06 wely ZHO 62 z wely HO 8z uuelv HO eGues soluoul um s 26000000 42000000 Vc000000 H 66000000 86000000 16000000 92000000 H 66000000 776000000 26000000 00000000 164000000 06000000 4 000000 H 311000000
315. l 100 0 105 0 to 0 0 l The following MVs take priority over the MV limits e Manual MV e MV at Reset e MV at PV error Related Information MV Limits in 5 3 Output Adjustment Functions P 5 15 8 41 I Section 8 Parameters CH H t v sOka PID Automatic Selection Range Upper Limit Hut 1 to 8 When using automatic selection of PID sets use these parameters to set an upper limit for each PID set e Set the automatic selection range upper limit for PID Sets 1 to 8 e The limit for PID Set 8 is fixed at 110 of the sensor setting range and thus does not need to be set e These upper limits are applied to the PV present value DV deviation or SP present SP set in the PID Set Automatic Selection Data parameter The default setting is PV Setting range Unit Default value e 19999 to 99999 1450 0 Setting Related Information PID Sets in 5 2 Control Functions P 5 10 Related Parameters PID Set Automatic Selection Data Expansion Control Setting Level P 8 98 8 42 8 9 Time Signal Setting Level 8 9 Time Signal Setting Level The Time Signal Setting Level is used to set time signals This level is displayed if the Program Output Selection parameter in the Control Initial Setting 2 Level parameter is set to Time Signal Level Changes at Startup Up To Time Signal Setting Level
316. l operation Motor calibration error Check the wiring to the potentiometer and valve drive motor and then try motor calibration again Set the input type switch to type of input you are using so that it agrees with the setting of the Input Type parameter Set value flashes Input type switch error Initializing the Controller will return all parameters to their default settings The default settings may cause unexpected outputs so disconnect all output wires A Caution and eliminate the effects to the system before initializing the parameters In addition write down your settings prior to initialization 10 3 l Section 10 Troubleshooting 10 3 Inferring Causes from Conditions Abnormal Measured Values 5 pun Measured Value Is Abnormal or Measurement Is Not Possible Connections E is 001 Settings 10 4 Possible cause Solution o polarity or connections to the temperature Connect the wires correctly GSSs G A Ee sensor that cannot be used with the 1 Change to a temperature sensor that can be used The temperature sensor Has a broken wire a short Replace the temperature sensor Wa G s A temperature sensor is not connected Connect a temperature sensor Compensating leads that are incompatible with the 1 Directly connect a thermocouple with long leads thermocouple are being used Use compatible compensating leads A metal device other than the therm
317. l Output Heating Channel 1 Control Output Cooling Channel 1 Control Output Heating Channel 2 Control Output Heating Channel 2 Control Output Heating Channel 2 Control Output Cooling Channel 1 Control Output Open Cannot be changed Channel 1 Control Output Close Cannot be changed 4 8 Program Settings I 4 8 Program Settings E Outline of Program Functions Up to 32 programs can be created and each program can have up to 32 segments as long as the total number of segments does not exceed 256 A variety of program profiles can be created using the program link function The following diagram shows a program setting example sp Segment2 Segment 3 Segment 4 Time M Program Parameters e Number of e The maximum number of segments for a program is set using the Segments Number of Segments parameter The default is 16 e The relationship between the number of programs and the number of segments that can be set using the Number of Segments parameter is shown in the following table Setting of Number of Number of pro Number of seg Segments parameter grams ments 12 16 ee Program No The program number cannot be changed while a program is being executed The default program number is 1 except for independent operation The following table shows the setting ranges 4 23 l Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control Number of 4 24 Segments Used Segm
318. l P P 4 33 Set auto tuning HL AT Execute Cancel 28 MU Note Execute 9 Auto tune with the FHaFF f AT execute A and keys p at most important 46 Less than 1 second Operation Level 5 Present Value PV SP AT Completed Program No or Segment No nr J 10 Operation starts Operation starts 4 9 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 4 4 Setting the Input Type Set the input type switch and the Input Type parameter according to the sensor to be used Check the table below and set the correct value for the sensor temperature range to be used When using a Controller with more than one input also set input type switches 2 to 4 and the Input 2 to 4 Type parameters according to the number of input points Input Type Setting Input 1 to a Platinum Resistance Thermometer Pt100 150 0 to 150 0 C 199 99 to 300 00 F Input type SW 1 Make sure that the input 1 type switch is set to TC PT and then turn ON the power 2 Hold down the Key for at least 3 seconds to move from the Operation 1 Level to the Input Initial Setting Level The display will show 6 Input 1 Type 3 Press the xz Key to enter the set value for the desired sensor When using a Pt100 platinum resistance thermometer 150 00 to 150 00 C 199 99 to 300 00 F set the va
319. lB s wepold OO8r luloq 18S JUaWBaS 11 juawbes wesboldg luloq 18S JUaWBaS 9 lu ulB s uleiBoid 0007 JUIOd 18S JUaWBaS S 1 ulejBoid 002 JUIOd 18S JUaWBaS pL juawbes weiboldg 008 a i JUIOd 18S 1u 9u 6 s e Juawbes wesboldg oore JUIOd 3 S JUaWBaS 21 1ueuiBes wesboldg 000 luloq 18S 1ueuifeg LL juawBes weibold 0022 luloq 18S JUaWBaS IJI IJI III IJI IJI d 0L 1ueuiBes Wesiboldg 0082 A JUIOd 18S JUaWBAaS 6 lu ulB s ulejBoid JUIOd 19 JUaWBaS 8 1u ulB s ulejBoid 0002 JUIOd 18S JUaWBaS 1 juawbes wesboldg 002L luloq 18S JUaWBaS HH H 9 juawBbes WwesbOld 0081 va uonisod sseJppy sseJuppy jedi ejqeueA A 41 Appendix I O 1 luloq 18S 1 H Le Juawbes uuej6oid 0022 jj 0975 7 2 JUIOd 18S JUaWBaS H 0 juewBes weibold 0082 HO T JUIOd 199S JUaWBaS H 6 juewBes 0012 HO E luloq 18S 1u u 6 s H gz juewBes weibold 0002 HO T JUIOd 18S JUaWBaS H2 Zz juawbes wesboldg 0009 5 luloq 18S JUaWBaS H2 oz 1ueuiBeg Welbog 0089 PHO JUIOd 18S 1u u 6 s Gz JuawBbas ulejBoid 00r9 luloq 18S JUaWBaS yc juawbes wesbold 0009 H JUIOd 3 S JUaWBaS ez JuawBbas wepold 0009 a HO A 17 luloq 18S
320. larm 1 Type to Alarm 4 Type Alarm Setting Level for which upper lower limits have been selected These parameters are used to set the upper and lower limits for alarms 1 to 4 in alarm sets 1 to 4 These parameters can be used when the Alarm Type parameter has been set to Upper and lower limit alarm Upper and lower limit of range alarm and upper and lower limit alarm with standby sequence Default value Ui ives tose UC Related Parameters Alarm Type Alarm Setting Level P 8 75 Alarm Latch Alarm Setting Level P 8 76 Alarm Hysteresis Alarm Setting Level P 8 77 Standby Sequence Reset Alarm Setting Level P 8 78 Auxiliary Output Open in Alarm Alarm Setting Level P 8 79 Alarm SP Selection Expansion Control Setting Level P 8 97 1 Ll 8 8 PID Setting Level d This level contains the parameters for the PID constants MV limits and alarm settings for each PID set To move to a PID set use the Display PID Set Number parameter at the beginning of PID Setting Level Level Changes at Startup Up To PID Setting Level Power ON K eee 75 Adiustment Adiustment 2 1422 Oky evel 7 Okey CEERD CLL less than 1 s less than 1 s key less less than 1 s key less than 1 s than 1 s Approximation Time Signal Alarm Set Setting Setting 7 Setting evei PEED
321. larm 2 Latch OFE ON ALH Alarm 2 Hysteresis 0 01 to 99 99 ALT3 Alarm 3 Type Oto 11 ASLT Alarm 3 Latch OFF ON ALH3 Alarm 3 Hysteresis 0 01 to 99 99 ALT4 Alarm 4 Type 01011 AALT Alarm 4 Latch OFE ON ALH4 Alarm 4 Hysteresis 0 01 to 99 99 2 E Lr p 2 El T Lo gt BIg on g EE 2 ES or or ax nen g Eu Alarm Setting Level rn 4 Lin za Py ic 2 2 AYI i i lie Let na 13 lt 2 1 n 4 or I 2 a 1 4 tn 4 1 second LES a REST Standby Sequence Reset Condition A Condition B SB1N Auxiliary Output 1 Open in Alarm Close in alarm N O Open in alarm N C SB2N Auxiliary Output 2 Open in Alarm Close in alarm N O Open in alarm N C SB3N Auxiliary Output 3 Open in Alarm Close in alarm N O Open in alarm N C SBAN Auxiliary Output 4 Open in Alarm Close in alarm N O Open in alarm N C SB5N Auxiliary Output 5 Open in Alarm Close in alarm N O Open in alarm N C SB6N Auxiliary Output 6 Open in Alarm Close in alarm N O Open in alarm N C SB7N Auxiliary Output 7 Open in Alarm Close in alarm N O Open in alarm N C SB8N Auxiliary Output 8 Open in Alarm Close in alarm N O Open in alarm N C SB9N Auxiliary Output 9 Open in Alarm Close in alarm N O Open in alarm N C SB10N Auxiliary Output 10 Open
322. larm SP Selection Expansion Control Setting Level P 8 97 Assignment parameter e These parameters are used to select the alarm types for alarms 1 through 4 Unit Default value 2 Upper limit alarm 8 75 I Section 8 Parameters CH Alarm Latch 1 to 4 8 76 Setting y r aN ea Alarm set for Auxiliary Output Assignment parameter and Alarm Type parameter not set to No alarm e When these parameters are set to ON a latch function is added to the alarm function Once an alarm goes ON the alarm output is held ON until the power is turned OFF The latch is canceled if you move to setting area 1 e When the alarm output is set to Close in alarm the closed output is held and when it is set to Open in alarm the open output is held After changing an Alarm 1 to 4 Latch parameter setting a software reset must be executed or the power must be turned OFF and ON to make the new setting take effect Setting range Unit Default value Related Parameters Alarm Set Alarm Value Alarm Set Setting Level P 8 37 Alarm Set Alarm Upper limit Alarm Set Setting Level P 8 38 Auxiliary Output Assignment Control Initial Setting 2 Level P 8 67 Alarm Type Alarm Setting Level P 8 76 Alarm Hysteresis Alarm Setting Level P 8 77 Standby Sequence Reset Alarm Setting Level P 8 78 Alarm SP Selection Expansion C
323. lay scan 5 18 Display Scan Period 8 83 Disturbance Gain 5 13 8 32 Disturbance Judgment Width 8 32 disturbance overshoot adjustment 5 13 Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment Function 8 104 Disturbance Rectification Band 8 32 Disturbance Time Constant 5 13 8 32 Down Key 1 7 Echoback Test CompoWay F communications 6 39 Modbus communications 7 35 EEPROM error 10 3 Elapsed Program Time Monitor 8 12 Elapsed Segment Time Monitor 8 12 end codes CompoWay F communications 6 5 End Condition 5 38 8 95 error messages 10 3 Event Input Assignments 1 9 5 39 8 66 event inputs 5 39 terminals 2 14 examples typical control 3 1 Expansion Control Setting Level 8 94 A 37 Extraction of Square Root Enabled 8 71 Extraction of Square Root Low cut Point 8 35 extraction of square root operations 5 7 FINS command error 6 5 FINS mini Commands CompoWay F 6 6 first order lag operation 5 5 First Order Lag Operation Enabled 8 70 First Order Lag Operation Time Constant 8 34 Fixed SP 8 24 floating control 4 18 frames CompoWay F communications 6 4 front panel 1 4 function codes Modbus communications 7 7 Function Key 1 1 7 Function Key 2 1 7 functions Modbus communications 7 7 heating cooling control 1 10 4 15 heating cooling control with remote SP 1 10 4 16 Hold 8 10 holding program operations 5 30 hysteresis 4 31 Hysteresis Cooling 8 26 Hysteresis Heating 8 26 I O configuration 1 8
324. lements elements This is the check code calculated from the slave address through the end of the data For the calculation method refer to Example of CRC 16 Calculation in 7 2 Frames P 7 4 CRC 16 7 13 I Section 7 Modbus Communications Response Codes Function Error Cause code code Variable Error in write start address address error e Number of elements and number of data items do not agree Variable data Number of elements times 2 does error not agree with byte count e Write data exceeds the setting range The operating status does not permit writing The settings for the write data are not permitted in the current oper ating mode e The communications writing function is disabled e Attempted to write to set values in Operation setting area 1 from setting area O error e Attempted to write to Protect Level set values from another level AT is being executed The program number was changed during programmed operation User calibration is in progress Unit error unit change display unit error or EEPROM error Writing Non display Data It is possible to write set values even if they are set to not be displayed or are not displayed due to the model Exercise caution when writing continuously Command Response Example Writing the SP Setting Upper Limit and SP Setting Lower Limit param eters in the Control Initial Setting Level for channel 1 Slave address H 01 SP Setting Up
325. limit cycle method Program that SP is set Program that is executed k AT started AT completed Time The following operations are not possible during AT Changing settings holding or releasing the program and segment operations such as advance and back operations AT will stop if the Run Reset parameter is set to Reset and the Operation at Reset parameter is set to stop control or if Manual Mode is entered When executing AT select 0 to execute AT for the PID set that is currently being used for control or select 1 to 8 as to execute AT for a specific PID set The results of AT will be reflected in PID Setting Level in the Propor tional Band P Integral Time 1 and Derivative Time D param eters of the PID set number specified at the time AT was executed The following operation will be performed if the Operation at Reset parameter is set for fixed control If the Run Reset parameter is changed from Run to Reset during AT execution the present SP will be changed to a fixed set point after AT has been completed If AT is executed while the Run Reset parameter is set to Reset and the Run Reset parameter is changed from Reset to Run during AT execution the set program will be started after completing AT for the fixed SP 4 33 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control Explanation of AT Operation
326. line approxi mation m n Setting Related Parameters Reference Straight line Approximation Input 1 Straight line Approximation Input 2 Straight line Approximation Output 1 and Straight line Approximation Output 2 Approximation Setting Level P 8 47 8 71 I Section 8 Parameters Broken line Approximation 1 Enabled Fal i CH Motor Calibration 8 72 f Setting f Operation ny e Use this parameter to enable or disable broken line approximation for input 1 Setting range Unit Default value or Disable mE Disable Related Parameters Broken line Approximation 1 Input 1 to Broken line Approximation 1 Input 20 Broken line Approximation 1 Output 1 to Broken line Approximation 1 Output 20 Approximation Setting Level P 8 48 ya r pue e x e Position proportional Control Model Use this parameter to execute motor calibration If you are going to monitor the valve opening be sure to execute this parameter During execution the display cannot be changed e Executing this parameter also resets the Travel Time parameter e When this parameter is accessed the set value is a e Select a to execute motor calibration e When motor calibration ends the setting automatically reverts to LL LO Related Parameters Travel Time Control Initial Setting 2 Level P 8 73 8 13 Control Initial Setting 2 Level i C
327. ls of the temperature sensor 2 If the temperature close to the terminal plate is measured the EBAR T ER T is operating normally Analog Input Use a reference voltage current generator e g an STV to supply the specified current or voltage and check the measurement 10 5 l Section 10 Troubleshooting 10 4 Inferring Causes from Conditions Abnormal Control B The PV Does Not Increase Abnormal measured value Troubleshoot as described in 10 3 Inferring Causes from Conditions Abnormal Measured Values P 10 4 A load is not connected to the control output Connect a load terminals Incorrect load polarity or incorrect terminal Wire correclly connections The terminal connection screws are loose resulting Tighten the screws securely in a bad connection The heater power is not turned ON Turn ON the heater power The heater has a broken wire or has deteriorated Replace the heater The heater has a low heat capacity Change to a heater with a high heat capacity e f using two or more heaters replace any heaters that have broken wires Connections The overheating prevention device has activated Increase the temperature setting of the overheating prevention device to a value higher than the SP of the EBAR T ER T Direct operation and reverse operation settings are Set the correct settings incorrect The PID constants are not suitable Execute AT e Set suitable PID constants Control has not been
328. lue set for the Disturbance Judgement Width parameter after the PV is rectified to the value set for the Disturbance Rectification Band parameter the disturbance overshoot adjustment function is activated Disturbance Rectification Band e When the disturbance judgement width is a positive value distur bance overshoot adjustment will activate when a disturbance occurs that makes the PV fall When the disturbance judgement width is a negative value disturbance overshoot adjustment will activate when a disturbance occurs that makes the PV rise e Disturbance overshoot adjustment is not activated in the following situations eWhen the Disturbance Rectification Band or Disturbance Judgement Width parameter is set to O e When the SP is changed when the SP change width exceeds the disturbance rectification band e During AT e During ON OFF control P 0 00 e During PD control 1 0 00 e The Disturbance Rectification Band and Disturbance Judgement Width parameters are set as percentages of FS As such if the input type is K 1 200 0 to 1300 0 C and you wish to set the distur bance judgement width to 15 0 C 15 0 C 1500 0 C x 100 1 00 FS The Disturbance Judgement Width parameter is thus set to 1 00 Disturbance rectification band SPL NG Disturbance cz x Am Re ii judgement width Temper ature No disturbance overshoot
329. lue to 1 Input Types Setting range Input type muna wamrumtn TOZ UK DOOR NK 1 mog 15000io 15000 19999 to 30000 _ k 200 i 13000 3000 to 2300 0 8 k 200 i 800 00 to 900 _ 4 yt 2000 i 8500 4000 to 15000 TC PT 5 vt 200 i 400 00 to 7500 ST 2000 o 400 200007000 7 CE 00 6000 00 to 11000 _ T L in 8500 100 to 1500 0 U 200 i 4000 3000 to 7000 _ 10 CN 2000 to 13000 3000 10 23000 n CR 90 17000 00 to 30000 _ i85 B 1000 i 18000 3000 to 32000 i4 OI OO N VISINE 4 10 4 4 Setting the Input Type Setting range boss Input type esi 4 to 20 mA One of the following ranges is displayed depending ANALOG 0 to 20 mA on the scaling 1to5V 5 c ac O 0t05V _199 99 to 999 99 Oto 10 V 19 999 to 99 999 1 9999 to 9 9999 Set the input type switch according to the setting of the Input Type parameter The default settings are 2 and TC PT When an analog input voltage or current input is used scaling is possible according to the type of control E Scaling Setting the Display to Show 0 0 for an Input Value of 5 mA and 100 0 for 20 mA When the Input 1 Type Parameter Is Set to 4 to 20 mA 1 Hold down the Key for at least 3 seconds t
330. mand Instruction Related MRC SRC code information Related ee ov 1 Avance 10 Advance This command executes an advance operation Operation will move to the beginning of the next segment This command is used in setting area 0 An operation error will occur if it is used is setting area 1 Operation errors will also occur in the following cases If AT is being executed If the specified channel is being reset or is on standby To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command Response MRC SRC Response code Response Codes The response for a normal end is shown above For the response codes refer to 6 7 Operation Commands P 6 13 6 35 I Section 6 CompoWay F Communications M Back Hesponse Instruction Related MRC SRC code information Related 7011955 This command executes a back operation Operation will move to the beginning of the current segment This command is used in setting area 0 An operation error will occur if it is used is setting area 1 Operation errors will also occur in the following cases If AT is being executed e f the specified channel is being reset or is on standby To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command MRC SRC Response code Hesponse Codes The response for a normal end is shown abo
331. mation Level Setting Level Level 2 Level Setting Level Level Setting Level Setting Level Input Initial Setting Level Control Initial Control Initial Alarm Setting Display Communications Setting Level Setting 2 Level Level Deve Setting Level Advanced xpansion Function Control Setting Level Setting Level A 51 2s Ke c o o lt Appendix x pu ddy A 52 Index addresses CompoWay F communications 6 8 A 6 Modbus communications 7 8 A 6 Adjustment 2 Level 8 33 A 17 Adjustment Level 8 22 A 16 Advance 5 30 8 11 CompoWay F communications 6 35 Advanced Function Setting Level 8 88 A 35 advancing program operations 5 30 Alarm Hysteresis 8 77 Alarm Latch 8 76 Alarm Type 8 75 alarm hysteresis 5 25 alarm latch 5 26 Alarm Latch Cancel CompoWay F communications 6 33 Modbus communications 7 32 Alarm Set Alarm Lower Limits 8 38 Alarm Set Alarm Upper Limits 8 38 Alarm Set Alarm Values 8 37 Alarm Set Number 8 20 Alarm Set Setting Level 8 36 A 18 alarm sets 4 39 5 8 Alarm Setting Level 8 74 A 31 Alarm SP Selection 8 97 alarm types 4 38 alarm values 4 39 alarms close in alarm open in alarm 5 27 SP selection 5 26 Alpha 8 100 analog input calibration 9 8 Analog Parameter 1 Control Rate 8 35 Approximation Setting Level 8 46 A 22 ASCII table A 5 AT See auto tuning AT Calculated Gain 8 102 AT Cancel CompoWay F communications 6 28 Modbus communications 7
332. me cali bration is performed You cannot return to the fac tory calibrated data after performing user calibration B input Calibration Calibration is performed for the input type set in the Input Type parameter Input types consist of the following 20 types e Thermocouples 13 types e Analog input 5 types e Resistance thermometers 2 types M Output Calibration Calibration is performed for the output type set in the Output Type parameter There is only one output type that can be selected e Linear current output E Registering Calibration Data The new calibration data for each item is temporarily registered It can be permanently registered as calibration data only when all items have been calibrated to new values Be sure to temporarily register all items when you calibrate the ESAR T ER T When calibration data is registered user execution of calibration is also registered Prepare separate measuring devices and equipment for calibration For details on how to handle measuring devices and equipment refer to the respective instruction manuals 9 3 Thermocouple Input Calibration 9 3 Thermocouple Input Calibration e Thermocouples are calibrated in two groups according to thermocouple type Group 1 input types 2 4 7 8 10 14 and Group 2 input types 3 5 6 9 11 12 13 Do not obstruct the bottom of the Controller during calibration Also do not touch the input terminals or compensating leads
333. ment average is shown below Input data Operation result Time e This function is used to reduce changes in the input due to distur bances in the liquid surface when controlling liquid level Setting range U Default value a 1 2 4 8 16 32 Number of times Setting Related Information Movement Average in 5 1 Input Adjustment Functions P 5 5 Related Parameters 77 Movement Average Enabled Control Initial Setting 2 Level P 8 70 8 34 8 6 Adjustment 2 Level L Ade Extraction of Square Root Low cut Point 52 27 Extraction of Square Root Function is enabled e These parameters are used to set the low cut point of each input Data resulting from the extraction of square root operations is shown below e This function is used for extraction of square root operations for liquid sensors Operation result Low cut point Argument 1 input data Setting range Unit Default value e 0 000 to 9 999 0 000 Setting Related Information Extraction of Square Root in 5 1 Input Adjustment Functions P 5 7 Related Parameters Extraction of Square Root Enabled Control Initial Setting 2 Level P 8 71 Analog Parameter 1 Control Rate Proportional control pes This parameter sets the ratio used for proportional control Setting range Unit Default value 1 1 999 to 9 999 1 000 Setting Related Information Positio
334. mit EU 10 VALE CH1 or CH2 for independent operation This parameter is used to set whether or not to use the wait function Setting range Unit Default value iF Disabled or F Disabled n Enabled Related Information Wait in 5 7 Program Operation Functions P 5 32 CH Segment Output 1 to 10 CH PID Set Number n Setting m Setting 8 4 Program Setting Level crs x CH1 or CH2 for independent operation with the Segment Output parameter enabled e This parameter is used to turn auxiliary outputs ON or OFF for the specified segment Setting range Unit Default value iP Segment output OFF iri Segment output ON Related Information Segment Outputs in 5 7 Program Operation Functions P 5 34 Related Parameters Auxiliary Output Assignment Control Initial Setting 2 Level P 8 67 Program Output Selection Control Initial Setting 2 Level P 8 68 ume c 4 L w e This parameter is used to set the PID set number for each program e When this parameter is set to O the PID set number is automatically selected using the PID Set Automatic Selection function and based on the present value PV deviation DV and present SP SP The PID set number can be set between 1 and 8 e f this parameter is set to O for channels 2 to 4 when using coordi nated operation or for the secondary side
335. mote SP Larger of 19999 and dis ewer limit play value equivalent to EU 200 0 lower input limit to smaller of 99999 and dis play value equivalent to upper input limit According to setting of the Input Type parameter Related Parameters Reference Input Type Input Initial Setting Level P 8 50 Input Temperature Units Input Initial Setting Level P 8 51 Control Mode Control Initial Setting Level P 8 58 SP Upper Limit and SP Lower Limit Control Initial Setting Level P 8 57 Note When the remote SP input is set to a temperature input be sure to set the input type of the main input to the same setting as the input type of remote SP input If the remote SP input is set to a temperature input and the upper and lower limits of the remote SP are not the same as the upper and lower limits of the sensor setting range of the input type of remote SP input it will not be possible to obtain a correct remote SP value CH PV Decimal Point Display Pu aP Temperature input This parameter can be used to not show the digits of the PV below the decimal point e f this parameter is turned OFF the digits of the PV below the decimal point are not shown When turned ON the digits below the decimal point are shown according to the input type setting Setting Related Information I Input type Input Initial Setting Level P 8 50 8 53 I Section 8 Parameters Sensor Induction N
336. n forces the program to maintain steady state control at the segment set point e The timer is stopped when the Hold parameter is set to ON and restarts when the Hold parameter is set to OFF 5 7 Program Operation Functions i Back Program Repetitions Program Links M SP Modes Switching SP Modes The hold is cleared under the following conditions The Hold parameter is set to OFF the program continues from the segment set point the Run Reset parameter is set to Reset or the program operation is completed as a result of an advance operation being executed lf an advance operation is executed during a hold the hold is continued from the beginning of the next segment The Hold parameter cannot be executed while resetting A back operation resets the segment timer and returns to the beginning of the current segment If a back operation is executed during a hold the hold is continued from the beginning of the current segment A program repetition restarts execution of the same program automatically after the end of the current program The Program Repetitions parameter can be set up to 9 999 The number of executions will be the setting for the Program Repeti tions parameter 1 If the Program Repetitions parameter is changed to a smaller number during program operation the currently executing program will be executed to the end and then the program will stop A program link moves
337. n proportional Control in 4 6 Selecting the Control Mode P 4 Reference Related Parameters Control Mode Control Initial Setting Level P 8 58 8 35 I Section 8 Parameters 8 7 Alarm Set Setting Level L RL The Alarm Set Setting Level is used to make the alarm value settings for each alarm set The Display Alarm Setting Level parameter the first parameter displayed under Alarm Set Setting Level is used to move to each alarm set Level Changes at Startup Up To Adjustment Level Power ON p 1 un cu dumme dil Ey r Eee un cn un ar un cu A 77 Adiustment Adiustment 2 ICI J Level 7 Level 142 key less key less key less key less than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s key less than 1 s than 1 s Approximation Time Signal PID Setting Alarm Set Setting Setting Level Setting Level Lg kepies Level jJ key less Leg keyless evel k mn n t than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s Gw EFF G GPa EF G w G w ww G G w w w UND Gm NEED m Wz Control in progress Parameter Changes within Alarm Set Setting Level Alarm Set Setting Level Alarm Set 4 4 AL 1 Alarm Set 4 Alarm Value 1 19999 to 99999 4 AL1H 1 Alarm Set 4 Alarm Upper Limit 1 uti 19999 to
338. n to O This command is used in setting area 0 An operation error will occur if it is used in setting area 1 An operation error will also occur in the following cases e f the Run Reset parameter is set to Reset for the specified channel e f the Auto Manual parameter is set to Manual for the specified channel To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command 6 27 I Section 6 CompoWay F Communications B AT Cancel Response Response B Write Mode 6 28 MRC SRC Response code Hesponse Codes The response for a normal end is shown above For the response codes refer to 6 7 Operation Commands P 6 13 Instruction Related MRC SRC code information Related diia wr 11710 AT Camco 3 AT Camco 3 30 AT Cancel All AT Cancel This command cancels AT This command is used in setting area O An operating error will occur if it is used in setting area 1 An operation error will also occur in the following cases e f the Run Reset parameter is set to Reset for the specified channel e f the Auto Manual parameter is set to Manual for the specified channel To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command MRC SRC Response code Hesponse Codes The response for a normal end is shown above For the response codes ref
339. nH enue N oiny 0 OLL 01 0 OL 01 O6444444 H ad 1ndul o Buipio55v 0 S0L 01 070 VLEOOOO00 H 00000000 H 0901 01 0 S VLEOOO00H 01 39444444 H yw q dd dS 90W94 0 u dS eioueH s y uny 1o0juo N Buiuedo asnjera 3090 Dulloo2 4olluoW AW 0090 Buneer JOWUOW AN VO90 o o o Buipioooy yun yun yun P al 6666 01 0 40 20000 01 00000000 H S 6 6S 66 01 070070 66S66000 H 01 00000000 10 69766 01 0070 6S660000 H 01 00000000 H S 6 6S 66 01 070070 66966000 01 00000000 10 69766 01 0070 69660000 01 00000000 H S 6 6S 66 01 070070 66966000 01 00000000 10 6866 01 0070 6S660000 H 01 00000000 H JOJlUO N dS 910UleH 090 JoyuojA uonneded uonnoex3 uej6oJd 2190 JOWUOW aul 1ueui amp es BuiureueH W190 8uu jUeWIHeS p sde 3 8190 S 6S 66 01 0070 65660000 01 00000000 H edA 1ndui o Buipio55v jur g ddn dS 0 yw 4901 dS 0 OLL 01 0 04 jeuon1odoud uoriisog 01901 01 0 S01 YI700000H 01 938344444H 07901 0 0 S V1700000H 01 302322422 H prepueis JOWUOW euur urej6o4g pasde 9190 40jlUuOJA euui qpueijs BuiureueH 7190 yoeg y y PH JOJUO A ON 1 5 6000 xdS 2090 1000 00 5 uonisod 1104 jeuuroe
340. nction Setting Level r RAE INIT Parameter Initialization OFF ON PF1 PF1 Setting See note 1 PF2 PF2 Setting See note 2 PF1 1 PF1 Monitor Setting Item 1 See note 2 PF1 2 PF1 Monitor Setting Item 2 See note 2 PF1 5 PF1 Monitor Setting Item 5 See note 2 F al f arr ce OFF RUN RST R R ARUN ARST HOLD AHON AHOF ADV AADV BAK ABAK AT A M PRG PFDP or CH 8 88 m z 4 PF2 1 PF2 Monitor didi Setting Item 1 See note 2 PF2 2 PF2 Monitor Setting Item 2 See note 2 See note 2 CH N Number of Enabled Channels 1to4 RAMM RAM Write Mode Backup Mode BKUP RAM Write Mode RAM CMOV Move to Calibration Level 1999 9999 2 EVSE EVVEL AL 1 AL1H ALTL AL 2 AL2H AL2L AL 3 AL3H AL3L AL 4 AL4H or AL4L Parameter Initialization PF1 Setting PF2 Setting 9I M Operation 1 adiu 8 17 Advanced Function Setting Level L ar LL Use this parameter to return all settings to their default values ON Initialize all settings OFF aFF The Parameter Initialization parameter will return to OFF after the parameters have been initialized e These parameters are used to assign functions to the PF1 and PF2 Keys to enable them to be used as function keys See Deep Fm RUN r
341. nd zi Keys to set the Display Alarm Set Setting Selection parameter to 2 q a x Alarm Set 2 Alarm Value 1 3 Press the Key to select the Alarm Set 2 Alarm Value 1 parameter 4 Use the lAl and Keys to set the value to 250 0 B SP Limits SP Upper Limit SP upper and lower limits can be set within the input setting range If an SP limit is changed so that the SP is outside of the limit the previous SP set value will be automatically changed to the new value of the SP limit Example Initially the SP is 200 C the SP upper limit is 300 C and the SP lower limit is 100 C If the SP upper limit is changed to 150 C the SP will fall outside of the SP limit range of 100 to 150 C and thus will be changed to 150 C If the Input Type Temperature Unit or scaling parameters are changed the SP upper and lower limits will be reset to the upper and lower limits of the input setting range The SP limits are set separately for each channel Input temperature setting range 1 SP limits Setting range Y l l l A 2 A Change to A B Upper Limit X SP Upper Limit Y Y ra changed C SP I
342. nds z eee a eed 7 15 visam m rm 7 18 Commands and Responses 7 20 Reading Monitor Values 7 20 Reading SettValgeSs uuruuu 7 21 Writing Set Values in Protect Level 7 22 Witing Set Vales uuu ou u u a Aas 7 23 Communications Writing 7 24 hun ROS CU ETE UM a naa sasa 7 25 AT C ea ola a b n 7 26 AELCORC uu o o si 7 27 Wre MOGE a ECT 7 27 Save RAM Dala uuu ces cea UL M gi 7 28 SO Ware HOSBE uu oa aaa dodo ai 7 29 Move to Setting Area 1 7 29 Move to Protect Level uc ab al o ad 7 30 Auto Matiualuscs a mu um AA 7 30 Parameter Initialization 7 31 Alarm Pater Cancel b Al t 7 32 S NIO yy a aaa TETTE 7 32 Fol on n di 7 33 PRON ANC Goce 7 34 06 su o o HER 7 35 ECHODACK TESE cu aa a a ama 7 35 Section 8 Parameters 8 13 8 14 8 15 8 16 8 17 8 18 USING NS SEC EET E 8 2 Protect Level ra a Namco SECO DU Mr a 8 3 Operation Level uu u kun 8 6 Program seting Level u uu a u SG uapa asas 8 16 Adjustment Level C Mg u u u uuu 8 22 Adjustment 2 Level
343. ng The default values are 20 0 s The Control Period Cooling parameter can be used only in heating cooling control When each channel is used independently for control set the control period separately for each channel E Direct Operation Cooling Reverse Operation Heating 4 20 e Control that increases the MV as the PV increases is called direct operation cooling and control that increases the MV as the PV decreases is called reverse operation heating MV MV 100 100 0 0 lt j Temperature is low Temperature is high Temperature is low Temperature is high Set point Set point Direct Operation Reverse Operation For example when the present value PV is less than the set point SP during heating control the manipulated valuable MV is increased in proportion to the difference between the PV and SP As such heating control is reverse operation Cooling control which does the opposite is direct operation Set the Direct Reverse Operation parameter to ar r reverse operation or ax d direct operation The default setting is for reverse operation heating When each channel is used independently for control set the direct reverse operation separately for each channel 4 7 Setting Output Parameters I E Output Type The E5AR T ER
344. nications writing function is disabled communica tions cannot be used to write set values or send operation commands such as the Run Reset operation command The default setting is Communications Writing Disabled This command can be used in both setting area O and setting area 1 Slave Function Write start Operation Related address code address code information CRC 16 Hoe Hoo Hoo woo 1 1 2 2 2 7 9 Commands and Responses I M Run Reset Response The response for a normal end is shown above For information on error responses refer to 7 7 Operation Commands P 7 15 Slave Function Write start Operation Related address code address code information 16 2 1 1 2 2 Related information Control state This command is used to start or reset control This command is used in setting area O When the control mode is set to cascade control perform the Run Heset operation command for channel 2 If All is selected for the channel only the channels that are enabled will be affected by this command To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command Slave Function Write start Operation Related address code address code information CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 The response for a normal end is shown above For information on error responses refer to 7 7 Operation Commands P 7 15 7 25 I Section 7 Modbus Communications
345. nnels 1to4 V C Ez RAMM RAM Write Mode VV 1 Backup Mode BKUP bHUP RAM Write Mode RAM 1 OFF RUN RST R R ARUN ARST HOLD AHON AHOF ADV AADV BAK ABAK AT A M PRG PFDP CH 2 OFF PVSP PVDV SEG R P I D AL 1 AL1H AL1L AL 2 AL2H AL2L AL 3 AL3H AL3L AL 4 AL4H AL4L Selection Data PV DV SP D dH PIDH PID Set Automatic Selection Hysteresis 0 10 to 99 99 P DB PV Dead Band 0 to 99999 CJC 1 Input 1 Cold Junction Compensation OFF ON CJC 4 Input 4 Cold sa Junction Compensation OFF ON nasi 0 00 to 1 00 LCMA Limit Cycle MV Amplitude j 5 0 to 50 0 TATE Temporary AT Execute Judgement Deviation 251 0 0 to 100 0 RBMP Bumpless at Run Disabled OFF Enabled ON PMEC Operation at Potentiometer Input Error Stop OFF Continue ON 1 second CH ALE i 2 me Ii re gg 2 r nr n uf d t E aries n Kul re 2 rac Ru rg 20 hay ng arr E d E is pj lt Fe 22 E q e Parameter Charts For Input Initial Setting Level refer to page A 50 A 1 second or more Control starts ALT1 Alarm 1 Type 01011 ATLT Alarm 1 Latch OFE ON ALH1 Alarm 1 Hysteresis 0 01 to 99 99 ALT2 Alarm 2 Type 01011 A2LT A
346. ntrolled i e opened or closed With position proportional control control can be switched between closed control and floating control Travel time can be automatically measured using motor calibration and position proportional dead band open close hysteresis PV dead band and other parameters can be set e Closed Control When a potentiometer is connected closed control provides feedback on the valve opening e Floating Control No feedback is provided on the valve opening using a potentiometer Control is possible without a potentiometer connected Execute motor calibration if a potentiometer is connected for closed control or for floating control to monitor the valve opening The travel time which is the time from when the valve is fully open to when it is fully closed is automatically measured and set at the same time The Travel Time parameter must be set for floating control without a potentiometer connected Set the Travel Time parameter to the time from when the valve is fully open to when it is fully closed The valve output hold interval the interval between open output and closed output ON OFF points is set using the Position Proportional Dead Band parameter and the hysteresis is set using the Open Close Hysteresis parameter The following diagram shows the relationship to the valve opening Hysteresis between open and closed positions Position proportional a dead band gt MV V
347. nts CRC 16 ee 1 1 2 2 2 wF Address Y values in setting area 0 H 0600 to 061 MM Operation Level H 0700 to 074A Adjustment Level H 0800 to 0818 Adjustment 2 Level H 0900 to 096E Alarm Set Setting Level H OAO0 to OA9E PID Setting Level H OBOO to OBGE Approximation Setting Level H 1800 to 183A Program Setting Level H 1900 to 196C Time Signal Setting Level Set values in setting area 1 H OCOO to 0C20 Input Initial Setting Level H ODOO to 0D36 Control Initial Setting Level to OE76 Control Initial Setting 2 Level H OFOO to OF2C Alarm Setting Level H 1000 to 100E Display Adjustment Level H 1100 to 110C Communications Setting Level H 1200 to 1218 Advanced Function Setting Level H 1300 to 133A Expansion Control Setting Level H 4000 added to above addresses H 8000 added to above addresses H C000 added to above Same set values as channel 1 addresses This command is used to read set values The number of elements can be set from 0004 to 006A 4 to 106 to allow successive reading of 2 to 53 set values in consecutive addresses Same set values as channel 1 Same set values as channel 1 To specify the variable type or address refer to Appendix Setting Lists P A 6 The upper limit of an address depends on the variable type This command can be used in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 When used in setting area 1 the response for the remote SP monitor ramp SP monitor and valve opening m
348. nts for first order lag operations movement average count low cut point for extraction of square root operations and parameters for proportional control These functions appear on the display only if they are enabled in Control Initial Setting 2 Level Level Changes at Startup Up To Adjustment 2 Level g a EE EEE EE EE EE EE EEE EEE EE SS SN Operation lt Program Setting Adjustment Adjustment 2 21 Okey Q J Cey VESER WEE less than 1 s less than 1 key less less than 1 5 key less Proximity Time Signal i Alarm Set Setting Setting 1107100 Setting Level FET key Level J key less than 1 s a 2 05 less than 1 s Parameter Changes within Adjustment 2 Level Adjustment 2 Baz LAGP 1 First Order Lag Operation 1 Time constant LAGP 2 First Order Lag Operation 2 Time constant 0 0 999 9 LAGP 3 First Order Lag Operation 3 Time Constant 0 0 999 9 LAGPA First Order Lag Operation 4 Time Constant 0 0 999 9 MAVP 1 Move Average 1 Move Average Count 1 2 4 8 1 6 32 Move Average Count 1 2 4 8 16 32 Jie MAVP3 Move Average 3 Move Average Count 1 2 4 8 1 6 32 MAVP 4 Move Average
349. number of channels The Communications Writing OFF ON operation instruction is common to all channels Event inputs Event input assignments Channel 1 EV1 Communications Writing OFF ON rn EV2 Channel 1 Program No Bit 0 VVeight 1 EV3 Channel 1 Program No Bit 1 Weight 2 8 d EV4 Channel 1 Program No Bit 2 VVeight 4 4 EV5 Channel 1 Program No Bit 3 Weight 8 nn s EV6 Channel 1 Program No Bit 4 VVeight 16 mr EV7 Channel 1 Program No Bit 5 Weight 32 s x EV8 Channel 1 Program No Bit 0 Weight 10 xun R EV9 Channel 1 Program No Bit 1 Weight 20 FF EV10 Channel 1 Run ON Reset OFF i 4 Channel 1 Run OFF Reset ON o Channel 1 Auto OFF Manual ON Channel 1 Program SP OFF Remote SP ON gt Channel 1 Remote SP OFF Fixed SP ON pf Channel 1 Program SP OFF Fixed SP ON Channel 1 Program SP Channel 1 Remote SP Channel 1 Fixed SP Channel 1 Hold ON Clear Hold OFF Channel 1 Advance Channel 1 Back Channel 2 Back 1 9 l Section 1 Overview Control Modes The type of control performed by each Controller is selected by setting the control mode Setting the control mode sets default values for the out
350. o Segment No Output bit 0 Segment No Output bit 1 Segment No Output bit 2 All outputs turn OFF during reset 5 7 Program Operation Functions I M Operation at Program Start PV Start e The method for starting program operation can be selected from the following using the PV Start parameter SP start PV start with slope priority or PV start with time priority A PV start with time priority cannot be selected however if rate of rise programming is set A PV start is used only for the first program execution if a program repeat or program link operation is set SP Start ASP start is used to execute the program in order from the segment 1 SP If the Operation at Reset parameter is set to Fixed Control then the program will start operation from the fixed SP PV Start with Slope Operation is started Priority from the position of SP Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 Segment 4 Segment 5 Segment 6 the first present set point that matches py at m T the PV at the start x x of the program If the PV and the present set point do x x x x x x not match at any Time position operation starts at the beginning of the program The above diagram shows an example of the operation The first position where the PV and the present SP match is in segment 4 and from there the program is indicated by a bold line The program prior to that position is ignored Operation stati
351. o change disturbances AT is being executed Hunting will stop when AT has been completed o 2 o o ke o 10 7 l Section 10 Troubleshooting M SP Does Not Change as Programmed Remote SP Mode or Fixed SP Mode is set Set Program SP Mode Settings M The Segment Does Not Advance Possible cause Possible cause The wait operation is enabled the Wait Mode Wait Band Upper Limit and Wait Band Lower Limit correctly The SP is being held Check the HOLD indicator If it is lit change the Hold parameter to OFF M The Program 15 Reset in the Middle ER Nunu Correct the setting of the Number of Segments The Number of Segments Used parameter is set to a smaller value than the final segment number Settings Used parameter 10 8 10 5 Inferring Causes from Conditions Abnormal Outputs I 10 5 Inferring Causes from Conditions Abnormal Outputs E No Control Output or No Alarm Output Resecuse sowon Abnormal temperature measurement See 10 3 Inferring Causes from Conditions Abnormal Measured Values P 10 4 Incorrect load polarity or incorrect terminal Wire correctly connections Connections The connected load exceeds the output Do not exceed the specifications specifications Repair in the event of a failure A load power supply is not connected to a transistor Use a power supply suitable for the output output spec
352. o move from the Operation Level to the Input Initial Setting Level 2 Make sure thats Input 1 Type is set to 15 4 to 20 mA NS Lt ju wy c 3 Press the ce Key repeatedly to select en Scaling Input Value 1 Set the scaling input value to 5 with the A and 221 Keys IT rn i 4 Press the el Key to select a5 Scaling Display Value 1 Set the scaling display value to O with the A and 221 Keys e ad cx 5 Press the el Key to select ze Scaling Input Value 2 Set the scaling input value to 20 with the A and zl Keys 6 Press the cel Key to select 4522 Scaling Display Value 2 Set the scaling display value to 1000 with the A and Rz Keys manu I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 7 Press the Key to select 22 Decimal Point Position Set the decimal point position to 1 with the A and 221 Keys 8 Hold down the Key for at least 1 second to return to th
353. ocouple or compensating leads is connected between the terminals of the ESAR T ER T and thermocouple The leads or compensating leads of the thermocouple is too long and resistance is affecting the system The 3 wires between the terminals of the ESAR T ER T and the platinum resistance thermometer have different resistances The E5AR T ER T is receiving noise from peripheral devices The leads and power line of the temperature sensor are too close and induction noise is being received from the power line The mounting location of the temperature sensor is too far from the point of control and the thermal response is slow The ambient operating temperature of the E5AR 1 The temperature of the terminal plate is not uniform Install the E5AR T ER T in a location where it is The terminal din of the EBAR 1 ER T is exposed Prevent air flows from blowing on the terminal the input The Input Type parameter is not set correctly Set the correct input type The temperature unit setting is not correct Set the correct temperature unit The measured temperature appears to deviate after Set the input correction to 0 0 setting an input correction The units of the parameter settings are not correct The host system program is not correct host The host system program is not correct program is not correct Connect with a device that is designed for use with thermocouples The terminal connection screws are l
354. ode Other indicator orange wise OFF Common indicator Turns ON OFF when writing via communications is orange enabled disabled CH2 AMEN indicator orange OFF Note 1 0 Indicates that the model supports the function The function however may be disabled depending on the settings An indicator is always OFF for a disable function Turns ON OFF when the output function assigned to auxiliary output 4 turns ON OFF Indicates that the model does not support the function 2 When the control output is a current output the indicator turns OFF when the MV is 0 or less and turns ON when the MV is greater than 0 1 6 1 2 Part Names and Functions I M Using the Keys oe Level Key Press to change setting levels RUN RSI Protect Key Function Key 1 Run Reset Key Function key 2 Press to change the parameter within a setting level Hold down to change the parameter backward one change per second Each time the Key is pressed the value of the No 2 display increases Hold down the key to increase the value quickly The key is also used to scroll forward through the setting items Each time the Key is pressed the value of the No 2 display decreases Hold down the key to decrease the value quickly The key is also used to scroll back ward through the setting items Press both the 1 and kel Keys simultaneously to change to the Protect Level Refer to 4
355. of the PID set numbers 1 to 8 can be set in the PID Set Number parameter in the Program Setting Level If the PID Set Number parameter is set to O the PID set will be automatically selected PID Set Automatic Selection e f the PID Set Number parameter is set to O for channels 2 to 4 during coordinated operation or for the secondary side Channel 2 during cascade control the PID set number selected for channel 1 will be used e f the PID Set Number parameter is set to 0 the PID set will be automatically selected based on the pre set conditions PID Set Automatic Selection 5 2 Control Functions I In the example at left the PID Set Automatic Selection Data parameter is set to PV When PV x 200 0 C PID Set 1 is used When 200 0 PV x 400 0 C PID Set 2 is used The PID Automatic Selection Range Upper Limit parameters are set so that the values increase as the PID set numbers increase PV present value PV 24 00 The value for PID set 8 is internally fixed so that the Automatic Selection Range Upper Limit parameter is set to 999 9 FS Internal fixed value 999 996 FS To prevent chattering when changing PID sets hysteresis can be set in the PID Set Automatic Selection Hysteresis parameter The PV DV deviation or SP can be set for the PID Set Automatic Selection Data parameter value O Automatic 1 to 8 PID Sets 1 to 8 19999 to 99999 1450 0 0 PV 1 DV 2 SP n 0 PV 0 10 to 99 99 0 50
356. oise Reduction i x mp Lx Hem This parameter can be set to reduce induction noise from the power source in the input e This parameter reduce induction noise in the input according to the frequency of the power source e Select 50 Hz or 60 Hz according to the power source used for the Controller Setting range MEME Default value 1 Setting Related Information Input type Input Initial Setting Level P 8 50 Move to Advanced Function Setting Level Aadu 8 54 Initial Setting Protection is set to O This function is used to move to the Advanced Function Setting Level e Enter a password to move to the Advanced Function Setting Level The password is set to 169 After entering 169 press the Key or wait for two seconds and you will move to Advanced Function Setting Level 1999 to 9999 a Setting Related Parameters Initial Setting Protection Protect Level P 8 4 8 12 Control Initial Setting Level L 8 12 Control Initial Setting Level This level contains Initial setting parameters for control such as the control method as well as the output types SP limits control mode direct reverse operation and closed floating settings Level Changes at Startup Up To Control Initial Setting Level Power ON
357. ol e Standard heating or cooling control is performed The Direct Heverse Operation parameter is used to select heating reverse operation or cooling direct operation e When using PID control the Proportional Band P Integral Time 1 and Derivative Time D parameters must be set These PID constants can be set either using auto tuning AT or manually e When the proportional band P is set to 0 00 control becomes ON OFF control E Heating Cooling Control Heating and cooling control is performed e When using PID control in addition to the Proportional Band P Integral Time 1 and Derivative Time D parameters the Cooling Coefficient and Dead Band parameters must also be set The PID constants can be set either using auto tuning AT or manually The Cooling Coefficient and Dead Band parameters must be set manually e When the proportional band P is set to 0 00 control becomes ON OFF control and 3 position control is possible Dead Band The dead band is set centered on the set point The dead band width is set in the Dead Band parameter in the Adjustment Level A negative setting sets an overlap band Overlapping band Dead band Dead band width Dead band width Negative value Positive value Output lt 100 Cooling Cooling Heating PV Ss PV 4 Heating Cooling P Heating P A Cooling P SP SP e The default dead band
358. ol set the integral time to 0 0 The integral time cannot be set to 0 0 on a Position proportional Control Model when performing floating control or when the Operation at Potenti ometer Input Error parameter is set to Continue Related Parameters AT Execute Cancel Adjustment Level P 8 23 CH PID MV Upper Limit PID MV Lower Limit 1 to 8 f e Setting 8 8 PID Setting Level L P d 2 PID control V3 a LX V3 a Use the MV Upper Limit and MV Lower Limit parameters to set upper and lower limits for the MV When the Controller calculates an MV that is outside of the upper and lower limits the upper or lower limit is Output e MV Upper Limit The setting range differs for standard control and heating cooling control The cooling MV of heating cooling control is expressed as a negative value e MV Lower Limit The setting range differs for standard control and heating cooling control The cooling MV of heating cooling control is expressed as a negative value e The MV limit function does not operate on a Position proportional Control Model during floating control and thus the setting is not effective Setting range Standard control MV limit 0 1 to 105 0 MV Upper Limit Default value Heating cooling control 0 0 to 105 0 kasa Standard control MV Lower Limit 5 0 b MV upper limit 0 1 Heating cooling contro
359. ol Initial Setting Level L 1 Deviation 1 EU Control Initial Setting 2 Level L 2 Deviation 10 EU Alarm Setting Level L 3 Deviation 20 EU Display Adjustment Level L 4 Deviation 100 EU Communication Setting Level L 5 MV Heating or Valve opening O Advanced Function Setting Level L ADF MV Cooling C O Expansion Control Setting Level L EXC 8 80 CH MV Display Selection me m Setting Bar Graph Display Item f Setting 8 15 Display Adjustment Level 1 4 sdsi un Heating cooling control This parameter is used to select which MV is displayed when a PF Key is set to Present value PV Present set point or MV during heating cooling control Heating MV or Cooling MV can be selected Setting range Unit Default value x 77 0 Heating MV a Cooling MV E5AR T Ct n jw e Use this parameter to select the contents of the bar graph display of the e The bar graph of the EBAR T is 10 segments Setting range Unit Default value No bar graph display Deviation 1 EU segment a Standard Con Deviation 10 EU segment trol Models Deviation 20 EU segment Heating MV Deviation 100 EU segment Position pro Standard Control Model Heating MV portional Con Position proportional Control Model trol Model Valve opening Valve opening Standard Control Model Cooling MV 8 81 l Sec
360. om left of the back cover The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision Page numbers refer to the previous version Cat No H201 E1 01 September 2006 Original production TABLE OF CONTENTS Introduction Precautions on Using the Product Read and Understand this Manual lI Warranty and Limitations of Liability Application Considerations Disclaimers II Precautions IV Precautions for Safe Use VI Precautions for Correct Use VII About this Manual VIII Section1 Overview 1 1 Main Features of the ESAR T and E5ER T 1 2 H D 1 2 Contoler a a E 1 2 ODUR tears excite b a odlad 1 3 1 2 PartiNames and PURCMOTS e uyu uuu us unu nis 1 4 ETORLEQRE Me 1 4 interpreting tne D SD Y Oe b osa un 1 5 BI alos Koy m m 1 7 1o EO and Main FUNCIONS u u s asss 1 8 FO Configurations asrda elevatus tasa an sa ala 1 8 Mait FUNCION Sasasa Rea ora a m sa 1 9 Model Number Structure 1 13 Section2 Preparations 2 1 insiallal o un a a S 2 2 Bgm C 2 2 oc c 2 2 2
361. ometer Calibration 9 10 95 Output Calibration ua eoo ind et a 9 12 9 7 Inspecting Indicator Accuracy 9 14 TIE INO COUDI SS ume d 9 14 Resistance Thermometers 9 14 dual pul tat DE 9 15 Section 10 Troubleshooting Appendix Index XVI 10 1 Troubleshooting Checklist 10 2 102 MES es a aa E 10 3 10 3 Inferring Causes from Conditions Abnormal Measured Values 10 4 The Measured Value Is Abnormal or Measurement Is Not Possible 10 4 10 4 Inferring Causes from Conditions Abnormal Control 10 6 Ine PV Does NOT RCTeaSe uu au umasa Se ieu beoe o eset da 10 6 The Measured Value Increases Above the SP 10 6 Overshooting or Undershooting Occurs 10 7 H COLES qt NO d 10 7 SP Does Not Change as Programmed 10 8 The Segment Does Not Advance 10 8 The Program Is Reset in the Middle 10 8 10 5 Inferring Causes from Conditions Abnormal Outputs 10 9 No Control Output or No Alarm Output
362. on Femaks Monitor Setting Display Disabled 1 PF1 Monitor Setting Item 1 PVSP PV SP MV Can be set SP PVDV PV Deviation SEG R Remaining Segment Time Monitor only P Proportional Band P 1 integral Time D Derivative Time D AL 1 AL3H Alarm Upper Limit 3 5 21 l Section 5 Functions and Operations Displaying the Monitor Setting Item To display the Monitor Setting Item press the function key in Operation Level Program Setting Level Adjustment Level Adjustment 2 Level Alarm Set Setting Level PID Setting Level Time Signal Setting Level Approximation Setting Level or Monitor ltem Level Press the key repeatedly to scroll from the Monitor Setting Item 1 to the Monitor Setting Item 5 parameters After the Monitor Setting Item 5 parameter the display changes to the first parameter in Operation Level f any of settings for the Monitor Setting Item 1 to Monitor Setting Item 5 parameters are disabled those settings will not appear and the display will show the next enabled setting f another key is pressed during display of a Monitor Setting Item parameter the following will take place e f the Mode or Level Key is pressed the first parameter in Operation Level will be displayed e f
363. on 8 Parameters CH SP Tracking PE e This parameter is used to specify operation when switching from Program SP Mode or Remote SP Mode to Fixed SP Mode e When remote SP tracking is enabled ON the value of the program SP or remote SP is inherited as the fixed SP e When remote SP tracking is disabled OFF the fixed SP is not affected by the program SP or by the remote SP qm Disable Enable Setting Related Information m SP Modes in 5 7 Program Operation Functions P 5 31 Related Parameters Control Mode Control Initial Setting Level P 8 58 SP Mode Adjustment Level P 8 24 CH PID Set Automatic Selection Data P d PID Set Automatic Selection Hysteresis 2 e This parameter is used for automatic selection of the PID set CH e The PID set number to be used is automatically selected based on the value set in PID Set Automatic Selection Data parameter The switching range is specified in the PID Set Automatic Select Range parameter PID Setting Level e The PID Set Automatic Selection Hysteresis parameter is used to prevent chattering when the PID is changed n PID Set Automatic fy 10717 Pu Present 201 Setting 5 Present set point PID Set Automatic 0 10 to 99 99 FS 0 50 Selection Hysteresis Related Information PID Sets in 5 2 Control Functions P 5 10 Related Parameters PID Set Number Program Setting Le
364. on avoided may result in minor or moderate injury or in property damage Symbols General Caution Indicates non specific general cautions warn ings and dangers Caution Electrical Shock Caution Indicates possibility of electric shock under spe cific conditions General Prohibition Prohibition Indicates non specific general prohibitions General Caution Indicates non specific general cautions warn ings and dangers Mandatory Caution Precautions A CAUTION Do not touch the terminals while power is being supplied Doing so may occasionally result in minor injury due to electric shock Do not touch the terminals or the electronic components or pat terns on the PCB within 1 minute after turning OFF the power sup ply Doing so may occasionally result in minor injury due to electric shock Do not allow pieces of metal wire clippings or fine metallic shav ings or filings from installation to enter the product Doing so may occasionally result in electric shock fire or malfunction Do not use the product in locations where flammable or explosive gases are present Doing so may occasionally result in minor or moderate explosion causing minor or moderate injury or property damage Do Not disassemble modify or repair the product or touch any of the internal parts Minor electric shock fire or malfunction may occasionally occur Tighten the screws on the terminal block to the following speci
365. ondition n Setting MM e Setting y 8 18 Expansion Control Setting Level L Eu Select Continue Reset Manual Mode Run Status or Ramp Back for operation after the power is turned ON Operation after a software reset or when moving from the Initial Setting Level to the Operation Level is also determined by this parameter Setting range Unit Default value er Continue Reset Li Manual Mode Lant Continue Run Status 2001 rare Ramp Back M r L Lr je at we w y jue X Related Information 4 12 Starting and Stopping Operation P 4 41 x Lt v n This parameter is used to specify the operation status after the program has been completed Reset Operation ends e Continue Operation is continued using the SP of the last segment The number of the last segment is held as the segment number and the elapsed program time elapsed segment time and remaining segment time values are held The time singles will hold status when operation ends e Fixed SP Mode Operation continues in Fixed SP Mode when the program has been completed The segment number elapsed program time elapsed segment time and remaining segment time are held at the values for the beginning of the segment The Time Signal parameter is set to OFF Setting range Unit Default value Reset Status Cont
366. onitor will be O and the response for the status will be as indicated in the notes in 5 1 Status Communications in Appendix Setting Lists P A 8 7 21 I Section 7 Modbus Communications Response Slave Function Byte Read data address code count Data 1 Data 1 za 107 Most significant 1 Least significant 1 1 1 Number of elements x 2 bytes Data n Data n CRC 16 Most significant Least significant NENNEN m 2 The response for a normal end is shown above For information on error responses refer to 7 5 Read from Variable Area P 7 11 E Writing Set Values in Protect Level Slave Function Write start Number of Byte Command address code address elements count Write data CRC 16 imo m je 11 1 1 2 2 1 2 4 bytes H 0500 Operation Adjustment Protection H 0502 Initial Setting Protection H 0504 Setting Change Protection H 0506 PF Key Protection This command writes set values in the Protect Level Refer to 4 1 Setting Levels and Key Operations P 4 2 for information on Protect L evel This command is used in setting area O If used in setting area 1 an error will result To use this command first enable using the communications writing function by executing the Communications Writing operation command and then move to Protect Level by executing the Move to Protect Level operation command Slave Function Write start Number of Response address code address elements CRC 16 lm 1 1
367. onses I Note The bit value is an OR of all channels set in the Number of Enabled Channels parameter If the channel does not exist No error 0 is returned If this command is used in setting area 1 the related information is undefined B Echoback Test Command MRC SRC Test data This command is used to perform an echoback test The command can be used in any state of the ESAR T ER T Keep the test data within the following ranges depending on the communications data length Communications Contents data length ASCII H 20 to H 7E or H A1 to H FE Response MRC SRC Response code Testdata wr 0000 imos Hesponse Codes The response for a normal end is shown above For the response codes refer to 6 7 Operation Commands P 6 13 6 39 I Section 6 CompoWay F Communications 6 10 Program Example M N88Basic 6 40 This program displays the response from the EBAR T ER T on the screen when command data is entered from the keyboard Command data from the unit number to the number of elements must be entered The program was created in N88BASIC PROGRAM Sample E5AR ER Communications Program for CompoWay F VERSION 1 00 c Copyright OMRON Corporation 2003 All Rights Reserved OPEN COM E73 AS 11 SENDDATA Communications data input INPUT SEND DATA SEND If no input jump to end routine IF SEND THEN EXITSEND BCC 0 SEND
368. ontrol Setting Level P 8 97 8 14 Alarm Setting Level 1 3 d wm x x 1 Alarm set for Auxiliary Output Assignment parameter and Alarm Type parameter not set to No alarm Alarm Hysteresis 1 to 4 e These parameters are used to enable hysteresis for alarms 1 2 3 and 4 Setting range Unit Default value e 0 01 to 99 99 0 02 Setting Related Parameters Reference Alarm Set Alarm Value Alarm Set Setting Level P 8 37 Alarm Set Alarm Upper limit Alarm Set Setting Level P 8 38 Auxiliary Output Assignment Control Initial Setting 2 Level P 8 67 Alarm Type Alarm Setting Level P 8 76 Alarm Latch Alarm Setting Level P 8 76 Standby Sequence Reset Alarm Setting Level P 8 78 Alarm SP Selection Expansion Control Setting Level P 8 97 8 77 I Section 8 Parameters CH Standby Sequence Reset Alarm Types 1 to 4 VVith standby sequence mn hm nr Use this parameter to select the condition for restarting the standby sequence atter it has been canceled e Conditions A e At the start of operation including after turning ON power e When the alarm value alarm upper or lower limit is changed e When the input correction Input Value 1 for Input Correction Input Correction 1 Input Value 2 for Input Correction or Input Correction 2 parameter is changed e When the SP of the current
369. oose resulting Tighten the screws securely in a bad connection Use thick compensating leads e Change the wiring and locations to allow shorter lengths Use wires of the same resistance for terminals A B and B e Separate the E5AR T ER T from noise emitting devices e Install a surge absorber or noise filter in noise emitting devices e Separate the leads from the power line e Run the leads and power line through separate conduits or ducts Do not wire the leads in parallel with the power line e Change the wiring to allow shorter leads Use shielded cable for the leads Mount the sensor so that the end of the protective tubing approaches the point of control Keep the ambient operating temperature within the specified range 10 to 55 C Correct the host system program 10 3 Inferring Causes from Conditions Abnormal Measured Val Possible cause Solution The input terminals for thermocouple input are Connect the thermocouple short circuited Turn the power OFF and then ON A temperature sensor was replaced or a switch setting was changed while the power was ON Method of use 7 Simple Method for Checking Input Platinum Resistance Thermometer 1 Connect a 100 Q resistor between input terminals A B and short circuit B B 2 If the measured temperature is approximately 0 0 C or 32 0 F the EBAR T ER T is operating nor mally Thermocouple 1 Short circuit the input termina
370. or inputs 2 and 3 TC PT factory setting Input 1 Input Type parameter 2 K 200 0 to 1300 C default Same for inputs 2 and 3 Number of Enabled Channels parameter 1 Hold down the Key for at least 3 seconds to move from the Operation Level to the Input Initial Setting Level i Input 1 Input Type will be displayed Press the Key to select the setting 2 K 200 0 to 1300 0 C 2 Press the cel Key repeated to select Arnau Move to Advanced Function Setting Level Press the X Key and set the password to 169 to move to Advanced Function Setting Level 3 Press the Key repeated to select H Number of enabled channels Press the Key to set the number of enabled channels to 3 This will disable channel 4 4 Press the Key twice for at least 1 second to return to the Input Initial Setting Level and then press the Key for at least 1 second to return to the Operation Level Input the program for channel 1 according to the setting procedure in 3 1 Standard Control P 3 2 Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 4 1 Setting Levels and Key Operations 4 2 42 4 6 4 3 lnitial Setting Example 4 7 4 4 Setting the Input Type 4 10 4 5 Selecting the Temperature Unit
371. ored as the PV when power was interrupted 3 For the Standard Models in Manual Mode at the power inter ruption 4 If power is interrupted in Auto Mode the value set for the MV at Heset parameter will be output unless the Manual Output Method parameter is set to Output Initial Value If the Manual Output Method parameter is set to Output Initial Value the value set for the Manual MV Initial Value parameter will be output 5 For coordinated operation the channel 1 values for the Program No Segment No Elapsed Program Time Elapsed Segment Time Program Repetitions and Hold Status param eters will be used for the other channels e The default setting for the Operation at Power ON parameter is Continue e Set the Operation at Power ON parameter for each channel e f the control mode is set to cascade control set the Operation at Power ON parameter for channel 2 e The operation when the Operation at Power ON parameter is set to Ramp Back is described below 4 43 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control Power Interrupted during a Soak Segment SP Soak time 1 Soak time 2 Segment time Soak time 1 soak time 2 PV I Same slope Power Power Time OFF ON Ramp segment Soak segment If power is interrupted during a soak segment and then restored the ramp slope for the immediately preceding ramp segment is continued and ram
372. ormation on error responses refer to 7 7 Operation Commands P 7 15 7 9 Commands and Responses I M Back Response B Echoback Test Response Slave Function Write start Operation Related address code address code information CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 Related Mu o This command executes a back operation Operation will move to the beginning of the current segment This command is used in setting area 0 An operation error will occur if itis used in setting area 1 Operation errors will also occur in the following cases e If AT is being executed e f the specified channel is being reset or is on standby To use this command the communications writing function must be enabled using the Communications Writing operation command Slave Function Write start Operation Related address code address code information CRC 16 Ho es 1 1 2 2 2 The response for a normal end is shown above For information on error responses refer to 7 7 Operation Commands P 7 15 Slave Function Write start address code address Test data CRC 16 TRITT 1 1 2 2 2 This command is used to perform an echoback test The command can be used in any state of the ESAR T ER T The test data can be any two bytes of hexadecimal data Slave Function Write start address code address Test data CRC 16 TRITT 1 1 2 2 2 The response for a normal end is shown above For information on error responses refer to 7 7 Operation Commands P 7 15
373. osition m wes Paa Response Codes The response for a normal end is shown above For the response codes refer to 6 5 Read from Variable Area P 6 10 E Composite Registration Read Command MRC SRC This command is used to read the monitor values and set values that were registered using the Composite Read Registration command This enables reading multiple monitor values and set values with one command This command can be used in both setting area O and setting area 1 If an area type error or a set value error occurs in any of the data being read no data will be read Response SRC Response code Variable type Data EAE 0000 Monitor value Set value Variable type Data Monitor value Set value Hesponse Codes The response for a normal end is shown above For the response codes refer to 6 5 Head from Variable Area P 6 10 6 25 I Section 6 CompoWay F Communications E Communications Writing Response B Run Reset 6 26 Instruction Related MRC code information 0 SRC Pele tel Related A b Description information EE MN Communications Writing Disabled 01 Communications Writing Enabled This command is used to enable or disable the communications writing function It changes the setting of the Communications Writing parameter When the communications writing function is disabled communica tions cannot be used to write set values or send operation commands such as the Run
374. ower Limit parameters must be set The Alarm Value parameter must be set when any other alarm type is selected B Alarm Sets A group of alarm values is called an alarm set The Alarm Set Number parameter is set for each program e Alarm set numbers can be set between 1 to 4 The default is 1 For channels 2 to 4 during coordinated operation and the secondary side channel 1 during cascade control however alarm set numbers can be between 0 and 4 If 0 is selected the alarm set number will be the same as the number selected for channel 1 M Settings To output an alarm to an auxiliary output the Auxiliary Output Assignment Alarm Type and Alarm Value parameters must be set To output a lower limit alarm to auxiliary output 2 using channel 1 alarm 1 at an alarm value of 10 0 C the Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment parameter is set to CH 1 alarm 1 in the Control Initial Setting 2 Level 1 Hold down the Key for at least 3 seconds to move from the Operation Level to the Input Initial Setting Level Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment 2 Inthe Input Initial Setting Level Display No 3 will show Press the Key twice less than 1 second each time to move to the Control Initial Setting 2 Level 3 In the Control Initial Setting 2 Level Display No
375. p operation is executed from the PV immediately after power is restored to the target SP e f there is no ramp segment before the power interruption the PV immediately after the power is restored will be held as the present SP and operation will be executed as a soak segment The ramp slope of the immediately preceding ramp segment is continued even if the program direction temperature increasing decreasing is different from the ramp segment Ramp operation is executed from the PV immediately after power is restored to the target SP If an input error occurs when the power is restored control is executed using the SP of the soak segment when power was inter rupted SP PV Same slope A A Power Power OFF ON Time Power Interrupted during a Ramp Segment If power is interrupted during a ramp segment the PV when power is restored will be used as the start point for the present SP and ramp operation will be executed at the ramp slope before the power inter ruption The ramp operation using the same ramp slope is the same as when the Step Time Rate of Rise Programming parameter is set to step time The time taken to reach the target SP will not match the set segment time 4 44 4 12 Starting and Stopping Operation b B Other The ramp slope of the immediately preceding ramp segment is continued even if the program direction temperature increasing decreasing is different from the ramp segment I
376. per Limit for Channel 1 Address H OD1E Data written H 00002710 1000 0 C SP Setting Lower Limit for Channel 1 Address H OD20 Data written H FFFFFC18 100 0 C Command CRC 16 Response CRC 16 7 7 Operation Commands I 7 Operation Commands Operation commands are sent using the following command frame Command Frame Slave Function Write start address code address Write data CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 Data name Description Specify the unit number of the Set in hexadecimal from H 01 to H 63 1 to 99 The function code for an Operation Command is H 06 Write start Specify H 0000 for the Operation Command address address Enter the operation code of the operation command Write data and related information see table below This is the check code calculated from the slave address through the end of the data For the calcula tion method refer to Example of CRC 16 Calculation in Z 2 Frames P 7 4 Operation Commands for the E5AR T ER T are listed in the following table Operation Description Related information gode Upper Byte Lower Byte H 00 Communica H 0 1 H 0 OFF disabled tions Writing H 1 ON enabled Run Reset H 0 to 3 F H 0 Run H 1 Reset H 03 AT Execute H 0 to 3 F H 0 Current PID set number H 1 to 8 PID set number H Write Mode H 0 H 0 Backup Mode H 1 RAM Write Mode H Save RAM H 0 H 0 Data H Software H 0 H 0 Reset H Move to Set
377. peration Level e When Output default value is selected the value specified in the Manual MV Initial Value parameter is used This can then be changed using the Manual MV parameter Operation Level Examples of how the MV changes using the two methods are shown below MV MV Manual MV Initial Value Time Time biq Auto mode Manual mode Auto mode Manual mode MV hold Initial value output Setting Default value e Manual Output MV hold H I Method Default value output eng 5 0 to 105 0 Manual MV Initial Standard Value 105 0 to 105 0 Heating cooling LN LA Related Information 4 13 Manual Operation P 4 47 Related Parameters Manual MV Operation Level P 8 7 8 101 I Section 8 Parameters CH MV Change Rate Limit Mode CH AT Calculated Gain AT Hysteresis E n Setting Limit Cycle MV Amplitude Temporary AT Execution Judgement Deviation 8 102 Li LI e Use this parameter to select Mode 0 or Mode 1 for the MV change rate limit e When Mode 1 is selected the MV change of rate limit functions only with respect to increases in the MV Setting range Unit Default value 0 Mode O 1 Mode 1 Related Information PID Sets in 5 2 Control Functions P 5 10 Related Parameters MV Change Rate Limit Heating and MV Change Rate Limit Cooling Adjustment Level P 8 30 w
378. peration Reverse Operation For information on direct and reverse operation refer to 4 7 Setting Output Parameters P 4 20 4 12 4 4 Setting the Input Type e Alarms The upper limit alarm and lower limit alarm will be inverted Therefore set an alarm type and alarm values that invert the upper limit or lower limit of the display value For example if an absolute value upper limit is set for the alarm type operation will be as shown in the following figure Display value Input value I I I I I 1 f ON Alarm function OFF Alarm value For information on alarms refer to 4 77 Using Auxiliary Outputs P 4 37 e Input Correction The sign of the input correction value will be inverted Therefore set the Input Correction 1 and Input k ES Correction 2 parameters to values that invert the sign of the display value For more information on h input correction refer to 5 1 Input Adjustment Functions P 5 2 o o PID Set Automatic Selection s If the PID Set Automatic Selection Data parameter is set to PV set the PID Set Automatic Selection Range Upper Limit parameter so that the set value decreases for the PID set numbers in ascending N order as shown in the following figure PID set automatic selection range upper limit PID 1 automatic selection range upper limit PID 7 automatic selection range upper limit PID set number 4 I 1 I I I 1 1 I I
379. perations that do not interfere with control On the other hand operations that may change control such as writing Initial set values cannot be performed Set values that cannot be written can still be read In setting area 1 operation is stopped This makes it possible to perform operations such as writing Initial set values which cannot be written in setting area O When the power is turned ON setting area O is selected To access setting area 1 use the Move to Setting Area 1 operation command To return to setting area O from setting area 1 turn OFF the power or use the Software Reset operation command Software Reset operation command Setting area Move to Setting Area 1 Setting area 1 operation command Operation in progress Operation stopped mil mk number s Open 0 Adjustment 2 Level Setting area 0 Operation in PID Setting Level 0B Approximation Setting Level Program Setting Level Time Signal Setting Level 7 8 Setting Areas I mis number OD Content Sting Level 7 19 I Section 7 Modbus Communications 7 9 Commands and Responses The EBAR T ER T provides a set of commands that read from variable areas write to variable areas execute operation commands and execute other services provided by the Modbus communications protocol The commands supported by the EBAR T ER T are described below M Reading Monitor Values Slave Function Read start Number of Command address
380. play Adjustment Communications Settings Advanced Function Settings Expansion Control Settings and Calibration Control will stop on all channels as soon as you move to any of these levels Display No 3 shows the current level The characters and the corre sponding levels are as follows Pt Pre Protectlevel O OO O O O OOOO tAds Adusmenlewi SSS taae Adusiment2level SSS Alam Set Seting Lev iK PD Settinglevel 18 Communications Setting Level Calibration Level L2 Controllnitial Setting 2 Level 1 The program number and segment number are displayed 2 The program number and 5 are displayed 4 5 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 4 2 Set Values The value selected for each parameter is called the set value There are two types of set values numbers and characters Set values are displayed and changed as follows Changing a Numeric Set Value than the 1 Press the 2 Press the A Key continuously to increase the set value When the upper limit of the setting is reached the set value will flash and cannot be increased any further 7 Key continuously to decrease the set value When the lower limit of the settin
381. pleted find the secondary side PID constants 2 Change to cascade control and execute AT for the primary side to find the suitable PID constants Change the channel 2 SP mode to Remote SP Mode cascade closed change to cascade control and execute AT for channel 1 Channel 2 9 Operation for If an error occurs on the primary side the value set for the MV at PV Primary Side Input Error parameter is output as the primary side channel 1 MV The Errors secondary side continues control of the remote SP equivalent to the primary side setting for the MV at PV Error parameter This means that the primary side channel 1 MV at PV Error parameter must always be set E Cascade Heating Cooling Control e Cascade control can be performed using heating cooling control e Input 1 is for the primary loop channel 1 and input 2 is for the secondary loop channel 2 The Control Mode parameter does not need to be set for Position proportional Control Models These models always perform position proportional control I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control B Position proportional Control 4 18 e Closed Floating e Motor Calibration and Travel Time Position proportional Dead Band and Open Close Hysteresis ON OFF 100 PV Dead Band A potentiometer is used to determine how much the valve is open or closed The opening of valves with control motors attached can be co
382. poWay F y Communications Data Length e After changing the communications data length setting execute a software reset or turn the power OFF and ON to make the change effective Setngrangs Unt Defeutvalue _ a Setting Lt ju n Communications Stop Bits Protocol is CompoWay F e After changing the communications stop bit setting execute a software reset or turn the power OFF and ON to make the change effective Setting B Setting Communications Parity Hu e After changing the communications parity setting execute a software reset or turn the power OFF and ON to make the change effective Setting range Unit Default value a Setting 8 86 8 16 Communications Setting Level L 5 Transmission Wait Time Sade e After changing the transmission wait time setting execute a software reset or turn the power OFF and ON to make the change effective Setting range Unit Default value CM Doeg Setting 8 87 I Section 8 Parameters J L0 8 17 Advanced Function Setting Level 2 This level includes parameters for parameter initialization PF Key assignments and the number of enabled channels Level Changes at Startup Up To Advanced Function Setting Level N i Operation Program Setting Adj
383. pplies to all channels e This function is enabled only during program operation Operation is as follows based on the ON OFF status of the event input o qi Parameter names add characters Display No 3 Control Initial Event Input 1 to 10 Setting 2 Level Assignment Event input specification 1 10 10 5 46 5 9 Using a Transfer Output I 5 9 Using a Transfer Output M Transfer Output Settings Control Transfer Output Assignments Output For a transfer output use an output that is not being used as a control output A transfer output can be used to output one of the following five types of data as selected in the Control Transfer Output Assignment parameters 1 Present Set Point 2 Present Value PV 3 MV Heating 4 MV Cooling 5 Valve Opening For more information refer to 8 13 Control Initial Setting 2 Level 2 7 Control Transfer Output 1 to 4 Assignments P 8 64 The heating and cooling MVs can be output only from a Standard Control Model and the valve opening can be output only from a Position proportional Control Model with a potentiometer connected Control Transfer output assignment Present Set Point Ea Channel 1 PresentValue Channel TMV Heaing A Channel 1 MV Cooling 3200 x a nannerz Present value PV Heaing anners MV Heating m E D UU E x O 4 CX
384. product using fans or other means of air ventilation When providing forced cooling however be careful not to cool down the terminals sections alone to avoid measurement errors Noise Countermeasures To prevent inductive noise separate the wiring for the product s terminal block and connector from high voltage high current power lines Do not run the wiring parallel to or in the same cable as power lines The influence of noise can also be reduced by using separate wiring ducts or shield lines Install surge absorbers or noise filters in devices near the product that generate noise in particular devices with an inductance component such as motors trans formers solenoids and magnetic coils If a noise filter is used for the power supply check the voltage and current and install the noise filter as close as possible to the product Separate the product as far as possible from devices generating strong high frequency noise e g high frequency welders and high frequency sewing machines or surges e Measurement Accuracy When extending the thermocouple lead wire be sure to use a compensating wire that matches the thermocouple type When extending the lead wire of the platinum resistance thermometer be sure to use wires that have low resistance and make sure that the resistances of the three lead wires are the same If the measurement accuracy is low check whether the input shift is set correctly Waterproofing
385. put assignments required for the control After setting the control mode specify direct reverse operation for each channel Standard Models The control modes that can be selected depend on the number of input points mem z du ato Channel 1 Control Output Heating 1 Control Channel 1 Control Output Heating Heating min 2 Control Output 7 lm ES Channel 4 Control Output Heatin EJ Channel 1 Control Output Heatin m Channel 1 Control Output OUT3 OUT4 Standard Control illi Nx S lt Heating Cooling Cooling ui Standard Control IN1 with Remote SP IN2 Remote SP Heating Cooling IN1 Control with IN2 Remote SP Remote SP Proportional IN 1 Control IN2 Ratio setting Cascade Standard IN1 Primary loop Control IN2 Secondary loop Cascade Heating IN1 Primary loop Cooling Control IN2 Secondary loop Direct Reverse operation Channel 2 Control Output Heating Channel 2 Control Output Cooling OUT1 1 Channel 1 Control Output Heating UT1 Channel 1 Control Output Heating UT2 Channel 1 Control Output Cooling OUT1 Channel 1 Control Output Heating OUT1 1 Channel 2 Control Output Heating OUT1 OUT2 Channel 2 Control Output Heating Channel 2 Control Output Cooling E Description l Control whereby the MV is increased as the present Direct value increases operation When the present value PV i
386. q JJO ynejoq Keyds q 8 010 440 enj eA JojuouJ Dunies suomeoiunuJuloo RIA Buliolluoui pue JO ave H Ag pexijeud sen eA Joyuouj Dunieg Li Ig59ueo 1no xg IV gin 9 20 6200 20 sseippy sapo a eModuoo 149 19 16 Setting Lists 000 1 01 00070 eBuei pezijeuuou eu o juejeninbe s O 0 008 01 01002 2 0 00 L 01 01002 40 Indu d y e jo eDeijs 1ndui y ui p pnioul si uoneuuxoldde eui 3uBreas ueuMw Uonouny 1004 egenbs uornoeJixe eui 40 gyep indui y uo peseq sen eA pezijeuuou 1eg 6666 01 666 L 40 20000 01 1 834444 H ere 10005 Jejeurereg Doreuv 8180 2000 6666 01 070 10220000 H 01 00000000 H 1404 09 M01 100 05 o uopoea xa 9180 8000 666 6 01 070 40220000 H 01 00000000 H 2 110 110 07 6 joog arenbs jo uonoeax3 180 666 6 01 070 30420000 H 01 00000000H luloq 119 M07 2100 SENDS jo 666 6 01 070 30720000 01 00000000 10 119 M07 1004 SENDS jo uonoejx3 2 K 31 mat r 3 1 1 1 1 22 22 22 ZI Da ar r K 31 23 63 LA 4 S 7 E 2Y L O suoneoiunuuuioo JO senje um s seul 26 91 8 2 50000000 01 00000000 H juno2 A0N t eDeleAy AON 9 0 2 1 318 suoneoiunuuuioo JO sen e um s seul 26 91 8 2 50
387. r D sub 9 pin straight Terminator Terminator B B 100 to 1250 A A 1 2 W E5AR T E5AR T E5AR T No 0 No 1 No 31 2 16 2 2 Using the Terminals I Insulation Blocks As shown in the following diagram the function blocks of the EBAR T ER T are electrically insulated Functional insulation is provided between all of the following Inputs event inputs voltage outputs current outputs and communica tions Basic insulation is provided between all of the following Inputs event inputs voltage outputs current outputs communications relay outputs and transistor outputs If reinforced insulation is required input event input voltage output current output and communications terminals must be connected to a device that have no exposed charged parts and whose basic insulation is suitable for the applicable maximum voltage of connected devices 1 100 to 120 VAC Event inputs voltage outputs 24 VAC DC current outputs reinforced insulation 2 120 to 240 VAC basic insulation Relay outputs Basic insulation Transistor outputs Functional insulation Power supply l Section 2 Preparations c 5 x 5 o o pum Q 2 18 Section 3 Typical Control Examples o landari GORLOL de sete ren amma ahua astay bu 3 2 3 2 Coordinated Electric Oven Operation 3 7 I Section 3 Typical Control Examples 3 1 Stan
388. r or EEPROM error No Response In the following cases the received command is not processed and a response is not returned A timeout will occur at the host device e The slave address in the received command is different from the communications unit number set in the A parity error framing error or overrun error occurred due to a transfer error or other error e A CRC 16 code error occurred in the received command frame e A time interval greater that 3 5 characters occurred between data while receiving a command frame 7 3 List of Functions 7 3 List of Functions The function codes supported by the E5AR T ER T are listed below Function Description codes Reads a variable area Multiple Read from Variable Area variables that are consecutive can be read Function Codes Writes to a variable area Multiple variables that are con secutive can be written Write to Variable Area Broadcasting is possible 06 06 Operation Command mun n 777 7 Broadcasting is possible 08 H 08 Echoback Test Performs an echoback test 7 7 Section 7 Modbus Communications 7 4 Variable Areas The areas used for data exchange when communicating with the ESAR T ER T are called the variable areas Present values can be read and set values can be read and written using the variable areas of the E5AR T ER T Operation commands do not use the variable areas B Addresses
389. racked when the mode is changed from another mode into either Program SP or Remote SP The diagram on the right shows SP tracking when the mode is PSP FSP PSP FSP mime With SP tracking PSP FSP gt SP FSP changed from Program SP to Fixed SP PSP FSP Without SP tracking Time lf at the end of a program segment the difference deviation between the PV and the present set point program SP is not within a preset range the program can be set to not continue This is called the wait operation and the preset range is called the wait band If the PV enters the wait band during wait operation the program will immediately move to the next segment There are two types of wait operation Wait at Segment End and Always wait which can be selected by setting the Wait Mode parameter The wait operation can be enabled and disabled for each segment Upper and lower limits can be set for the wait band and these can be set for each program The wait operation will be disabled if the Wait Band parameter is set to 0 5 7 Program Operation Functions I Wait at Segment End Always Wait B Time Signal If the difference deviation between the PV and the present SP is not less than the wait band the program does not move to the next segment As soon as the PV enters the wait band the program moves to the next segment SP Segment completed Y Wait Band Upper Limit
390. ram Mode has completed run status The segment number elapsed program time elapsed seg ment time and remaining segment time will be the values from the start of the program The time signal is OFF If the SP Mode parameter is changed to Program SP PSP the program will start again If however the Operation at Reset parameter is set to Fixed Control Fixed SP Mode cannot be set 5 38 5 8 Using Event Inputs I 5 8 Using Event Inputs e An order of priority exists for event inputs key operation and communications settings The last setting takes priority The operation of event inputs can be switched between pulse operation i e event occurs only when the input changes from OFF to ON and toggle operation i e event occurs either when the input changes from OFF to ON or from ON to OFF M Event Input Assignments e Functions are assigned to event inputs which use external contact Event Input 1 Assi t inputs using the Event Input Assignment 1 to 6 parameters On a Controller with more than one input functions can be assigned for channels 2 and higher for the number of supported channels Event Input Assignments All Channels Communications Writing ON OFF Event inputs Channel 1 Channel 1 Program No Bit 0 Weight 1 Channel 1 Program Bit 1 Weight 20 Channel 1 Run ON Reset OFF Channel 1 Run OFF Reset ON P Channel 1 Auto
391. rameters Auxiliary Output Assignment Control Initial Setting 2 Level P 8 67 Program Output Selection Control Initial Setting 2 Level P 8 68 CH1 or CH2 during independent control with time signal enabled e Time signals can be set for 6 outputs for each program with 3 time signals for each output e This parameter is used to set the segments for which time signals are used The default setting is O disabled Setting range Unit Default value 0 to Number of Segments 0 Disabled 0 Disabled Related Information Time Signal in 5 7 Program Operation Functions P 5 33 Related Parameters Auxiliary Output Assignment Control Initial Setting 2 Level P 8 67 Program Output Selection Control Initial Setting 2 Level P 8 68 Time Signal ON Time Time Signal Setting Level P 8 45 Time Signal OFF Time Time Signal Setting Level P 8 45 CH Time Signal ON Time 1 Time Signal ON Time 2 Time Signal ON Time 3 1 to 6 n Setting CH Time Signal OFF Time 1 Time Signal OFF Time 2 Time Signal OFF Time 3 1 to 6 n Setting 8 9 Time Signal Setting Level ea ea ea CH1 or CH2 during independent control with time signal enabled e These parameters are used to set the ON time for time signals e Set the interval between the time signal ON and OFF times to 100 ms minimum Unexpected operation may o
392. reason the next enabled parameter will be displayed The following is an example of changing channels in the Operation Level Present Value PV SP Present Value PV SP The CH key is disabled on Parameter for selected channel models with only one channel appears If you continue to hold down the Key after changing channels you will not move to the next channel To con tinue changing channels release and press the Key again For more information refer to 5 4 Display and Key Adlust ment Functions P 5 18 4 15 Adjusting Programs I 4 15 Adjusting Programs E Changing the SP Before change After change E Changing the Time Before change After change The temperature vector will change if the program is changed during operation when step time operation is used This section describes the vector changes If the SP is changed during a segment the present SP will move in a straight line with the changed SP as the target point SP Point of change Segment N Segment N 1 Time If the time is changed during a segment the slope of the line along which the present SP moves will change because the time taken to reach the target will change SP Point of change Time Segment N Segment N 1 If the segment time after the change is shorter than
393. rected using a 2 point correction e A temperature difference that occurs due to the positioning of the control sensor in respect to the position where the temperature is required can be rectified using the input correction values Two point Correction Display Input Correction 2 Input Value 1 for Input Correction Input Value 2 for Input Value 2 for Input Correchon SS ee SS Input Correction After correction Input Correction 1 Before correction Input Correction 2 Input Value 1 for Input Correction gt p Input Correction 1 Input value Input Value 1 for Input Correction 19999 to 99999 200 0 Input Value 2 for Input Correction 19999 to 99999 1300 0 Input Correction 1 199 99 to 999 99 Input Correction 2 199 99 to 999 99 e Straight line correction is accomplished by setting the Input Correction 1 parameter to the desired value for the input value set in the Input Value 1 for Input Correction parameter and setting the Input Correction 2 parameter to the desired value for the input value set in the Input Value 2 for Input Correction parameter Different degrees of correction may be required for the Input Correction 1 and Input Correction 2 parameters and thus the slope of the line between the two points may differ before and after correction e Input correction is set separately for each channel The input correction settings for inputs 1 to 4 of a Controller with more than
394. restricts access to the Input Initial Setting Control Initial Setting Control Initial Setting 2 Alarm Setting Display Adjustment and Communications Setting Levels Move to Control Initial Setting Move to Input Initial Control Initial Setting 2 Alarm Setting Level Setting Display Adjustment or Communications Setting Level Enabled Move to Advanced Func tion Setting Level param Enabled eter is displayed Enabled Move to Advanced Func tion Setting Level param eter is not displayed Prohibited Prohibited e When the Initial Setting Protection parameter is set to 2 nothing happens when the Level Key is held down to move to Input Initial Setting Level from Operation Level Program Setting Level Adjustment Level Adjustment 2 Level Alarm Set Setting Level PID Setting Level Time Signal Setting Level Approximation Setting Level or Monitor Item Level The flashing display to indicate movement to another level also does not appear Enabled The default setting is Setting Change Protection prevents use of the A and M Keys Set value Keys be used to change settings Keys cannot be used to change settings However settings can be changed in Protect Level Description The default setting is OFF PF Key Protection prevents use of the PF1 PF2 Keys value OFF PF1 PF2 Keys are enabled ON PF1 PF2 Keys are disabled Prohibits use as a function key or a channel k
395. rn 6 1 Current output B rog r Input 1 4 to 20 mA DC 500 max 6 1 Fi 0 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max Switched by output type setting C DIE TC PT V Thermocouple Voltage Current Auxiliary outputs D Platinum resistance thermometer Transistor outputs O SUB1 J pH w SUB2 D Me ei Note With the E5AR T the power supply voltage must be 100 to 120 V for UL compliance With the E5AR T the power supply voltage must be 100 to 240 V for CE marking compliance 2 2 Using the Terminals I E5ER TCTSDW FLK 2 loop Controller E5ER TPRTDF gt 24 VAC DG 1100 to 240 VAC A F A ES mn 24 VAC DC 1 100 to 240 VAC Event inputs p gi gt I o EE T ne m F I PO gt gt r Input power supply depends on model 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC DC no polarity Input power supply depends on model 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC DC no polarity 12 2 RS 485 Current output A 4 to 20 mA 500 Q max x 0 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max Switched by output age type setting OUT1 Current output 4 to 20 mA 500 Q max 7 0 to 20 mA DC 500 Q max Switched by output type setting See L Relay output 250 VAC 1A
396. rogram Operation Functions P 5 28 CH Advance CH Back f Operation iin f Operation I 8 3 Operation Level D ELI Running e This parameter is used to advance the program to the beginning of the next segment If the advance operation is executed during a hold the program is advanced to the beginning of the next segment and the hold status is continued The set value is when switching to this parameter e Change the set value to to advance the program to the next segment When the advance command execution has been completed the set value will automatically return to arr Related Information 5 7 Program Operation Functions P 5 28 was Running e This parameter is used to return the program to the start of the segment being executed If the back operation is executed during a hold the program returns to the beginning of the segment being executed and the hold status is continued The set value is 022 when switching to this parameter e Change the set value to on to return to the beginning of the current segment e When the back command execution has been completed the set value will automatically return to a Fr Related Information 5 7 Program Operation Functions P 5 28 I Section 8 Parameters CH Remaining Standby Time Monitor i mm Running 5 hm Quee e Du ww ju 4
397. rticular attention must be given This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products e Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not described in this manual e Nuclear energy control systems combustion systems railroad systems aviation systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equipment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations e Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS OMRON shall not be responsible for the user s programming of a programmable product or any consequence thereof Disclaimers CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However som
398. s PV Start with Time The SP at the start of the program is set to the current PV and the Priority ramp rate is modified accordingly to adjust to the segment time This means that in general the segment 2 ramp rate will change from the rate that is set in the program The following diagram shows operation examples when the PV at the start of program operation is larger than the SP and when it is smaller than the SP Once segment 2 has been completed the operation is according to the program Using a PV Start with time priority is disabled if rate of rise programming is used SP SP Segment 2 Segment 3 Segment 4 x Segment 5 Segment 2 x segmen d Segment 4 x Segment 5 x Operation starts at PV PV x s Time Time Operation starts at PV 5 37 l Section 5 Functions and Operations Standby e When a standby is set the program does not start operating until the standby time set in hours minutes has elapsed after the Run Reset parameter is set to Run The following conditions apply to operation during a standby e Control outputs are governed by the MV at Reset parameter the indicators and status display will show Run status If the Operation at Reset parameter is set to Fixed Control then control outputs will start from the fixed SP Hold advance back and AT operations when the Operation at Heset parameter is set to Stop Control cannot be executed If AT is executed when the Opera
399. s AT or Manual Settings The timing for generating a limit cycle depends on whether or not the deviation DV when AT is begun is less than the Temporary AT Excitation Judgement Deviation parameter default 10 096 FS The PV changes as follows during AT Present Deviation gt 10 FS Present DETA PRA value PV Limit cycle MV amplitude 402 lue PV imit cycle MV amplitude 40 SP SP ON Deviation Deviation 10 FS 10 FS P pfp w w m w w A A AT start AT end AT start AT end The amplitude of change of the limit cycle MV can be changed in the Limit Cycle MV Amplitude parameter For heating cooling and position proportional floating control the limit cycle is as shown below regardless of the deviation Limit cycle MV amplitude 100 AT start AT end 4 35 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control B Manual Settings To set the PID constants manually set values for the Proportional Band P Integral Time 1 and Derivative Time D parameters f you already know the control characteristics directly set the PID constants to adjust control The PID constants are set in the Proportional Band P Integral Time 1 and Derivative Time D parameters integral time and D derivative time can be set to 0 to select a propor tional action In the default settings the Manual Reset Value parameter is set to 50 0 so that the proportional
400. s higher than the set cooling point SP the MV is increased in proportion to the difference between the PV and the SP Control whereby the MV is decreased as the present Reverse value increases operation When the present value PV is lower than the set heating point SP the MV is increased in proportion to the difference between the PV and the SP e When pulse outputs are used the control period must be set for each channel 1 3 I O and Main Functions I Control Transfer Output Assignments Position proportional Control Models Position proportional Control Models support only standard control Control mede 1 input 2 input models 4 input Control T ransfer output models models assignment Standard Con IN1 OUT1 Channel 1 Control Output Open Hel OUT2 Channel 2 Control Output Closed Direct Reverse a Description operation Control whereby the MV is increased as the present value increases When the present value PV is higher than the set point SP the MV is increased in proportion to the difference between the PV and the SP Direct operation cooling Control whereby the MV is decreased as the present value increases When the present value PV is lower than the set point SP the MV is increased in proportion to the difference between the PV and the SP Reverse operation heating e Floating control or closed control can also be selected for the Position proportional Control Models
401. s010 00000000 indino Ayeyixny 3140 4000 1 0 210 4000 vi3O 0000 810 2000 1 NO L0000000 H 0 4 40 00000000 49427 p uuelv 1 edA uueje se owes Du ed p uue v 4 66 66 01 L0 0 40 20000 L0000000 H 1 NO L0000000 H 0 440 00000000 H edA uueje se owes SIS H SAH uue v ed uue v uole wely 3040 2000 66 66 01 1070 40 20000 91 L0000000H L NO L0000000 H 0 440 00000000 H edA uueje se owes SIS9Jo s H Z uup V ed Z uue v 9040 9000 0 S000 uoje1z uuely 8040 v000 66 66 01 1070 H0Z20000 H 01 L0000000 H 1 NO 10000000 H 0 4 10 00000000 LL eouenbes qpueis UHA 3IUJl I9MO enjeA ejn osqy 40000000 OL eouenbes Aqpue s UNA 1 ull ddn en eA einjosqy v0000000 H 6 were yuum Jewo enje einjosqy 60000000 H 8 were yuur eddn enjeA einjosqv 80000000 H 4 eouenbes AQDUE1S UM Wee 1011 20000000 H 9 eouenbes Aqpuejs uy wee ywj ioddN 90000000 eouenbes qpueis YUM UJe e 3lUuj Jeo pue 1eddfy 0000000 p uueje eBueu ywij 19m0 pue 1edd 0000000 H were ywij 19m07 20000000 z were 1011 4 20000000 L wee pue l ddn L0000000 H z H 0 wieje ON 00000000 on eA jo lu uonisod Aelds B 19S nun uiod euuroeq ynejeq Mn SUONCOIUNWWOD BIA Buuojuoui pue Dunes JO ae
402. se the and Keys to set the Segment Set 522 Point parameter for segment 4 to 50 0 14 Press the el Key for less than 1 second to display the Segment Time parameter for segment 4 Use the and 22 Keys to set the Segment 522 Time parameter for segment 4 to 5 00 4 30 4 9 Performing ON OFF Control fi 4 9 Performing ON OFF Control ON OFF control consists of setting an SP and then having the control output turn OFF when the temper ature reaches the SP during control When the control output turns OFF the temperature begins to fall and once it falls to a certain point the control output turns ON again This action is repeated around a certain position ON OFF control requires setting the Hysteresis Heating parameter to the temperature drop from the SP where control output should turn ON The Direct Reverse Operation parameter is used to determine whether the MV is increased or decreased with respect to an increase or decrease of the PV B ON OFF Control Hysteresis 6 Three position Control On the E5AR T ER T switching between advanced PID control and ON OFF control is accomplished by setting the Proportional Band parameter When the proportional band is set to 0 00 ON OFF control is performed and when it is set to any value except 0 00 advanced PID control is performed The default setting is 10 00 In ON OFF control hysteresis is added when
403. sed as the SP The Program SP OFF Fixed SP ON function creates an operation command that applies to one specific channel This function is disabled however for channels 2 to 4 during coordinated operation Operation is as follows based on the ON OFF status of the event Input Program SP Mode BEEN Fixed SP Mode When the event input is ON the program SP PSP is used as the SP The event input must be reset before this function can be activated again The Program SP function creates an operation command that applies to one specific channel This function is disabled however for channels 2 to 4 during coordinated operation Operation is as follows based on the ON OFF status of the event input Program SP Mode When the event input is ON the remote SP RSP is used as the SP The event input must be reset before this function can be activated again The Remote SP function creates an operation command that applies to one specific channel This function is disabled however for channels that do not support the remote SP function Operation is as follows based on the ON OFF status of the event input of Remote SP Mode 5 8 Using Event Inputs I Fixed SP Hold ON Clear Hold OFF Advance When the event input is ON the fixed SP FSP is used as the SP The event input must be reset before this function can be activated again The Fixed SP function creates an operation command that applies
404. segment is changed including changing the fixed SP in Fixed SP Mode e When program is started including when the program is started for program repeats or links or e When the segment is changed including when an advance is executed e Condition B Power ON e The following example shows operation using a lower limit alarm with standby sequence SP changedY Condition A only Alarm poni o eem teen eme NI after change Alarm hysteresis l l Condition A only O Standby sequence off point Alarm point F 77 E reset point l l e Standby sequence l l Alarm output Conditions A Alarm output Condition B e After changing the standby sequence reset setting a software reset must be executed or the power turned OFF and ON to make the change take effect Setting range Unit Default value e 5 mE H Condition A Setting Related Parameters Alarm Type Alarm Setting Level P 8 75 EXE Alarm Latch Alarm Setting Level P 8 76 8 78 8 14 Alarm Setting Level 1 3 Auxiliary Output Open in Alarm 1 to 10 e These parameters are used to select the output state of auxiliary outputs 1 to 10 e When Close in alarm is selected the state of the alarm output function is output without change When Open in alarm is selected the state of the output function is inverted before output The relation between the alarm output
405. select Alita Auto for Auto Mode or A a Manual for Manual Mode When Manual Mode is selected the MANU indicator lights This parameter does not appear if either the PF1 Setting or PF2 setting parameter is set to Auto Manual Related Information 4 13 Manual Operation P 4 47 Related Parameters PF1 Setting and PF2 Setting Advanced Function Setting Level P 8 89 Section 8 Parameters 8 4 Program Setting Level The Program Setting Level parameter is used to make the SP time rate of rise and other program settings The Program Editing parameter the first parameter displayed under Program Setting Level is used to move to each program Level Changes at Startup Up To Program Setting Level Povver ON 5 usss eee deccm un ca pu un can END I 91 1 un cm GERA sss p n Program Setting Adjustment Adjustment 2 Level Level Level PE Age ey less ey less key less key less than1s than1s than 1 s key less than 1 s than 1 s I Time Signal i Alarm Set Setting Setting Level key Aik 1 2 37 key Lay less than 1s less than 1 s less than 1 s ee ee ee ee ee ee Control in progress Parameter Changes within Program Setting Level Program Setting Level 1 PRG N Program Editing Program 1
406. signments assigned For models with more than one input assignments can be made for channels 2 and higher as needed depending on the number of channels The U ALM output is an OR output of alarm functions 1 to 4 for all channels Auxiliary outputs Auxiliary output assignments Channel 1 SUB1 Channel 1 Alarm 1 lo SUB2 Channel 1 Alarm 2 SUB3 Channel 1 Alarm 3 5 4 Channel 1 Alarm 4 SUB5 Channel 1 Input Error a SUB6 Channel 1 RSP Input Error U 1 SUB7 Channel 1 Run Output 1 4 Alarm 1 OR output of all channels SUB8 Channel 1 Program End Output SUB9 Channel 1 Program Output 1 EX SUB10 Channel 1 Program Output 2 Channel 1 Program Output 3 Channel 1 Program Output 4 Channel 1 Program Output 5 U ALM Output Channel 1 Program Output 6 MEME Channel 1 Program Output 7 Channel 1 Program Output 8 m Channel 1 Program Output 9 Channel 1 Program Output 10 un 1 3 I O and Main Functions I B Model Number Structure Q 2009866060 a E5 BETTI TT size 41 A 96 x 96 mm E 48 x 96 mm 2 Fixed Program Fixed Blank Program T 3 Control method Standard or heating cooling Position proportional 4
407. sponding Controller reading A when near the SP Object temperature B Controller reading A and set the Input Value 2 for Input Correction parameter to the Controller reading A 4 After making the settings check the reading of the Controller A and the temperature of the object B 5 Correction has now been performed at two points near room temperature and near the SP If you wish to improve the accuracy near the SP establish two more correction points above and below the SP Figure 2 illustrates the correction 5 3 I Section 5 Functions and Operations Input Value 2 for Input Correction r 3 c LIL E Input Value 1 for Input Correction Lote Example of 2 point Correction Input Value 1 for Input Correction Indicated temperature Temperature indicated on Controller A After correction Indicated temperature after adjustment e g 550 0 C Indicated temperature p before adjustment e g 500 0 C Before correction Input Correction 2 ee x Li M L al before adjustment e g 40 0 C Indicated temperature Input
408. steresis heating of 2 00 FS set the Proportional Band parameter to 0 00 in PID Setting Level to select ON OFF control 1 Press the _ Key repeatedly less than 1 second each time to move from the Operation Level to the PID Setting Level 2 The PID Selection parameter is displayed in the PID Setting Level If a PID set number will not be used use the default setting 1 If a PID set number will be used select the PID set number for the desired control 3 Press the Key to display the Proportional Band parameter Use the A and Keys to set the value to 0 00 4 Press the Key repeatedly less than 1 second each time to return to the Operation Level Set the Hysteresis Heating parameter to 2 00 in the Adjustment Level 1 Press the Key for less than 1 second to move from the Operation Level to the Adjustment Level 2 Press the ce Key repeatedly to select the Hysteresis Heating parameter 3 Use the and zl Keys to set the value to 2 00 4 Press the Key repeatedly less than 1 second each time to return to the Operation Level 4 10 Determining the PID Constants AT or Manual Settings 4 10 Determining the PID Constants AT or Manual Settings E Auto tuning AT When AT is executed the most suitable PID constants for the current SP are set automatically This is accomplished by varying the MV to obtain the characteristics of the control object using the
409. t 1 Alarm Value 2 Alarm Set 1 Alarm Value Upper Limit 2 0209 Alarm Set 1 Alarm Value Lower Limit 2 0304 Alarm Set 1 Alarm Value 1 Alarm Set 1 Alarm Value Lower Limit 2 0309 Alarm Set 1 Alarm Value Upper Limit 1 h 1 2 1 2 Alarm Set 1 Alarm Value Lower Limit 1 Alarm Set 1 Alarm Value 2 Alarm Set 1 Alarm Value Upper Limit 2 Alarm Set 1 Alarm Value Lower Limit 2 6 17 I Section 6 CompoWay F Communications Monitor value Monitor value 2 Address Address 0005 PID Set Number Monitor 0205 PID Set Number Monitor 1 3 Ca 0107 0108 This command is used to read present values status and other monitor values The number of elements can be set from 0002 to 0019 to allow reading monitor values in consecutive addresses When used in setting area 1 the response for the present value and internal SP will be 0 and the response for the status will be as indicated in the notes in 5 1 Status Communications P A 8 MRC SRC Response code Data Hesponse Codes Response The response for a normal end is shown above For the response codes refer to 6 5 Read from Variable Area P 6 10 M Reading Set Values Variable Command MRC SRC type Address Bit position Number of elements Parameters 1 z 0000 to OO4F Parameters in setting area 0 C5 Protect Level 0100 to O14E 2 Operation Level Adjustment Level C8 l Co Adjustment 2 Level i
410. t Up EE Du Ri 5 34 Program Status OUIDUIS 25 u au os apo ae ae eet 5 36 Operation at Program Start 5 37 m 5 38 5 6 Sing EVenb RDUT u baqa oa yana 5 39 Event Input Assignments 5 39 5 0 USING a Transiter OUIDUT uuu u u uuu pru bue HUS IA u uu aaa 5 47 Transfer Output Settings 5 47 5 10 Using COMMUNICATIONS Soma ETE Dee 5 49 Setting Communications Parameters 5 49 Communications Writing 5 50 Section6 CompoWay F Communications 6 1 Gommu nicalloris Metodu ina aa kc ae eed eR b si 6 2 CompoWay F Communications 6 2 Communications Specifications 6 2 Transter FrotocoOl ua uu u 6 3 XIII 02 EL ES OL ESI 6 4 Command Erates u u dbi dias didi Qo EU dues PIU pe DM z 6 4 FOSDODSO 6 5 e FINS MIN TO XD n d 6 6 6 4 Varlable Areas 6 7 valable TYDES a UCU 6 7 6 8 Number or D ALA Pa
411. t digit of Display No 1 shows the input number The example below shows 1 for input 1 For input 2 the display would show 23590 2 Rd ore Timeo Input Type See note PT100 1 0 Stra l Note lt gt The setting of the Input Type parameter is given in pointed brackets Bl Output Calibration Parameters The parameters for output calibration are shown below The display depends on the output type setting for each output In the following example the last digit of Display No 1 shows 1 for output 1 For output 2 this would be sAeti2 Skee Input calibration values registered For linear current output 9 2 9 1 Parameters for User Calibration I If user calibration was performed on any of inputs 1 to 4 or outputs 1 to 6 following purchase of the Controller user calibration information will be displayed as shown below when you move to Calibration Level Displays dots 9 3 I Section 9 User Calibration 9 2 User Calibration The E5AR T ER T is calibrated before shipment from the factory and thus there is normally no need for the user to perform calibration If user calibration is necessary use the calibration functions for temperature inputs analog inputs and outputs that are provided in the Controller Be aware however that OMRON cannot ensure the results of calibration by the user The calibration data is overwritten each ti
412. t input is ON the mode svvitches to Manual Mode Manual ON e The Auto OFF Manual ON function creates an operation command that applies to one specific channel e Operation is as follows based on the ON OFF status of the event input 5 42 5 8 Using Event Inputs I Program SP OFF This function is valid only when using control with a remote SP Remote SP ON e When the event input is ON the remote SP RSP is used as the SP When the event input is OFF the program SP PSP is used as the SP e The Program SP OFF Remote SP ON function creates an operation command that applies to one specific channel Operation is as follows based on the ON OFF status of the event input 1 7 Remote SP OFF e VVhen the event input is ON the fixed SP FSP is used as the SP Fixed SP ON VVhen the event input is OFF the remote SP RSP is used as the SP e The Remote SP OFF Fixed SP ON function creates an operation command that applies to one specific channel This function is disabled however for channels that do not support the remote SP function e Operation is as follows based on the ON OFF status of the event input E mm Fixed SP Mode 5 43 I Section 5 Functions and Operations Program SP OFF Fixed SP ON Program SP Remote SP 5 44 When the event input is ON the fixed SP FSP is used as the SP When the event input is OFF the program SP PSP is u
413. t parameter is used to set the upper deviation for the wait operation e The Wait Band Lower Limit parameter is used to set the lower deviation for the wait operation e The wait function will not operate if the wait band is set to Parameter Setting range Unit Default value Wait Band Upper Limit O to 99 999 0 OFF 0 OFF Wait Band Lower Limit 0 to 99 999 0 OFF 0 OFF Related Information Wait in 5 7 Program Operation Functions P 5 32 Related Parameter Wait Mode Expansion Control Setting Level P 8 96 CH Program Repetitions Program Link Destination m Setting m 8 4 Program Setting Level yax J CH1 or CH2 for independent operation e The Program Repetitions parameter is used to set the number of times a program is to be repeated The number of times the program is executed will be the set value for this parameter 1 e The Program Link Destination parameter is used to set the link destination for each program Once a program has been completed the operation will continue with the program number specified for this parameter Program Repetitions 0 to 9 999 times o Program Link Destina Oto 32 0 No link tion 0 No program link Related Information Program Operations in 5 7 Program Operation Functions P 5 30 8 21 Section 8 Parameters 8 5 Adjustment Level i Aas This level contains settings for adjusting control such as auto tun
414. t to input upper limit Temperature Lower limit of input range to SP upper limit 1 SP Lower Limit Analog Larger of 19999 and EM o display value equivalent to input lower limit to SP upper limit 1 Related Parameters Input Type Input Initial Setting Level P 8 50 771 Input Temperature Units Input Initial Setting Level P 8 51 8 57 Section 8 Parameters Control Mode CH f a Setting Direct Reverse Operation 8 58 n Setting LC LIR Use this parameter to select the control mode On single input or 4 input Controller Models select standard control or heating cooling control e On two input Controller Models select standard control heating cooling control standard control vvith remote SP heating cooling control vvith remote SP proportional control cascade standard control or cascade heating cooling control Setting range Unit Default value Standard Heating cooling Remote SP standard Remote SP heating cooling Proportional Cascade standard Cascade heating cooling The setting range is O or 1 on a single or 4 input Controller Model and 0 to 6 on a 2 input Controller Model Related Information 4 6 Selecting the Control Mode P 4 15 Related Parameters Control Transfer Output Assignment Control Initial Setting 2 Level P 8 64 nx T V3 a y e When direct operation
415. tandards are as follows K J T E N R S B JIS C1602 1995 L Fe CuNi DIN 43710 1985 U Cu CuNi DIN 43710 1985 W W5Re W26Re ASTM E988 1990 Pt100 JIS C1604 1997 ICE751 A 4 ASCII Table ASCII Table lil l l l ESESEICOERERENENEN foots fs aje s s gt 2 s nl mie NENE o elmimi ir ov n m ir s sli sis ii r ei r iv wef effets le sm eee forsee cc EN 07 1 isvl l 1 se llei A 5 Appendix Setting Lists The setting lists give the addresses for CompoWay F communications and Modbus communications Refer to the addresses of the protocol that you are using The hexadecimal values in the Setting monitor value column are the setting ranges in CompoWay F and Modbus communications and the values in parentheses are the actual setting ranges Monitor and set values can be specified for each channel Addresses include a channel identifier The addresses in the variable area maps are for channel 1 To specify addresses of other channels on a Controller with more than one input channel refer to the table below Address Channel CompoWay F Address in setting list Address in setting list Address in setting list 0100 Address in setting list 4000 Address in setting list 0200 Address in setting list 8000 Address in setting list 0300 Address in setting list C000 A 6 Setting Lists x x x x e e e e Li DE gt
416. te SP Mode can be used as required 3 The control output heating status and control output cooling status are the open output status and close output status respectively during position proportional control 4 The control output heating status and control output cooling status are OFF during linear output 5 The control output heating type status and control output cooling type status are OFF when the corresponding output is a pulse voltage output A 9 Appendix E E5 R T Program Status Communications Output 1 ON 0 OFF Status ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON O LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL O O O O O O O O O O O T CN LC 02 o 02 02 o o o o S S E E e px T CN m LO O 5 5 5 5 5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 O O O O O T T t t t o o o o o D D D D D o o o o o 02 o 02 02 02 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 l 1 1 I 1 1 I 1 1 1 Segment Output 4 Time Signal 4 Segment Output 6 Time Signal 6 Segment OUI 7 1 Output 8 Segment Output 10
417. ter Operation will be performed in the same way as when the upper limit is exceeded Input error Check for an incorrect input connection broken wire or short circuit Check the Input Type parameter and input type switch settings Exceeded bottom Not an error One of these of display range messages is displayed when the Exceeded top of PV exceeds the display range RSP input error Is the wire connected to the RSP Normal display Normal Normal operation operation Normal display Normal RSP operation indicator flashes display input broken or short circuited For coordinated operation check the input type for the RSP input from channel 1 to be sure it s OFF correct and check to see if the display range has been exceeded for the channel due to a SP offset setting Check the potentiometer wiring MV at PV error If the Closed Floating parameter is set to Closed and the Operation at Poten tiometer Input Error param eter is set to OFF the value set for the MV at PV Error parameter is output otherwise normal operation takes place If the system does not operate as expected after setting the parameters check the wiring and set values once again If there is still a problem unintended set values may have been accidentally set in the param eters In this case you may want to initialize the Controller and redo your settings Potentiometer input error Normal display Norma
418. than 1 s less than 1 s less than 1 s I li key less than 1 s P P Parameter Changes within Alarm Setting Level Alarm Setting Level 8 74 ALT1 Alarm 1 Type ATLT Alarm 1 Latch OFF ON ALH1 Alarm 1 Hysteresis 0 01 to 99 99 ALT2 Alarm 2 Type 0 to 11 A2LT Alarm 2 Latch OFF ON ALH2 Alarm 2 Hysteresis 01011610199199 ALT3 Alarm 3 Type 0 to 11 A3LT Alarm 3 Latch OFF ON ALH3 Alarm 3 Hysteresis 0 01 to 99 99 2 ALT4 Alarm 4 Type 0 to 11 41 Alarm 4 Latch OFF ON ALH4 Alarm 4 Hysteresis 0 01 to 99 99 RIES Standby Sequence Reset Condition A or Condition B SB1N Auxiliary Output 1 Open in Alarm Close in alarm N O or Open in alarm N C SB2N Auxiliary Output 2 Open in Alarm Close in alarm N O or Open in alarm N C SB3N Auxiliary Output 3 Open in Alarm Close in alarm N O or Open in alarm N C SBAN Auxiliary Output 4 Open in Alarm Close in alarm N O or Open in alarm N C SB5N Auxiliary Output 5 Open in Alarm Close in alarm N O or Open in alarm N C SB6N Auxiliary Output 6 Open in Alarm Close in alarm N O or Open
419. the current segment has passed then becomes the present SP Ramp settings are for even numbered segments by setting the SP and rate of rise The following table shows an example setting The Time Unit of Ramp Rate parameter is set to Time Segment No Segment Set 30 0 Point Segment Rate of Rise Segment Time 14 00 hours minutes 5 7 Program Operation Functions I SP Seg Segment 2 Segment 4 Segment 5 Segment 6 Time h min For the E5AR T ER T Step Time programming is used for segment 1 The rate of rise programming can be selected to start from the segment 1 SP or from a PV start with slope priority e With rate of rise programming the settings are made in blocks of two segments so the final soak time cannot be set if the Number of Segments Used parameter is set to an even number Therefore the final segment will be a soak segment if the Number of Segments Used parameter is set to an odd number and will be a ramp segment if set to an even number Operation at Reset Ramp settings are made for odd numbered segments by setting the Parameter Set to SP and rate of rise Use Fixed Control The following table shows a setting example The Time Unit of Ramp Rate parameter is set to Time SegmentNo SegmentNo Segment Set 0 D 0 1 9 Point Segment Rate of 7 0 Rise Segment Time 14 00 hours minutes SP Segment 1 Segment 3 Segment4 Segment5 200 0
420. the Broken line Approximation enabled parameter to ON the default setting is OFF Broken line approximation includes the Broken Line Approximation 1 Inputs 1 to 20 and Broken line Approximation 1 Outputs 1 to 20 parameters Normalized data is used to set the values so that the lower limit of the input setting range for input 1 is 0 000 and the upper limit is 1 000 Relation to Input Normalized data is used to set the values for broken line approxi Types mation so that the lower limit of the input setting range for input 1 is Bekar in 0 000 and the upper limit is 1 000 For example if the input type of Approximation 1 Enabled input 1 is J 2 20 0 to 400 0 C and the broken line approximation is to be applied to one point 210 0 C the values are set as follows Operation result Display value 400 0 C lt 1 000 Broken line Approximation 1 Input 1 295 0 C lt 0 750 Broken line Approximation 1 Output 1 20 0 C lt 0 000 0 000 0 500 1 000 20 0 C 210 0 C 400 0 C Input Broken line Approximation 1 Input 1 0 000 Broken line Approximation 1 Output 1 0 000 Broken line Approximation 1 Input 2 0 500 Broken line Approximation 1 Output 2 0 750 Broken line Approximation 1 Input 3 1 000 Broken line Approximation 1 Output 3 1 000 ow Broken line OFF Disabled Approximation 1 Enabled O
421. the elapsed segment time the program will immediately move to the next segment 4 51 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 4 16 Operating Precautions 1 About four seconds is required for the outputs to turn ON after the power is turned ON Take this into consideration when incorporating the Controller into a sequence circuit 2 Using the Controller near radios televisions or other wireless devices may cause reception inter ference 4 52 Section 5 Functions and Operations 5 1 Input Adjustment Functions 5 2 52 Contor FUNCTIONS uuu uuu aaa ao Saib 5 8 5 3 Output Adjustment Functions 5 15 5 4 Display and Key Adjustment Functions 5 18 5 5 Protecting Settings 5 23 5 6 Alarm Adjustment Functions 5 25 5 7 Program Operation Functions 5 28 5 6 sing ul l au naa uu roues 5 39 5 9 Using a Transfer Output 5 47 5 10 Using Communications 5 49 o o L o c o gt LL I Section 5 Functions and Operations 5 1 Input Adjustment Functions B input Correction The input value can be cor
422. tin Executes the currently displayed channel Switches between execution and resetting toggle for the currently displayed channel HOLD H d Hold Hold cancel toggle hold for the currently displayed channel AADV Rud All advance BAK Backs the currently displayed channel ABAK All back Backs all channels AT Execute Switches between executing and canceling Cancel toggle AT w AT is executed for the currently selected PID set A M R Auto Manual Switches between auto and manual toggle PRG Pris Program Specifies the program number increments Selection program number by 1 Monitor Setting Displays the monitor setting items Item Set the Monitor Setting Item 1 to Monitor Setting Item 5 parameter Advanced Func tion Setting Level Key Functions as the CH Key 8 89 Section 8 Parameters Hold down the PF1 or PF2 Key for at least 1 second to execute the function selected in the PF1 Setting or PF2 Setting parameter If Program Selection Monitor Setting Item or Key is selected the display will scroll through monitor setting items 1 to 5 each time you press the key Setting range Unit Default value m a F Disabled ri Run Setting 5 Reset Run Reset toggle r r Reset Run tog Run All gle Reset All Hold Cancel Hold toggle c 4 PF1 setting All Hold Clear Advance Advance All Back Back All PF2 sletting Execute Can
423. ting 7 Setting Leve LEED Mikey Qae 17 key EVE FET ke evel ERE t less than 1 s less than 1 s less than 1 s Control in progress Parameter Changes within Operation Level Operation Level l LI 8 6 PV Manual MV Position proportional control models PV Valve Opening 1 SEG T Elapsed Segment Time Monitor SEG R Remaining Segment Time Monitor x sa na RPTM Program Execution Repetition Monitor D ra PRG Program No 1 to 32 1 2 RSP Remote SP Monitor O MV Monitor Heating ADV Advance C O MV Monitor Cooling Ht 7 V M Valve Opening Monitor 20 n STBM Remaining Standby Time Monitor 4 R R Run Reset RUN RST Lr nr PRG T Elapsed Program Time Monitor A M Auto Manual AUTO MANU 1 In manual mode CH Manual MV f 8 3 Operation Level Manual operation e This parameter sets the MV or valve opening during manual operation On a Standard Control Model the MV is changed by pressing the A and Keys On a Position proportional Control Model the A Key turns ON the open side and the zi Key turns ON the close side e On a Standard Control Model Display No 1 shows the PV and Display No 2 s
424. tion 8 Parameters Display Auto return Time f m Setting Display Refresh Period Setting Monitor Item Level Setting 8 82 f Setting ng e This parameter is used to select the amount of time without key operation that must elapse for the display to revert to the Present Value PV Preset Set Point display when in Operation Level Program Setting Level Adjustment Level Adjustment 2 Level Alarm Set Setting Level PID Setting Level Time Signal Setting Level Approximation Setting Level or Monitor Item Level e When 0 is selected the function is disabled no auto reset Setting range Unit Default value mn xg e This parameter is used to lengthen the refresh period of the monitor value display This only slows the display refresh cycle it does not affect the update period of the PV during control e To disable the function select OFF Setting range Default value RS One of the following levels can be selected as the Monitor Item Level setting Input Initial Setting Level Control Initial Setting Level Control Initial Setting 2 Level Alarm Setting Level Display Adjustment Level Communications Setting Level Advanced Function Setting Level and Expansion Control Setting Level e The Monitor Item Level is added after the Approximation Setting Level e When OFF is selected the function is disabled i e the Monitor Item Level is disabl
425. tion Level and only the PF Key is used for switching e Switching between Auto and Manual with a PF Key To switch modes hold down the PF Key for at least one second in Operation Level Program Setting Level Adjustment Level Adjustment 2 Level Alarm Set Setting Level PID Setting Level Time Signal Setting Level Approximation Setting Level Monitor Item Level or Protect Level I Section 8 Parameters Setting e Switching between Auto and Manual Using the Auto Manual Parameter To switch modes change the setting of the Auto Manual parameter in Operation Level e During cascade control if the primary loop is switched to Manual Mode when the secondary loop is in any of the following conditions the manual MV is disabled e The SP mode of the secondary loop is set to Fixed SP cascade open e The secondary loop is in Manual Mode e The operation set to be performed at an error is being performed for the secondary loop e Standard Control Models Control method Setting range Unit Default value Standard 5 0 to 105 0 76 Heating cooling 105 0 to 105 0 1 The Manual Output Method parameter Expansion Control Setting Level selects the MV that is used when Manual Mode is entered The MV prior to entering Manual Mode can be held or the Manual MV Initial Value parameter can be used e Position proportional Control Models POSION 10 0 to 110 0 proportional Related Parameters Auto M
426. tion at Reset parameter is set to Fixed Control the remaining standby time during AT execution is held e f the power is interrupted during a standby the remaining standby time is held if the Operation at Power ON parameter is set to Continue if the program is running and in Manual Mode before the power was turned OFF and if a ramp back is set e f run operation is executed in reset status the remaining standby time is set as the value for the Standby Time parameter This means the remaining standby time is continued when run operation is executed during a standby the set value for the Standby Time parameter is not initialized B End Condition The End Condition parameter is used to select the operation after a program has been completed can be selected The options are Reset Status Continue or Fixed SP Mode Operating Description status Reset status Ends operation Continue Control is continued using the SP of the last segment The final segment number is held as the segment number and the elapsed program time elapsed segment time and remaining segment time are held The time signal status at the end of operation is held If the setting of the Number of Segments Used parameter is changed after operation has completed there is no change to the operation end status but control will switch to using the SP of the last segment after the change Fixed SP Operation is continued in Fixed SP Mode after the prog
427. tions are possible Seng L K 5 5 Continue The status of the system before the power was turned OFF is resumed Control is always reset status when the power is Reset turned ON Manual Made Manual Mode is entered when the power is turned ON Ru The program is always executed from the begin ning when the power is turned ON The SP starts from the present value when the Ramp back power is turned ON and ramp operation is per formed with the previous ramp slope e The following table shows what values are held depending on the Operation at Power ON parameter setting Continue Parameter See note Segment No 4 42 4 12 Starting and Stopping Operation B Continue Parameter See note 1 Elapsed Program Held Segment Time Program Repettions Held Held Hold Status Held Hed AutofManual Held Heid See note 3 See note 4 Run Reset Hed Held Note 1 Including Ramp Back 2 If a PV start causes an invalid period time will be considered to have elapsed for the invalid period The elapsed program and segment timers will operate as outlined below when Ramp Back has been set for the Operation at Power ON parameter If power is interrupted while soaking the timer will stop until the present SP returns to the segment SP f power is interrupted during ramp operation the timer is restarted using the PV immediately after power is rest
428. tomatic selection settings and position proportional settings Level Changes at Startup Up To Expansion Control Setting Level Power on um Adjustment Adjustment 2 20 PID Setting e 6777 1 714 V Level ELA Lee Level Level LEE _ key less key less _ key less _ key less key less L key less L key less i i than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s keyLess than 1 5 L S 5 5 Ss 1 s l key key 1sor 3s Control stops more or more en cs cc a y cc os DU 1 I 1 R Initial Se Initial Alarm Setting z n 0 Tem 2 Level Level Level L Level 25 A key Nee E kal T less than 1 s less than 1 s less than 1 s less than 1 s less than 1 s I key less than 1 s 1 L ec co Passvvord input set value in general 55 169 CO Control in progress d Control stoped or more Expansion Control Setting Level p Function Setting Level L key less than 1 s
429. trol output heating for control output 9 CH2 control output cooling for control output 10 Disable 11 CH2 present set point 12 CH2 PV 13 CH2 control output heating for transfer output 14 CH2 control output cooling for transfer output 15 Disable 16 Similarly CH3 17 to 24 CH4 25 to 32 The default value is set according to the control mode setting Input Control Control Control Control Control mode t is Transfer Output Transfer Output Transfer Output Transfer Output yp 1 Assignment 2 Assignment 3 Assignment 4 Assignment tint 1 o o 0 Standard Contro 2imus i 0 9800877107 dinusi1 9 X 25 Tint i 2 o o Heating Cooling Control 2impus 2 9 l amus 2 9 Hmut Remote SP Standard Control 2ipus i o o 7778 Ainusi 0 78779 19 como ngacona zimus T 2 jo 1077 77 5 1 e s Tint Proportional Control 2inusi1 0 0 o Ainusi Tint 1 0v0n 40n1077 7 777 Cascade Standard Control 2ipus U 8080800 0108717077 Ainusi 1 je j l como is 2im si 100 7 Position proportional Control Tiput 1 86 0 6 0 8 64 8 13 Control Initial Setting 2 Level i If a pulse output is set to operate as a transfer output 3 to 8 for channel 1 the output will be OFF Related Par
430. trol with remote SP 1 Other modes 2 4 input model 4 Setting range Unit Default value Related Parameters Start Display Scan after Povver ON and Display Scan Period Display Adjustment Level P 8 83 RAM Write Mode RAR pe Use this parameter to select the write mode When writing set values to setting area 0 by Backup Mode communications the data is also written to internal EEPROM When writing set values to setting area 0 by communications the data is not written to internal EEPROM However changes to set values made by key operation are written to EEPROM RAM Write Mode e When the write mode is changed from RAM Write Mode to Backup Mode the set values in setting area O are written to internal EEPROM Setting range Unit Default value nm Backup Mode nu Backup Mode RAM Write Mode Setting Related Information 5 10 Using Communications P 5 49 8 92 8 17 Advanced Function Setting Level L Ald Move to Calibration Level Lu This parameter is used to move to Calibration Level e Use this parameter to enter the password to access Calibration Level Setting range Unit Default value Setting Related Information Section 9 User Calibration P 9 1 8 93 Section 8 Parameters 8 18 Expansion Control Setting Level i e ut This level includes parameters for advanced control settings such as operation after turning ON power PID set au
431. ts Program Time Unit 1 Setting Calig 1141 1 e This parameter is used to set the maximum number of segments that can be set in a program The default value is 16 Setting range Unit Default value wa ae n t e This parameter is used to specify the time unit for the program e The Program Time Unit parameter specifies the time unit for the following parameters The Program Time Unit parameter must be set before the following parameters can be set e Segment Time e Time Signal ON Time and Time Signal OFF Time parameters Setting range Unit Default value m Hours minutes Setting n n Minutes seconds ce 4 422 Minutes seconds deciseconds Step Time Rate of Rise Programming F 8 60 n Setting e This parameter is used to specify the programming method Ern Step Time Fr Rate of Rise Programming Related Information Rate of Rise Programming in 5 7 Program Operation Functions P 5 28 Time Unit of Ramp Rate CH PV Start A Setting 220 1 Setting 8 12 Control Initial Setting Level L kt Rate of Rise Programming This parameter is used to set the time unit for the ramp rate when rate of rise programming is used Setting range Unit Default value Utt L ht 10 hours yu Hours w Minutes bs Minutes hm Seconds Relate
432. ts 1 to 4 SUB1 to SUB4 A output to terminals B1 to B6 E5AR TL14 TAT LEISTETET EBAR TLi4L 1 SUB1 SUB2 SUB3 SUB4 m H GT e Relay output specifications are as follows 250 VAC 1 A including inrush current On the E5AR T IEL I auxiliary outputs 1 to 5 SUB1 to SUBS output to terminals B1 to B6 and auxiliary outputs 6 to 10 SUB6 to SUB10 output to terminals C1 to C6 E5AR TLJELILJ e Transistor output specifications are as follows Maximum load voltage 30 VDC Maximum load current 50 mA Residual voltage 1 5 V max Leakage current 0 4 mA max 2 2 Using the Terminals I e On the EBER TL 4L T 1 auxiliary outputs 1 to 4 SUB1 to SUBA output to terminals B1 to B6 E5ER T 14 11 B D 2 SUB suB Kan 4 AHO supa o e Relay output specifications are as follows 250 VAC 1 A e On the EBER T T L 1 auxiliary outputs 1 and 2 SUB1 and SUB2 output to terminals D3 to D6 EBER TL TL SUB1 lt lt SUB2 g ee e Transistor output specifications are as follows Maximum load voltage 30 VDC Maximum load current 50 mA Residual voltage 1 5 V max Leakage current 0 4 mA max 2 13 I Section 2 Preparations Potentiometer Inputs Terminals
433. ts Data 0000 Operation Adiustment Protection 0001 Initial Setting Protection 0002 Setting Change Protection 0003 PF Key Protection This command writes set values in the Protect Level Refer to 5 5 Protecting Settings P 5 23 for information on Protect Level This command is used in setting area 0 An operation error will occur if itis used in setting area 1 To use this command first enable using the communications writing function by executing the Communications Writing operation command and then move to Protect Level by executing the Move to Protect Level operation command MRC SRC Response code Response Codes The response for a normal end is shown above For the response codes refer to 6 6 Write to Variable Area P 6 11 Variable Number of MRC SRC type Address Bit position elements Data SOE TT eg UN i Parameter Variable Address v s NN C5 0000 to OO4F Parameters in setting area O C6 Operation Level C7 2 7 P Adjustment Level C8 Ri Adiustment 2 Level Cg Alarm Set Setting Level CA 0200 to 024F 3 PID Setting Level CB Approximation Setting Level D8 Program Setting Level 09 0300 to 034 Time Signal Setting Level 6 21 I Section 6 CompoWay F Communications 6 22 Hesponse Parameter Variable Address uma GEM CC 0000 to 003 Parameters in Setting Area 1 Input Initial Setting Level E 0100 to 013B Bi Control Initial Sett
434. ts can be set based on the time from the start of the segment PID Sets e Up to 8 PID sets can be created to store settings PID constants MV limits and automatic selection range upper limits for PID control 1 2 1 1 Main Features of the ESAR T and EBER T A wide Variety of Control Modes and Functions Bl Outputs Multi output Function High Resolution Control Period PID sets can be selected not only by directly specifying the PID set number in a program but they can also be selected automatically according to the present value deviation or set point Coordinated operation is possible with one Digital Controller for models with 2 or 4 input channels eliminating the need for slave adjusters Position proportional Control Models support floating control or closed control Floating control allows position proportional control without a potentiometer Multi outputs enable using either current outputs or voltage outputs pulses Hesolution of Current Outputs 0 to 20 mA Approx 54 000 4 to 20 mA Approx 43 000 The control period can be set as short as 0 2 seconds allowing precise time proportioning control for voltage output pulses 1 3 I Section 1 Overview 1 2 Part Names and Functions B Front Panel E5AR T Operation Indicators Channel Indicator Program Status Indicators LI A l w x
435. tus Shows the direction of change of the present SP of the present Indicators segment The indicators light as follows Rising segment top indicator fixed temperature segment middle indicator and falling segment bottom indicator 1 5 l Section 1 Overview Operation Indicators Operation NN UR Explanation indicator zd Ec channel indicator p Turns ON OFF when control output 1 turns ON OFF See note 2 Turns ON OFF when control output 2 turns ON Common OFF See note 2 indicators orange Turns ON OFF when control output 3 turns ON OFF See note 2 Turns ON OFF when control output 4 turns ON OFF See note 2 Turns ON OFF when the output function assigned to auxiliary output 1 turns ON OFF Turns ON OFF when the output function assigned Common to auxiliary output 2 turns ON OFF indicators red Turns ON OFF when the output function assigned to auxiliary output 3 turns ON OFF Individual channel ON while the program is being reset Otherwise indicator orange OFF Individual channel ON when the SP mode is set to Remote SP Mode indicator orange Otherwise OFF Individual channel ON while the program is being held Otherwise indicator orange OFF Individual channel ON while the program is waiting Otherwise OFF indicator red Individual channel ON when the SP mode is set to Fixed SP Mode indicator red Otherwise OFF Individual channel ON when operation is set to Manual M
436. ual number of data ber do not agree elements I Specified bit position is not 00 d Write data was outside of setting range l Section 6 CompoWay F Communications MK code 2203 Operation error e Unable to execute because the communications writing function is disabled e Write to setting area 1 was attempted from setting area O e Write to parameters in Protect Level was attempted from a different level AT is being executed Calibration Level is being used Unit error unit change display unit error or EEPROM error e Program number changed during programmed operation 5856060018 6 7 Operation Commands 6 7 Operation Commands Operation commands are sent using the following FINS mini command text format FINS mini Command Text Operation Related MRC SRC code information MRC SRC Specify the Operation Command FINS mini com mand Operation code Specify the operation code Related information Specify information related to the command The operation commands that are supported by the E5AR 1 ER T are listed in the following table Operation Related information code Higher byte Lower byte Communications Writing o 7 0 OFF disabled 1 ON enabled 01 Run Reset 0to3 F 2 0 Run 1 Reset 037 AT Execute 0 to 3 F 0 Current PID set number 1 to 8 PID set number 047 RAM Write Mode 07 0 Backup Mode 1 RAM Write Mode 05 Save RAM Data 07 Softvvare Reset
437. uction Noise Reduction Input Initial Setting Level PV Decimal Point Display Input Initial Setting Level 5 7 I Section 5 Functions and Operations 5 2 Control Functions B Alarm Sets Up to 4 alarm sets with registered alarm values can be created Alarm set number 1 2 re a Alarm Values 1 to 4 240 0 300 0 Alarm Values e The alarm values for alarms 1 to 4 are set according to the alarm Alarm Set 1 Alarm Value 1 type Alarms for which the Alarm Type parameter is set to No LRL Alarm will not be displayed e Refer to 4 11 Using Auxiliary Outputs P 4 37 for information on how to set parameters Alarm Set 1 e The first number in the setting is the alarm set number Alarm Upper Limit 1 x cH 44 K Procedure This section describes how to set the Alarm Set 2 Alarm Value 1 parameter The settings in the following table are used as an example Operation Level Operation Level PV SP 5 8 5 2 Control Functions I Display Alarm Set Selection 1 Press the Key repeatedly to move to the Alarm Set Setting Level parameter Display No 3 will show L AL n kL x gt p ou N Use the A a
438. ueg pem wesbold 44O 0 66666 01 0 46981000 H 01 00000000 H HO quur 4edd pueg pem wesbold iz 91 L V0000000 H 01 L0000000 H HO Jequinw 195 uuely urejDo4g n d 1ndui n o Buipio55v uonisod Dunes 1959 Eu juod jewloeq inejeg J o Buipio55v E Ke dsiq Suoneoiunuuuioo J AeAqoduJo2 luo lqissod si Dunes uonoejes oneuioine 0 8 01 0 80000000 H 01 00000000 H JequinN 18S did L 8900 0900 0200 VLOO 8100 0100 L LOO 0100 9000 S000 7000 8000 0000 1000 pesr sjueuuDes Jo JequinwN Wesbold 0000 vq 1 uueJeq sseippy sseuppv ed eqeue 4 eyeq weibold sjueuuBes Jo JequunN o L L0000000 H 1oyuou Bumes Keyds q ES I L 22 5 8 A 39 Appendix HO 7 UlOd 19 1u u 6 s S 1u u B s Wwesbold 0071 UlOd 19 1u u6 s r lu u 6 s 4 0001 F 0090 JUIOd 18S 1u u 6 s g 1u u B s Wwesbold I LL L HO luloq 195 1ueuiDes 1 se owes y si BulMOllo eu L H c juawbas wesboldg 1 NO 10000000 H OL 1ndino juewbes 440 0 440 00000000 HO yuawBas weibold 1 NO 10000000 H 6 indino juewbes 440 440 00000000 yuawBas weibold 1 NO L0000000 H g indino juewbes 440 0 4 00000000 1ueui amp eg 1 NO L0000000 H Z 1ndino juewbes 4540 440
439. ustment Adjustment 2 Time Signal PID Setting Alarm Set Approximation Level Level Level Level Setting Level 51 Seung 1 iH IL Ra L Aa 7 Level 2 Level Level PEEL 1655 _ key less key less key less key less key less key less than 15 than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s i 1 key less than 1 s key key 1s 3s Control stops or more or more f ia Fe ii UT I Input Initial gt Control Initial Control Initial 9 Display Communications I Setting Setting Setting Alarm Setting Adjustment Setting D a Level Level koy Hey Level koy BB 1 less than 1 s less than 1 s less than 1 s less than 1 s less than 1 s 1 key less than 1 5 I L Sd p ws a p om o IE mm x c o 1 lt Password input set value 65 169 Co Control in progress or more Advanced Expansion Function Setting Control Setting O Control stopped Level Level i key 222 less than 1 s Parameter Changes within Advanced Function Setting Level To move to the Advanced Function Setting Level set the Initial Setting Protection parameter in Protect Level to 0 and then enter the password 169 in the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter Input Initial Setting Level Advanced Fu
440. utput Cooling Channel 3 Control Output Heating Channel 4 Control Output Heating e When outputs are used as control outputs assignments are made automatically based on the control mode setting as shown on the following page There is no need to change the assignments e To use an output as a transfer output assign the data you wish to transfer to an unused output If a transfer output is assigned to a pulse voltage output the output will turn OFF 4 21 Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control Control lers with 1 Controllers with Control mode 2 inputs Standard Control Heating Cooling Control Standard Control with Remote SP IN1 IN2 Remote SP IN1 IN2 Remote SP Heating Cooling Control with Remote SP IN1 por onal IN2 Ratio setting Control Cascade Standard Control IN1 Primary loop IN2 Secondary loop Cascade Heating Cooling Control IN1 Primary loop IN2 Secondary Position proportional Control 4 22 Control lers with 4 Control Transfer output assignment OUT1 Channel 1 Control Output Heating OUT2 Channel 2 Control Output Heating Channel 3 Control Output Heating Channel 4 Control Output Heating Channel 1 Control Output Heating Channel 1 Control Output Cooling Channel 2 Control Output Heating Channel 2 Control Output Cooling OUT2 OUT 1 OUT2 OUT 1 OUT2 Channel 1 Control Output Heating Channel 1 Contro
441. ve For the response codes refer to 6 7 Operation Commands P 6 13 B Controller Attribute Read 6 36 Response MRC SRC This command reads the E5AR T ER T model number and communi cations buffer size The command can be used in any state of the E5AR T ER T MRC SRC Response code Format Buffer size Response Codes The response for a normal end is shown above For the response codes refer to 6 5 Read from Variable Area P 6 10 6 9 Commands and Responses I Model Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 E s MON n BMB Bytes 7 to 9 are not used 1 Size Standard position proportional Position proportional 6 37 I Section 6 CompoWay F Communications B Controller Status Read Response 6 Operating Status Related Information 6 38 MRC SRC Es This command reads the operating status of the ESAR T ER T The command can be used in any state of the ESAR T ER T Operation MRC SRC Response code state Related information Ce Te Tie TT Response Codes The response for a normal end is shown above For the response codes refer to 6 5 Read from Variable Area P 6 10 Bitposiion 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit position Operating status Operating Stopped including setting area 1 01 Error MV at PV error output 11 Manual Mode The operating status of each channel is indicated using a 2 bit code Bit position 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit value T sq 0 6 9 Commands and Resp
442. vel P 8 19 PID Automatic Selection Range Upper Limit PID Setting Level P 8 42 8 98 8 18 Expansion Control Setting Level L Eu CH PV Dead Band F g Position proportional Control Model e This parameter is used on a Position proportional Control Model so that PV SP when the PV is within the PV dead band e This function prevents unnecessary output when the PV is near the SP Setting range Unit Default value e 0 to 99999 0 Setting Related Parameters Reference Closed Floating Control Initial Setting Level P 8 59 Motor Calibration Control Initial Setting 2 Level P 8 72 Travel Time Control Initial Setting 2 Level P 8 73 Position proportional Dead Band Adjustment Level P 8 27 Open Close Hysteresis Adjustment Level P 8 28 Operation at Potentiometer Input Error Expansion Control Setting Level P 8 104 Input Cold Junction Compensation LaL 1 to 4 Thermocouple input specify whether cold junction compensation is performed inside the Controller or outside the Controller pe When using a thermocouple input these parameters are used to Select External when two thermocouples are used to measure the temperature difference or when an external cold junction compen sator is used for increased accuracy n Setting range Unit Default value 3 External an Internal Internal Setting Related Parameters My Input Type Input In
443. vel t L This level contains Initial setting parameters for inputs including input types temperature units and scaling settings Level Changes at Startup Up To Input Initial Setting Level Povver ON 4 x l Operation Adjustment Adjustment 2 7 PID Setting 7 7577 y Level AJJ Cee 1 gg evel para Lee Eva deei j J Level 1 C key less key less key less key less C key less key less key less l than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s than 1 s key less than 1 s A Lu ee diei 2 key key 1s or 3s Control stops more or more UTRUM Input Initial Control Initial Control Initial 9 f Display Communications I Setting Setting rz di Adiustment Setting I Level JL u J Level jJ eveli L Level 1 4 Level L 1 1655 key less key less key less key less i than1s than1s than1s than 1 s than 1 s li lI key less than 1 s ee es ee 4 1 da CO Control in progress CO Control stopped L tik INP T 2 o
444. vr Elapsed Program Time Monitor mp Lx t nm Elapsed Segment Time Monitor p ya w Vd Fu Lt Remaining Segment Time Monitor These parameters are used to monitor the progress of the program e The Remaining Standby Time Monitor parameter monitors how much standby time is remaining e The Elapsed Program Time Monitor parameter monitors how much time has elapsed since the start of the current program e The Elapsed Segment Time Monitor parameter monitors how much time has elapsed since the start of the current segment e The Remaining Segment Time Monitor monitors how much time is left for the current segment Com Monitorrange Um Remaining Standby Time Monitor 0 00 to 99 59 Monitor Elapsed Program Time Monitor 0 00 to 99 59 or program time Elapsed Segment Time Monitor 0 00 0 to 99 59 9 unit Remaining Segment Time Monitor Related Information 5 7 Program Operation Functions P 5 28 Related Parameters Standby Time Adjustment Level P 8 28 CH Program Execution Repetition Monitor c E mM Running e This parameter is used to monitor the number of times a program has been repeated Wonitorrange Unit Monitor Related Information 5 7 Program Operation Functions P 5 28 Related Parameters Program Repetitions Program Setting Level P 8 21 8 3 Operation Level CH
445. w e 9g aw N ZIN ra o o rim rim t x e e m m m yu w cH Starts display scan 4 Auto startup at power ON e Start Display Scan after Power ON is ON e Display Scan Period is not O E CH key is enabled cH for 1 second display flashes TTC PV Present Set Point EO LEE Ss nili ri E LI L L MG 4 CMW MANU lq LI cH for 2 seconds or more PV Present Set Point PV Present Set Point Display scan Operation Y i i i Display automatically changes to next channel when the period in Display Scan Period parameter elapses see mn umo s GEM EMO eee s s m umm en l cH Stops display scan Display scan stopped 1 second or more PV Present Set Point Normal operation 3 rir af 124 nnn LL LL I I 4
446. xyasd sen eA JoyuouJ Bunes 66666 01 6666 1 16981000H 01 1318 eGues 10ju0u BDumes c 9n eA WEY 195 wey WWI 49 07 wey 1es wey yuq dd wiely 1es uuelv nfEA Wely 195 wely uonoejes 18S uue y Aeydsiq JojeueJeg 8060 7000 9060 2000 7060 2000 60 ssop sseuppy sem snapow 3ifewoduoo I A um s 1es uue v A 18 Setting Lists dS nur s dd bueu uonoe eg oneuJloiny did AQ hurri s ddn ebuey uonoe eg oneuJloiny did pueg jeuonJodoJd did dS xun s dd ebuey uonoes eg oneuJloiny did AQ hurri s ddn ebuey uonoe eg oneuJloiny did pueg 4 2 did 2170 6000 dS xun s dd ebueu uonoejeg oneuloiny Ald O6VO 8700 AQ Wu s ddn ebuey o 66666 O 66661 16981000H 01 1 31 8 uonoejes onewomny did oLvo eooo edA 1ndui Ad yuq seddq ebuey o 66666 01 66661 16981000H 0 L3I84224 H uonoejes oneuoiny did 070 01 0 S0L 00000000 H s ata 77 V0 uu s ddn AW 01 0 S 39444444 H H lq SE s peso o j euon1odoud uonisog pjepuels WIT 9407 AN L Ald 0 SOL 01 070 V VT00000HH O 00000000H ullooo Suye H 0901 01 L O Iur 907 AN p so 5 euolluodoid uonisoq piepue s 1417 4eddAQ AW L did SPU0D9G 06 666 01 0070 92V L9000 H 01 00000000 H c 9UII AHEAH Q Ald 06 666 01 017
447. y unit error or EEPROM error cl Fn 6 8 Setting Areas 6 8 Setting Areas The E5AR T ER T has two setting areas for communications Setting area O and setting area 1 In setting area 0 operation continues Setting area 0 makes it possible to perform operations that require operation to be in progress such as reading the PV writing an SP and starting resetting operation Run Heset as well as operations that do not interfere with control On the other hand operations that may change control such as writing initial set values cannot be performed Set values that cannot be written can still be read In setting area 1 operation is stopped This makes it possible to perform operations such as writing initial set values which cannot be written in setting area O When the power is turned ON setting area O is selected To access setting area 1 use the Move to Setting Area 1 operation command To return to setting area O from setting area 1 turn OFF the power or use the Software Reset operation command Software Reset command Setting area 0 Move to Setting Setting area 1 Area 1 command Operation in progress Operation stopped Variable Description type Communications Monitor Protect Level Operation Level Adjustment Level Adjustment 2 Level Setting area 0 Operation in Alarm Set Setting Level progress PID Setting Level Approximation Setting Level D Program Setting Level Time Signal Sett
448. ype Input Initial Setting Level P 8 50 x yu x bm X Control with remote SP 1 hm Ct e This parameter sets the upper and lower limits for the remote SP The remote SP upper limit is set with respect to the upper input range limit of input 2 and the remote SP lower limit is set with respect to the lower input range limit of input 2 For example if input 2 is set to 4 to 20 mA the remote SP upper limit is set with respect to 20 mA and the remote SP lower limit is set with respect to 4 mA e If the Input Type Temperature Units or scaling parameters for input 1 are changed the upper and lower limit settings are changed to the upper and lower limits of the sensor The decimal point position depends on the selected sensor For an analog input the decimal point position depends on the Decimal Point Position parameter RSP Remote SP Upper Limit hr E Input type 4 to 20 mA Remote SP Lower Limit Input mA 4 20 The SP limits are in effect and therefore if the input remote SP is above or below the SP limits the SP will be clamped to the upper or lower limit During cascade control only channel 2 is displayed 8 11 Input Initial Setting Level L Zi Setting range Unit Default value 1 Remote SP Temperature Upper Limit Lower limit of sensor set EU 1300 0 i ting range to upper limit of Setting sensor setting range Analog Re
449. yw pue Jeddn jeg indui SAO O Se pezi eniui ase s um s peDueuo sen eA ejdsip Bui jeos Jo yun eunje1eduuo d i 1101 v uSuM en eA ejdsip aul se awes eui 51 d eiep OU Z 0400 epeos o JO opis 1epuooes Z Jeuueuo 40 1nel p eui SI GS 4 0nu09 p xIJ 0 195 SI JOSEY 1e uoneJjedo 1011U02 epeose o 10 epis f1epuooes g jeuueuo pue uonejedo pejeuipiooo JO 01 Z Sjeuueuo 410 1 eui SI GSH Ly 66666 O 66661 46981000 H 01 131 8 1 JOSHO lOd 19S 0 UIPIM 1ueureBpnr eouequmisid vv40 666 6 01 00070 40220000 01 00000000 H pueg sueq n s q 66 66 01 1070 40 20000 01 L0000000 H SU eouegJnisi 0011 01 00 L 9000000 01 O6444444 H 4122 eouequnisi 66 666 Ol 6666 L 4698 1000H O L318 224 H U g Uol o9911oO 1ndu uonoel02 66666 01 66661 16981000H 01 L318J4HJ4H 2 indu Jo Z enjeA 1ndu 1 boy REI Lc M Eg al E 3 En mz kh C 0 cn 66 666 66 661 16981000H Ol L3183244 H indul 2240 9100 3 0 00c 66666 01 66661 16981000H 01 1414 1 1 11H ynduj 40 enjeA indul vzZO 9100 ZO uonisod oin sseJppy sseJppy ed ejqeueA 19 lu x Keyds souuoul um

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

DesignAZ MODELE - copie - Les anciens sites web de la DGE    I TI UAL - Sears PartsDirect  DC18SF  取扱説明書  - HS  Lochinvar SDT/SET065 User's Manual  SISTEMAS COMPLETUS Em Rede Local  Bedienungsanleitung Humax PR-HD2000C (PDF 1,6  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file